HP (Hewlett-Packard) 3490A User Manual

o

.(D

s

c

L

o

P

E

R

A

T

ruGAFiä3

s€Rtvt#ffi

MAru

g-F

A

l-

7:'

;s,

;;:''

tt,,,,t,

?i'-"

';i:

'

;

M

U

ITIM

ETE

R

349:04

HEWLETT

PACKARD

T
!-,

ö.,

A

(o.

D=.'

HEWLE"WPACKARD

CE

RTI

FI

CATI

tII

O

The Hewlett-Paclnrd

thoroughly
specifications
Paclard
m,mts

tlrc

ertmt allowed

tested,

Com,pany

are traceable

ond. inspected

whm it

further

by the Brneau's

to

WARRA]TTY

All Hewlett-Packard
materials
from
nents
will

repair
the warranty
Packard.
liable

and workrnanship."'This

the date of

listed in

or replace

No

for

consequential

delivery,

the

operating

period

other warranty

Company

was

shipped

certifies

the

U.S.

ATD

products

or, in'the

manual,

products

provided

damages.

which

is

certifins

and

lrom

Natiornl

that

this instrammt

fourd

tlmt

calibration

to meet its

the

factorU.

its

calibration rneo$re-

Bureau

facility.

ASSISTAITCE

warranted

are

warranty

case of

for

the specified

prove

they

expressed

are returned

against defects in

applies

certain

to be defective

or implied. We

pu,blished

The Hewlett-

of

Standards

for

one

major

to Hewlett-

compo-

period.

during

are not

was

to

year

We

Service
for
pair

For
Service

contracts

Hewlett-Packard

on-site.

any

assistance,

Office. Addresses

or customer

products

contact

your

provided

are

assistance

that require maintenance

nearest

agreements

Hewlett-Packard

at

the back

are

of this manual.

available

and re-

Sales

and

v

!;:,'
;.t;

:i;
!:..

::::

OPERATING

The main

.:

-:

:

'.

"

Any changes
printing
supplied
supplement,
which apply to
the manual.
factured

will

before

AITD

Manual Part No.

Microfiche Part No. 03490-90064

MODEL

M U tTIM

body of this

made in instruments

be found in

with this

if one exists

your

Backdatinginformation

this

SERYICE

03490-90014

3490A

ETE R

manual

Serial Prefix

manual. Be
instrument
printing

applies to

"Manual

a
for

this manual,

will

MAIIUAI

1211A

manufactured

Changes"

sure . to examine

and record

for

instruments

be found

after

supplement

for

any changes

these

changes

in

Section VIII.

this

this

in

manu-

Copyright Hewlett-Pack

Box

301,

l,oveland,

P.O.

afi

Company | 97 2

Colorado 80537

U.S.A

Printed:

APRIL

1974

Model3490A

Table

of

Contents

Section
I.

Section
II.

Section
Iil.

GENERALINFORMATION...

l-1.
l-5.
l-8.
l-10.

INSTALLATION
2-l­2-3.
2-5.
2-8.

2-10.

2-14.
2-16.
2-17.
2-19.
2-21.
2-23.

2-25.

2-27.

2-29.

2-30.

2-32.

2-34.

2-36.

242. Sample/Hold

Introduction
Specifications
Options
AccessoriesSupplied
AccessoriesAvailable

l-12.

Instrument

l-14.

Identification

Introduction
Initiallnspection..
Power Requirements
PowerCordsandReceptacles
GroundingRequirements...
Environmental
Installation

BenchUse

RackMounting....

Installationofoptions

Isolated

Option 021

Isolated Remote

(hpllr22{).

Option050andOption060

InterfaceConnections

Data Output

RemoteControlOption
Rear Input

General

Connections
2-38.
24O

246. RepackagingforShipment

OPERATING
3-1.
3-3. InstrumentCapabilities

3-4­3-6. Output
3-9.
3-ll.
3-13. Front and Rear
3-15. MadmumlnputVoltages

3-17.
3-18. Turn-OnandWarm-Up
3-20.
3-24.

3-26.

3-28.
3-30.
3-32.

InterfaceCableLength
Trigger

GPIBOption030
Option

INSTRUCTIONS.

Introduction

Standardlnstrument

Sample/Hold
Ratio Option

General Operatinglnstructions

Guarding
FloatingMeasurements
Overrange
Overloadlndication
Rangelndication
Functionlndication

....

and Manual

ANDINTERFACE

Requirements

Data OutPut

(-hp

lll2lA)

OPtionO22

OPtion

Purpose

Connections,

UO|O4|

and Remote

Measurements

021

022.....

Interface

Connections,

. .

Control

080 . .
Panel

..

040

Description

...........3-l

.....

Option

Bus

or &15

TABLE OF

......I-1

...1-l

.'-.l-l

-......1-1

...1-l
...1-1

......1-2

.. ... .2-I

. .

..-2-l

....2-l

- . .2-l

.. - .....2-l

.. . - ..2-1

. . .

. - . . . 2-l

. . .

....2-2

-...2-2

-...2-2

....

-...2-2

....

. . . .. .2-2

..

---..2-2

.....

..

...'....2-3

.. .

-. -2-3
. . .24

...'-..24

......2-6

.......2-8

. .. .

. ..

.....2-9

..

--...'.3-l

....'...3-1

Options

. ' . .3-1

.. . .

..

- . .

.

. -...

......3-2

.....3'2

.....

. . . . .

. . . .

........3-3

...-....3-3

........3-3

Page

Page

-2-3

-2:2

.2-8

Page

..3-I

...3-1

.3-l

. .3-l

-3-l

..3-2

-.3-2

- 3-3

CONTENTS

Section

-'-''

':

(cont'd)

III
3-34.
3-36.
3-38.

340. DCVoltageMeasurements

342.

344.

346.

348. AC

3-50.
3-52. Inputlmpedance
3-54. HarmonicDistortion
3-56. Resistance
3-58.
3-60.
3-62-

3-64. External Trigger
3-66. Data Output
3-68.
3-71. Input
3-73.
3-75. Remote Control
3-77. InputSignal Requirements
3-79.

3-81. Remote
3-83.
3-85.
3-81.

3-90.
3-101. Talk
3-103.

3-131. GPIB Operating
3-136. Control

3-139.

3-140. Definition
3-152.

3-156. Guard Connection
3-158. Input

3-160.

3-165.
3-173. Usingthe

3-179. Using
3-182.
3-184.
3-186.
3-188.
3-190.

3-192.

Autoranging

ManualTrigger

Self-TestOperation

DC

Sample

ResponseTime.

Input Resistance

ACVoltageMeasurements

Sample

ResponseTime.

FrequencyRange.

Measurements

InputConnections

Signal Voltage

Ohms
Ohmmeter

ResponseTime.

Output Signals

Sigrals

Data Output

OutputSignals

Programming
Remote Control
Remote Control

General

Sample/Hold

Purpose

I/O(Option030) .

Bus

GPIB

Only

GPIB Control

by

Programmer
(Option

Special S/H

Considerations
Measurements

Signal

Sample/Hold

Requirements

Initiating

Measurement

the

50

Using

Measurements

Ratio

External
InputConnections

RatioDisplaY
RatioMeasurementProcedure

and

Rate

.. . .. .. ... .34

Rate and

.. ........34

. ........3-5

and Current

Sample

(Option

Signals

(No

040

of

a

Track/HoldMode
Acquire/Hold

Hz

Reference

Rate and

(Option

O2l)

and

l,evels

and hvels

Isolation

(Option

of Test

Isolation . .

Interface Bus

Controller) . .

of3490A

Example

Marked Card

Measurements

or 045)

Sample/Hold

Operating

....

in

.....

Limitations

Trigger Signal

.....

Sample/Hold

Hz

or 60

(Option

Voltages

........3-3

...........

........34

. . . . . . . . . . . .34

. . .. .

020)
. .

022) ..

..... ....34

Procedure . . . .34

Function . . .34

........3-7

..

Terms . . . 3-15

Sample/Hold

Mode

Power

080).

.

Page

......3-3

....3-3

3-3

....34

.....34

....34

...34

. . . . 3-5

....3-5

. 3-5

. .
. . .3-5

3-5

. . . .

. . . . .34

.

.. . . . .3-6

..

. .34

. .

......36

. .34

. . . .3-7

. .

. .

. . . 3-8

.. . . .3-8

. . . 3-13

.....-3-14

. . . .3-15

......3-16

......3-16

.

.3-16

..

.....'3-16

-3-17

....

.... ..

Source . 3-21

. 3-18

. .

. .

.3-20

. . .3-21

- - -. ...3-21

.......3-21

......3'21

-3-21

.' - -

iii

Table of

Contents

Model 34904

Section
IV.

4-48.
4-50.
4-52.
4-54.
4-56.
4-58.

440.

442.

444.

4-66.

448.
4:70.
4-71.
4-73.
4-75.
4-77.

4-79.
4-81.

442.

444.

4-86.
+88.
4-90.
4-105.
4-107.

4-113.
+l15.
+117.
4-1
+122.

+118.

THEORYOFOPERATION

4-1.
4-3.
4-5.
4-7.
4-9.
4-ll.
4-13.
4-15.
4-17.
4-19.

4:21. InputAttenuator
4-23.
4-25.
4-27.
4-29.
4-31.
4-33.
4-35.
4-37.
4-39.

440.

42. IntegratingAmplifier
4

446.

Introduction
General Theory

Signal Conditioning
ReferenceVoltages
DC

Amplifier

Analog-to-Dgital
Logrc .
Display

Range

and Function

DC

Analog

DC
DC Amplifier
SwitchingCircuits
BootstrapCircuit
Reference
OverloadProtection
Leakage
DC

Integrator

Dual-Slope

44.

x

20 Amplifiet

ZeroDelectAmplifier

ElectronicSwitch
Integrator

AC

Converter
AC
ConverterAmplifier
Rectifier

OhmsConverter....

CunentSource
Ohmmeter Power
OhmmeterReference
InputProtection...

Dsplay

Display

ScanGenerator....

ScanDecoder
PolarityDisplay
Decimals

IngicCircuits

Clock.
DataCounter
Buffers
Timing

Algorithmic
Input
Transfer
OverloadStorage

DC

Switching

ReferenceSupplies

18.

Voltage
RatioMeasurements

(Option080)

Front

Circuits

Amplifier

Voltages

Control

Amplifier

Circuits

Integration

Auto Zero

Attenuators

and Filter

Assembly

Units .

and

Counter

State Machine

Polarity

andZero

Logic .

Measurements

Panel

Switching

.

of

Operation

Circuits . . .

Converter

Control

..

Gain .

Auto Zero

-..

..

Supply

(Figure

Annunciators

....

Storage

.

7-27).......44

Detect

....

TABLE

........4-I

...4-l
. . .4-l

. . . .

...4-l

......

.

. .

. .. . . 4-l

......4-l

......4:2

. . . -

. . . 4-2

.. - .4-2

........4-z

. .....

... .....4-3

....4-3

....4-3

. .

........43

.....43

. .

. . .4-3

.

.. .

.. .,..4-s

.......4-5

. . .M

......M

....M

. . -

...

.

. .44

...44

........44

. . .
...*7

......4-7

.

. . .4-7

.......+g

..+9.

......4-g

........+g

.......4-8

.....4-8

. . . . . . .

....4-8

......43

.......+9

......+9

.

.. . .

. . . .

. . .

.

.. . .

.
. . .
...+13

. . +13

...+13

.......

....+14

.

... . . .4-15

0F C0NTENTS

Page

. 4-l
.4-l

.+3

.4-3

.4-s

.44

+7

,"

. 4-B

+9
+ll
4_12

4-12

+13

(Gont'd)

Section IV

4-130. PowerSupplies
4-132.
4-134.
+137.

4-139.
+141.
4-143.
4-145.

+147.

4-149.

4-150.
4-152.
4-154.
4-158.
+160.
4-162.
4-164.

+166. Isolation

4-168.
+170.
4-172.
4-174.
4-176.
+178.
4-180.

4-182.
4-184.
+186.
4-188.

.

+19O.
4-192.

4:194.

4-196.

+198.

4-201.

4-204.
4-212.
+214.
+216.

4-218.
4-221.

4-228.

Section
V.

MAINTENANCE
5-1. Introduction
5-3.

5-5. TestRecord
5-7. PerformanceTests.
5-9. DCVoltmeterAccuracyTest..
5-l l.
5-15.
5-16.

(cont'd)

...

Self-TestFunction

LogicTest,No.

lOVRangeZero,TestNo.
TurnoverError,
f

ReferenceCheck,TestNo.

0.1 VRangeZero,TestNo.

x.0l

Atten., x 100

TestNo.6....

Ohms

Reference,TestNo.

BCD

Remote

(FigureT-31)
Outguard Power
Isolated
Sample/HoldTriggerCircuits

Data

DataMultiplexers
DataOutputSequential
Data

ShiftRegisters
DataFlag
PrinterHold.

Remote

Circuitlsolation
RemoteEnable
OutguardMultiplexer

Remote
Program
Data
Shift
Local/RemoteMultiplexers
Local/RemoteFlip-Flop
Data Flag

General Purpose

I/O
GPIBSystem
Basic
GPIB

Sample/Hold

Track/Hold
Acquire/HoldMode
Sample/HoldMeasurement

Sequence
Sample/HoldAnalogCircuits
Sample/Hold

RecommendedTestEquipment.

AC Voltmeter
OhmmeterAccuracyTests..

PreferredMethod

Trigger

Output

Clock

Control

Sequential

Clock

Registers

(Option

Theory

System

...

I

.

TestNo.

Expand

Supply

and Hold

Option

Assembly

Flag

Option 040 or

Mode .

Accuracy

021

..

....

Option 022 .

Logrc

.

Interface

030) .

of

GPIB I/O

Operation

Logic

Circuits . .

Tests

Gain,

Option

..

Logic .....

Bus

.

.

....4-16

2

. .....

3

. .......

4 .....

5

. .....

7 .

......4-17

020

.....4-t7

- . . .4-l,l

.

..

.......4-18

.......4-19

......+19

.. .

. .. .+19

-...+19

...-.+19

......+19

.

...

.....4-20

. ......4-20

....+2O

.. ..

......4-20

Circuits

. .

045 . . . .

......4-22

...

...4-23

. . . . . +25

... . s]r

.....5-l

..

...

.....5-l

......5-l

.... -5-2

......5-2

page

...4-15

..+16

+17

4-17
4-17
4-17

..4-17

zt-18

. .

.
.. . 4-18
. .

.4-18

4-18

.

. +lg

. .4-18

...+19

. - 4-19

-.+19
. .4-20

.

. .4-20

. . .4-20

. . +21
. .4-21

.4-22

. .4-22

..+22

Pase

.. .

5-l

...5-l
. . .

5-l

ir-

Model3490A

Table

of

Contents

(cont'd)

Section

Section
VI.

V

5-18.

5-2O-D0Common-ModeRejectionTest ......5-2

5-22.
5-24-

5-26.

5-28.

5-30. Sampli/Hold
5-32. Sample/Hold DC Measurement

5-34.
5-36. RatioPerformance(Option080)..
5-38. DC/DC Ratio

541. AClDCRatioAccuracyTest

543-

545. GPIB

547.

549.

5-51.
5-53. PowerSupplyAdjustment
5-55.
5-57.

5-59.

561.

563.

544.

5-65.
5-66.
5-69.Sample/HoldAdjustments.
5-71.

5-73.
5-75.
5-77.
5-79.

REPLACEABLEPARTS
6-1.
6-1
6-6.

6-8.

Ätemate

A9Common-ModeRejectionTest
AC Normal-Mode
DcVoltmeterlnput

Resistance

AcVoltmeterlnput

ImpedanceTest.
(Option04OlO45)
AccuracyTest..

Sample/Hold Response

ExternalReferenceinput

ResistanceTest..

General

Test Procedure

Model

AdjustmentProcedures...
DCZeroAdjustments..

ReferenceAdjustments...

DC

Amplifier

ACCorrverterAdjustments

lVRangeAdjüstments
l0VRangeAdjustments
100

OhmmeterAdjustments..

Offset
Offset
Dielectric
Response

Ratio

Introduction
Orderinglnformation
Non-Listedparts

ProprietaryParts.

Method

Test

Performance

Accuracy

Operational

Test Procedure

Using

98204

Calcrilator

Adjustments

V

Range

Aäjustments

Gain

Adjustment

Adjustment

Absorption

Adjustment

Reference

Adjustments

Rejection

..

Test

Tests

(Option

Check

.

.-.

.

Adjustment

......

.

rABLE

Test

..

030)

.

......5-14

.......5-15

......s-15

......5-16

. ..

........6_l

OF

CONTENTS

Page

. .

... .5-2

......54

......54

....

.54

.....S-5

.....5-5

......54

...

..5-6

......5-7 711.

.....5-g

.....5-8

..

.5-8

.

. .

5-l I

. . .

. .

l

5-l

.....5-14

.....S-15

.....5-15 !'t7'

.....5-16

.

. .

.

5-16

.....5-16

.. .5-16
. . .5-17

.

.. .5-17

..

. .

......6-I

.....6-l

.....6-l

S-iA

.5-lg

page

...6:l

t^'

r.

(Cont,d)

Section
VII.

SCCtiON

VlI.

TROUBLESHOOTING
CIRCUITDIAGRAMS
7-1.

7-3.
7'5.
7-7­7--9.

7-13.

7-15-

7-17­7-22.
7-25.

7-27.

737'
!19

t4z'

- ,6 _

t4ö-

7-50.

t-)2'

!-)5'

1-t?'sample/HoldSJrvicing
!-bu'

743'

!t2

t4'1.

749-

7'73.
7-75.
7'77.

BACKDATING
g_1.

g_3.
g-5. partsNotUsted.

Introduction

Preliminary

TroubleshootingTrees
Access
PowerSupplyChecks
DCAnalogCircuits

,{2
DCAmplifierChecks
DC
ReplacementofQCR3Ol

A-to-D
IntegratorTroubleshooting

OhmsConverterTroubleshootlng.....74

DisplayTroubleshooting
LogicTroubleshooting

Suggestions

Data

(Option

Remote

(OptionO22)

GPIBTroubleshooting

(Option030)

GeneralChecks
ExternalTriggeiCircuitCheck.
AccesstoSample/HoldCircuits

Operating

Sample/HoldAssembliesRemoved..T6
Sample/HoldTroubleshootingTrees...T4
Ratio

External

Checks

Reference

SchematicNores.

Logic

Introduction

Change

AND

Troubleshooting

for

Servicing

Assembly

Amplifier

Conversion

Output

Control

Troubleshooting

Gate

....

Sequence

Exchange
Switching

Circuit

..

. . .

Troubleshooting

O2l) .

Troubleshooting

.
.

the

3490A

Reference

.

Polarity

Symbols

Amplifier

Logic

.......7-l

...

...

........7-l

........7-l

.......7-2

Circuits
Checks

............7-s

with

Checks

.
.

..........74

. . .

.....7-5

.....'l-5

......7-s

.....74

........74

.....74

. . ..

.....7_g

.....g_l

........

........g_l

page

...7-l
. . .7-l

..

. .7-l

....7-2

.

. . .

.7-2

. . .

.7-3

....7-3

..

. .7-3

..

.7-5

. .7-5

. . ..7-8

.

. .

.7A

. . .

. 7-8

.

. .

.7-g

PAgE

... .8_l

g_l

APPENDICES

A.

Code

B.

Sales

List

of Manufacturers

and

Service

Offices

Table of Contents

Model 34904

LIST

OF

Figure
2-1 . Line Voltage Selection . . .2-l

PowerCordConfigurations .... .......2-l

2-2.

2-3. Model3490ADimensions ......2-2

24. Installation of
and

2-5.

Data OutputConnections, Option 021 ........24

2-6. Remote

2-7. RearlnputConnectorandCable .......2-6

2-8. Interface Bus Cables
2-9. General

2-10. Tigger Connections, GPIB Option 030 . . .. . .

2-l I . Trigger Connections
3-1. Front and
3-2. Connecting the Guard .
3-3.

OhmmeterlnputConnections . ........3-5

34. External Trigger
3-5. Option
3-6. Remote Program
3-7 . Position of Jumper

Mother
3-8. Timing Diagram,
3-9.

Timing Diagram, 3490A

3-10.

Example ofMarked CardProgramming

3-1 l. Typical Response to

InputVoltage....

3-12.

Di$tizingaRamp

3-13. Using Delayed-Sweep

RampLinearityMeasurements
3-14. Filter
3-l 5.
3-16.

4-1

. Dual-SlopeIntegration

4-2. BasicDiagramandOperation.....

4-3.

44.

4-5.
4-6.
4-1.
4-8. Block
4-9. TypicalStateMachineBlockDiagram
4-10. Block Diagram,

4-l l. Block
4-12. Block Diagram,
4-13.

4-14.

4-15. Input Bias
4-16. ReferencePolarityLogic.
4-17.

418. DataOutputTimingDiagram(Option02l)
4-19. Remote

4-20. T1'pical
4-31. SampleiHold

-1-ll.

Output Measurement

Measurement

RatiolnputConnections.

SimplifiedDiagram,DCAmplifier

Measurement

Simplified Diagram,
Simplified Diagram,

SimplifiedDiagram,OhmsConverter..........4-8

Diagram,

ASMFlowChart.

Diagram,

Simplified Diagram, Reference

and Ratio

Simplified Diagram, External

Reference

PowerSupplyBlockDiagram

(Option

\\'aveforms

Track'Hold\{ode.

Isolated

Remote

Input

Connections, Option

Purpose Interface Bus

Rear

Printout .

021

Board

of a Step

Sequence

Circuits . . .4-13

Circuits

Compensation

Control

022)

Bus

System

Circuir Position .

Illustrating 7-21.

BCD

Output

Options

Connections. . . . .2-J

S/H Option

Panel

Sequence

Sequence

Assemblv A31

3490A

Clock and

Main

Main
Qualifier

Timing Diagram 7-18.

. .....4-19 7-19. Reference Desigrations

(Option

(Option

Wires on Outguard

Addressed
Addressed

a

Step

Oscilloscope

Input

Integrator Circuits . . . . - . . . 4-6

AC Converter

Counters . . .

Logic

Circuits . . . .4-11

Logic

Multiplexer

. .

...

.

. .. . .. .2-3

022 ...

045 . . . -

020) ...

022) . . . . . .3-7

to

Listen . . 3-l I

to Talk

. . . . . .. 3-15

in

. . ...3-20

.. . ... -

. . . . . . . . . .

Page

. .

. . 2-5

. . . .2-6

. .2-8

. . . . . .

. . . . 3-0

. .3-2

. .. . 3-5

. . .3-6

. . . .3-12

..3-18

.....3-19

. . . .3-2O

. . . 3-21

.....3-21

...4-1

.....1"2

......4-3

.44

. .4-7

.4-9

...4-g

...4-10

. .4-12

.

.

4-14

. . .

.4-15

.....4-15

.....4-16

...4-18

. . . .4-20

.4-22 and Switching

..+22

ILLUSTBATIONS

Figure
4-23.

Waveforms

Acquire/HoldMode.

4-24.

Simplified

Operationof

4-25.

Simplified Diagram

4-26.

Aebctric

4-27.

Sample/Hole

4-28. Block

andTriggerCircuits

4-29.

Sample/Hold

4-30.

Sample/HoldMeasurement

2-8

3-8

4-31.

Sample/Hold

Measurement

5-1.

AC Voltmeter

AccuracyTest..
5-2. DCCommon-Mode
5-3. AC

54.
5-5.
5-6.
5-7.
5-8. External

5-9.
5-10.

5-ll.

6-1. ChassisParts
G2. BindingPost
6-3.

7-1.
7-2.

.:7-3. Sample/HoldAssembly

14.

iL'

l-5.
j

4. AC Conveiter
7-7 . Ohms Converter Troubleshooting
7-9. DisplayTroubleshootingTree

j-9.

7-tO. I_ofibClockTroubleshooti"ngTree.......l-2317-24

7-l l. Data
7-12. Remote Troubleshooting

7-13.
7-14.

7-1
7-16. RatioTroubleshootingTree

7-17. Locationof Assemblies

7-20. Schematic

Common-Mode
ACNormal-Mode
DCVoltmeterlnput

ACVoltmeter Input Impedance Test . ... . .....

Sample/Hold Response Test .

ResistanceTest.. ....5-9

Location

Standard3490A
Location of
Location of Ratio Adjustments

SwitchAssembly

Switching
SwitchingOutputsofAlU4Ol

deneralTroubleshootingTree
DC Ana1os Troubleshootins

Loeic Test Troubleshooting

Output

option}2l

option
GPIB

Option 030
Sample/Hold

Tree . .

5.

Sample/Hold

Tree ..

3490A Block

Schematic

Tr,roDetectCircuits,Al ...

Illustrating

Diagram

Absorption

Diagram

Reference

of

Inputs to A2U2 .

022

I/O

Troubleshooting

Diagram,

Diagrant,

and

S/HCircuit

of

Logic Block Diagram .. .

of

S/H Timing
Trigger Timing . . .4-26

Simplified Diagram

Sequence

High Frequency

RejectionTest
Rejection Test . .

RejectionTest .. ..... 5-5

Input
Adjustments,

Sample/HoldAdjustments

.

Assembly

Troubleshooling Tree

Troubleshooting

..

.

.
. .

General Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting

Logic

Diagram

DC Amplifier

Circuits,

Integrator and

A..

Circuit

S/H

Compensation .

Sequence

Resistance Test ..

....

Tree .]-1317-14

Tree

Tree,

Tree,

...

.. .....7-38

Al, A2

..

B . . . . .. ..

. . . . . -

..

and

....7-ll17-12

. . . . .

Tree . . .7-17

....|.-1917-20

Tree

Page

......4-22

....4-23

.4-24

4-25

. .

....

.......4-26

..

. . . . .. .

..

.......5-18

......G31

........1-3

........7-7

.

..1-2517-26

. .i-2717-28

.

...74117-42

4-25

. . .

-...+28

....+29

.....5-2

.....5-3

. .

.54
. 5-5

5-6

-

. .5-7

....5-14

.....5-17

..6-30

...6-31

.

. .7-3

..

i,-1511-16

17-18

.7-21

17-22

.7-2917-30

.1-31

17-32

.1-3317-34

....7-35

....7-36

. .7-37

.7-391740

'.;

Model3490A

Figure

7-22.

Schematic

Ratio

Circuits,

7-24.

Schematic

7-23.

Schematic

andCounters,Al

7-25.

Schematic

7-26.

7-?7. l+e;atic

7-28.

222. l*"

7-30.

7-3I.
7-32.
7-33.

Logic,Al

Schematic

41,

A8

Schematic

Range,

atic

Schematic

Schematic

- _Circuits,

khematic

Option

^ .

Schematic

Option

Diagram,
Diagram,

022,

Diagram,
Diagram,

Diagram,

Diagram,
Diagram,

Diagram,

Diagram,

and

Dagram,
Diagram,

Diagram,

Ag,

021,

Reference

Al,

Al3

Main

Clock

..

DC

.....:.

SampleRate

Switchins

power

?ror"r,

Function.

AC

Converter,

Ohms

External

A2),

A2g,

Data

A9,

A10,
Remote

AII,

AI2,

and

Logic,

Al

Suppli€s,

o,

:.

Switches,

e.S--.

Converi"r,

Trissei'

A37:.
Output
Al5:

Ali

tnpui

.

.

-'

LIST

0F

7431:144

.

.

. .

.745;1746

...7_47174g

' -

-

.

. .

.

äl',i_]l

AS

.7_5517_56

.

.7_5717-Sg

--'

X

.7_5917_60

j_6117_62

.

'

.

'

.

.7-6317_64
.7_651746

tLLUSTRAT|0NS

Page

7-3

7-38.
7-39.

740.
8-1
8-2.

(Cont,d)

Figure
7-i+.

schematic

7-35.

7-36.

.

AnalosCircuits,

Schematiö

LogicCircuit:,12S...

Block

I/O

7.

schem.li;;i;;;;;

and

Schematic

Assemblies.

Schematic

and

Schematic

Mother

Component

l2ltA0[55and.Lowr;

Schematic

Seriat

Diagram,

Diagram,

Dagram,

Circuits
ROM

ROM

No.

.

Assy,s,

Diagram,

A30,A35

Diagram,

Assemblies,

Diagram,

Board,

Location,

Diugru.,

r2lr/r}fiss

sample/Hold

A27'

Sample/Hold

3490A

GPIB

ii*,.

A34,

GpIB

Outguard

A32,

OutluarJ'

fil

.:

41

1,

Al

I

Assembly.

.......

.

..

p;;;;;''

A36

:.

Isolation

Serial

anJi;;er

.-.-.

-.

Du;;

A33

No.

.......

Table

ofContents

.7_671j_6g

...7_6917_70

-7

-

.

.

7

.

. .

.7_7317_74

.

...

.

.7_7517_76

7_7717_78

.

.7-7glt_80

...

......

.

1

.

t

Page

-7

i

2

8_3

84

Table
1-1.

Specifications

t-2.

c.n.turrnior*;!;;

|

Option

?

General

?-?

MaximumVoltages

l-1

Sample

1-?.

3-3.

Dstortion

ohil"a;;a;;;;i

11

cfln

2-:

3-6.

Address

3-7.

Programü;..

3-8.

Abti,ty;iöör6l"rä,oic,iirl'

3-9.

Initiating

_.

3-10.

Maximum
^ fiTr

3-1

1.

Ratio

+1.

AC

+2.

Porariry;R;,t"ü'ä;;.;;;,

+3.

Analog

4.

ecquiie/HoioD;i;;...

050

purpose

Rate

Signal

Codes

a

Ramp

byExternalTriggering

for

Polari

AdiG;;üffi'"

Tests

......

and

QRtion

Interface

andResponr.

Error

Mnemonics

. ,

or

Sine

-S/H

Acquisiiön

ty

Wave

Measurements

Full_Range

Disolav"

1Sät

.

.

_

...

OAO

Step

:...

pari

Ctran;;,

Brrä;;;täs

iirnr..

::

:

.

:..

......'........3_7

""""3-9

.

tin

gj

Iäput

........

TIST

Page

.

.

. .

.

.2_3

.....2_7

.....3:2

.......34

:.il

.-3-10

.....3_17

.

.

. .3_tg

"'3-21

.....

frz

"'4-16

4-22

OF

TABTES

5-5.
s6.
5-7.

5-8.

s-e.
5-10.
Gl.

-,^..

7-1.._.

T2

7-3.

71
T:

74.

7-7.

8-1.

Table

Gain

Delay

!-5.

5-1.

Recommendear.rt

5-2.

DCVoltmeterAccuracy

5-3.

ACVoltmeterAccuracy

54.

Ohmmeter
Alternate
sample/HoldDCeccuracyäL;":

DC/DCRatioAccura.v
AC/DCRatioAccura"yf.ri

powerSupplvvoltü;;
Ohmmeter'Adjustment

Replaceabtepärts..

power

CurrentLimitValues
PowerSupplyJlTp"rwires
AC

Reed
component
Data

Output

Alphabetical

Atphabetical

I/OMnem.oni.,

ManualBackdatinlih*;;;

Relationship

Accuracy

Ohmmeter

Supply

Voltages

Retay

Chäcks

Spacing

.irouUierhooti"g

J,istins

Listini;itrö;ä;ö'

...

nq'uip.;;;

Accuracy

färi-.

:1.'..
.

.

......:...::.....

and

.-.

"f

34tö;

:

.

.

.

. .

.

.

.

.

:-.'..

::.............

...................

Test

.

.........

..

:...

:.............

-...

.......

. .

.

.

. .

.

:

:

..

..

np,

.....-.'_

.........

. .

..

.....

ü;rmonir,

....7_7117_72

.

.....s_6

.....

....

.

.

..

..

.....6_2

......7_1

...7_2

.

.

.

. .

.

...

.

.

....8-l

,^X

.

.

.

5_0
5_l

5_3

.

. .

5_3

.

5_7

5_8

s_ls

.5_16

.

.74

.

.74

.7_to

vll

Model

34904

sEcTt0N I

GENERAT INFORMATION

Section

I

lNTBoDucTl0N.

1.1.

l-2.

resistance

voltage,
tion.

l2O%
ranges.
Range
on
output,
ments,

1-3.

instructions
Model
procedures
Procedures
to its
the
tion

14. This
mance specifications for the Model 3490A
available options. It

with the

are available.Instrument

mation is

1-5.

l-6. Table
critical
Table
operating

l-7.
turing,
Bureau
sheet
change
ing

r-8.

l-9.
usefulness

and

capable

is

It

range

of

Polarity
selection
functions.

all

remote

ratio

and

manual

This

as well as maintenance

34904 Multimeter.

for

are also included

performarice

theory

of operation, and troubleshooting

provided

are

section

Model

also included.

SPECTFtCATI0NS.

l-l

specifications

l-2

contains
characteristics

Any

change

design,

of

Standards

included

specifications

sheet

with this

supersede

0PT|0NS.

The

following

of the

measurements

of overrange measurements

on all except the 1000V

selection and

is

manual or automatic

Options are available

programming,

measurements.

contains installation

Instrument

verifying

for use

3490A

is

in

or traceability

of rhe

Model

proper

for adjusting the instrument

specifications.

in

maintaining

the manual

of

lists

also

and

and manual

a complete list

that

are controlled

general

information

the

of

the

specifications

will

be listed

manual.

previous

all

3490A.

options

3490A:

are

3490A Multimeter

Model

The

makes

with 5-digit

display are

to

sample-and-hold

information

specifications

operation

Schematic

the instrument.

contains the

the accessories supplied

additional

Model

to

The manual

available to

accessories that

identification infor-

of the

that

3490A.

due to

the

on

a manual change

information

voltage,

ac

ac and

automatic.

over all ranges

provide

and

are

and lists the

Model 3490A
by tolerances.

describes the

U.S. National

and manual

extend

dc

resolu-

up to

dc

data

measure-

operating

the

for

and

included.

diagrams,

informa-

perfor-

manufac-

concern-

the

Option 040 or 045:
Option 050: 34904

power

source

Option 060:

Option 080:
I-Ill. ACCESSORIES
l-ll. The

Model 3490A

Supplied

Rack
PC

Supplied

Rear input
36-pin

5Gpin

Remote Jumper
PC

Supplied

with

Mount

Extender

with

connector

(mates

connector

(mates

Extender

l4-pin

connector

(mates

Remote
Rear input

PC Extender (2

Supplied

S/H Analog

.-'

S/H Logic

PC Extender (2

Supplied with

S/H Analog
S/H Logic

PC Extender

l4-pin

connector

(mates

Supplied

Ratio

Jumper

PC

Extender

3490A
power
Ratio

following

and its

accessories

option

all instruments:

Kit

(2

x l8)

Option 020:

cable

with Remote

with Data

with

Output connector,

Assembly,

(2x22)

Option

with Trigger
Jumper

Assembly,

cable

x 22)

with

Option

Jumper

Jumper

Assembly,

Assembly,

x l0)

Option

Jumper

Jumper

with

with

Assembly,

(2

x l0)

Trigger

Option

Assembly,

Assembly,

(2

x l0)

source

SUPPLIED.

connector,

030:

connector, Jl l)

040:

045:

connector, Jl l)

080:

Sample-and-Hold

designed
desigred

for operation
for operation

are

shown.

as

J7)

A.4

supplied

J6)

44

A24

A25

A24

A25

A26

on

50

Hz

on

60 Hz

with the

03490-84401

5060-s983

o349Mt612

l2sl{084

-0086

I

2s I

03490-66504

5060{630

12514142
0349U66504
0349041612

5060{630

0349046524
03490-66525

50606032

0349U66524
0349046525

50606032

12514142

0349046526

5060-6032

Option
Option

Option

Option

020:

BCD/Remote

021:

Isolated

022:

Isolated

(Options

Option

030:

General

(GPrB)

Expand

Data

Output

Remote

021

and 022

020)
Purpose

(BCD)

Control

require

Interface

Bus I/O

1.12.

ACCESSORIES

l-13.

Several
Model 3490A.
Option
panel

symptoms

accessory provides

705,

accessories

A

service

will

demonstrate

to isolate

AVAITABLE.

are available

video tape, Product

use

failures.

a set

of IC reference

for use

No.

of self-test

The

-hp
boards with

with the

90030C

and front

111261^

1-t

Section I

Model

3490A

most

of the 3490A logic

lO529A
Logic
without

-hp­contains

such
Three

030. These

A
available
face
No.
or
for
numbers

Logic

Comparator. Using these

Comparator, a faulty

removing it from the circuit.

11127A, is

the most

integrated circuits,

as

interface

GPIB Repair

Bus I/O circuits.

562A-16C,

50554, Printers. Field

units

cables are available

cables

l063lA Interface
10631B Interface
10631C

for troubleshooting

for use with

with Option

Ill2lA and I I l22A

IC's for

IC can

be isolated

available for

critical components

identical

are

Interface

-hp-

Kit,

Also

installable

O2O are

the 3490A.

transistors

except

cable,3 ft.

cable,6

cable,

Part No.

the

General

available is

Option

Options

available by

respectively.

use

with the

boards with

in seconds

A spare

for the

for length.

12 ft.
0349G80009,

021 and *rp

parts

of

the 3490A

and

reed relays.

GPIB Option

ft.

Purpose

a cable. Product

O2l and,O22

accessory

This

lnter-

50508

-hp
the

set,

set

1.14.

INSTBUMENT AND

MANUAL

IDENTIFICA-

TION.

Instrument

5.

l-1
located on
two-section

prefix

designating the

manufactured.

J

l-16. This
numbers

been made in the instrument

is

printed,
the
these changes

Section

serial
Part

the manual are

and a

=

Japan;U

indicated

a

manual

VIII

numbers lower

numbers

manual

"Manual

identification

the

rear panel.

serial number consisting

five-digit suffix

country in

=

(A

=

United Kingdom.)

will define these

your

in

adapts

for the manual

also

U.S.A.;

applies to instruments

on the title page.

Changes" supplement

manual. Backdating information

the

than

that shown on the

shown

on the

by serial number

Hewlett-Packard

separated

the instrument

which

G = West

since this

changes. Be sure

manual to instruments

the

and

title

of a four-digit

by a

Germany;

with the

If

changes

manual

supplied

to

title

microfiche

page.

uses

letter

serial

have

with

record

with

page.

copy

is

a

was

was

in

of

l-

Model 3490A

VOLTAGE

DC

Full-Rangp

Overrange: 2O % onall ranges

Aeuracy:

24 hours

{23oc

30 days

(23oc1soc)

90 days

(23oc

6 months

{23ocisocf

year

1

{23oc!soc)
Temperaturo

O.1 V

'

1V

Voltage

reading.

Effectlve

either

AC:

DC:

AC Normal{Vlode

Option

Option

Input

O.1,V
100

AC

VOLTAGE

Full-Range

Overrange:

ttTlgnt

10'

Accuracy:

lnput

Guard

24

hours

(230

C r

3)

days

(230Cr50c)

90

days

(230C150C)

6 months

(23()C15()Cl

ye€r

l

(230c+5()Cl

I

Frequencies

l0

Display:

t

l%

!

loc)

r5()c,

Coefficient

Range: t

range)/o

+

Option

Option

!O.l%
to.1

Resistance:

V

nnximum

10

C

through

0.OO03

Coefficient

Common{lode

loadf:

O5O

50H2t0.1

060

6OHzt0.1

)

140dB

05O
060

%

through

and

lü)0

Display:

2O%on

Rango:

x

l%ot reading

levels

above

must

be

20

Hz

0.32+0.05

cl

0.35+0.05

0.35+o.os

0.4

0.45+0.07

ranges

greater

only.

V

% of

(5O

(60

10

Volt-Hertz

connected

.

:1P9P.Y

i

I;IBBBB V

reading +

of

.1 V

(0.005

t

(0.01

I

(0.01

!

(0.013

r

(o.015

t

(0o

(0.00,l

1OOOV

rangelp
I 000

{

(SO

Hz

%

(@

Hz

%

Rejection

power

Hz

power

Hz

V

ranges

V ranges:

I.OOOOO

10.0000

100.000

1000.00

all ranges

20

Hz

to

1 % of

+0.06

than

except

1000

To

of rangel

Range

+

0.001

)

+

0.005)

+

0.005)

+

0.0051

+

0.0051

C to

50o

Cl:

%

of

reading

Ranges:

C

V range)

Rejoction

:

t

power
power

frequencyf:
frequency):

(<

70%

10

MO

V
v
v
v

except

250

kHz

product

% of

range)

range

to

Low

50

Hz

:

Add

(with

frequency):

frequency):

R.H.):

I

O.1S

IOOO

(Guard

lO.oo+0.025 |

+0.025

lo.r

+o.o2s

lo.t

o.r

+0.03

|

o.tz+o.o3s

|

lO0

kHz

Table

r

10O.oOo

.

rooo.öö

1V-f00{,VRangas

r(O.OO1

0.04

%

V

100

v

v

V

range

(0.004
(0.008

+

(0.01

+

(0.013

+

(o.015

+

+

0.0007

% of

ppm/vott

1

kf,l

imbalance

)

140

)

140d8

>S0dB
>

50

dB

>

2

-

x 1010

range

shorted

to

kHz*

2SO kHz

0.7

+0.06

o.zs*o.oe

|

+

at
at

lo.zs*o.oo

o.zs*o.oz

|

0.7s+o.o8

|

specified

on

1 V

1-1

O.OOI

0.0021

0.0021

0.oo2l

0.oo2l

%

reading

to

% of

dB

50

Hz

60 Hz

O

Low),

and

.

Specifications.

Temperature

Voltage

Input

)

OHMS

Full-Rangs

of

Overrange:
Accuracy:

24 hours

in

(23oc

30

days

(23oc!socl

9O

days

at

l23oc!50c)

6 months

{23oc

at

year

I

Temperature

0.1

1 kO

DATA

OUTPUT

BCD

internal

REMOTE

Remote

code.

reading

Coefficient

kHz

to

% of

lmpedance:

2 Mf, t

(

65

<

90

Display:

.100000
l.oo000

10.0000

100.000

1000.00
10000,0

2O

+

0.006

1

loc)

0.O12 +

0.012
o.ot

t

socl

0.018 +

Coefficient

ko

range:

range)P

through

and

10,0O-0

of range)/"C

1-2-4€,

sl,rritch

nput

I

Signals

Output

Signals

CONTROL

programming

I nput

Signals

Output

Signals

Coefficient

+

0.001

%

of

range)F

(1000V

reading

1 %shunted
pF

without

pF

with

ke
ko
ka
ko
ko

ko

% on

(%

+

0.001

o.OOs

+

o.oo5

+

5

0.005

O.OO5

C

(Optaon

High

rear

-all

of

reading

(O.OOI

!

t0,0OO

kf,!

ranges):

OZtl

true

High

by:

rear

input

ranges

0.005 +

O.01

0.012

0.0t5 +

0,018 +

(0o

kf,l

or

Level

+3.9Vr1.5V,

100pA

V r

pA

4O0

(Option

of

High

Level

circuit

pA

max.

1.5

rnax.

0221

range

max.

nrax.

+3.9

+3.9Vt15V,

100pA

open

+3.9Vr1.5V,

40O

C to

l0o

C

range):

input

terminal

terminal

oÄ

+

of

rangel

0.001

+

0.002

+

0.002

0.002

0.002

C to

50o

%

of

ranges

(O.OO1%

r

Low

true

+0.3v

V,

+0.3vr0.3v,

and

function

+0.3v!0.3v.

or

+o.3V

50P

Cl: r

Add

0.01

0.007 +

0.001

o.0t2

+

0.002

0.0'l5

+

0.002

0.02 +

0.002

0.025 +

0.002

C):

reading

(<

70%

R.H.

ot

reaaint

logic

code,

Low

Leval

t0.3V,

2

mA rnax.

15

mA

max,

uses

Low

Level

2 mA rnax.,

contact

closure

ground

to
through

< 300

r0.3V,

15

mA

nnx.

(0.002

ppm

0.025

0.035

0.035

0.04
o.05

+O.OO07

on

1OOO

i

O.OOOSX

selectable

|rigrh

true

or

o

Section

%

per

Volt/

+

0.ool

+

0.002

+

0.002

+

0.o02

+

0.002

%

of

kj_l

by

rogic

I

of

l-3

Section

I

Model 34904

RATIO

Measurement

Ratio

3 wire;
External
respect

External

DC/DC

(Ao/o

!

(Option

0801

Input

External

to

Reference

Measurement

of

Reference

Reference

Low.

lnput

Reading

hours

24

3o days

9o days

6

months

year

1

Configuration:

High

Ratio

Resistance:

Accuracy:

r

Bo/o

(23"C

(23"c

(23"c

(23oc

t

123oc

Low

may be

=

of lnput

I

1"c)

r

5"c)

t

s"cl

r

s"cl

5"c)

is conlmon

positive

nput

I

Ext. Ref.

> 107O

+

Range

Ext.

Range

tov

1V

10v

10v

10v1V.007

10v

Table

with Input

or

Ext.

­Ext. Ref .

Ref.

1V

1V

1V

1-1. Specifications

External

Low.

negative with

Input Ranges:

Ref. Range

Voltage

xC%of

1V

A B

.003
.o03

.oo7

c

.oo2

.001

.002

.002

.005 .0m

.008.015.003

.002

.oo5

.o07

.015 .003

.008

.002

.005

.003

.015

.008

.o15

.002
.o04

.o07 .005
.008

(Cont'd).

/

Reference

1V:1O.1

tlVto112V

10V:

V range

{1

is between

voltage

V

o.1

DC:
AC:

1 V

Input

.002 .001
.002

.002
.o03

.002
.o03 .012

.002
.003

.003
.004

to 1000

Range)

lnput

A

Ranges:

Vtot1.2V

be used

should

to

1V,

1000

V

Range

10V

B

V and

1

V

c

.oo2
.002

.002

.002

.003

.003

.012

.002

.003

.OO3

.oo2

.003

.003

.012

.002

.o03

.004

.012

greater

for

V.

1.2

100

A

.003
.005

.005
.006

.006
_007 .01

.007
.008

.008
.o09.012.OO4

accuracy

v, 1000

B

.001
.003

.003
.o12

.o03

2 .003

.003
.012

.003

the Ext- Ref'

if

v

c

.002
.002

.002
.003

.002

.002
.OO3

.o02

Notes:

1.

2.

DC/DC Temperature

!

Reading + %

of

lo/o

On the
EMF's
accuracy

Coeff

Ext. Ref.

Range

'10

lOOO
generated

specified

icient:

of Input

v

1V

Measurement

DC/DC

Voltage = 0.5 V; Input

lnput
Ext.

Ref.

spec.

30 day

Ext. Ref. Range

Ext. Ref . Voltage

Ratio Reading should be 1.00000

0.003% of Reading
O.O12% of Input Range

x o.oos"Ä of Input Range= 6

*

.5V

Total rror tolerance

Display should be

Accuracy

Voltage = 0.5

=

(0.0037o

t

V; Ext. Ref .

x 0.003% of Input

0.99979

V range, add

external to

utilizing

by

Range)/-C

r

{0.0003
(0.0004

r

Example:

Range = 1

of Reading

Range = 1

=

3 counts

:

counts

12

counts

=

counts

21

to 1.00021

0.04

1V

V

+

O.O12%

Rangel

PPM/volt

34904

the

panel

rear

the

+

0.0007}

+

0.0021

V

of lnput Range

to the %

of reading

b9

{lay

ThermafAdjust

specification'

cgmpensated

provided'

lnput Range

10V

1V,

(0.0001
(0.0002

AC/DC

V Ext.

10
1 V

24 hours
30 davs

{See

AC/DC

10V

coefficient

1 V

temperature

(See

+
+

Measurement

Ext. Ref.

Table

Temperature

Ext. Ref.

Table 1-1

r
r

to achieve

0.00041

0.0021

Range: Same

Ref.

Range:

123-C

to 1

Voltage accuracy

AC

Ext.

1-1 of

Ref.

Range:

of

main

Coeff

coeff icient

main 3490A

of

%

the

100

(0.0005

=

(0.0006

t

Accuracy

year

Range:

:

^

t

1-C)l Same^as

Q3-C

34904

icient:

Same

0.001

Add

specif

range

v,

1000

+

+

AC Voltage

as

x

5-C):

manual.l

as

to

ication

manual.)

v

0.0004)

0.002)

aocuracy

Voltage accuracv

AC

o.01

Add

Voltage

AC

o/o

ol Range

to % of

temperature

Voltage

in AC

Rang

tt
t-

Model34904

Section

I

SAMPLE/HOLD

Full-range

r

1.00fi) v

+

10.q)0

!

100.00

r

1000.0

(OPtion

Display:

v
V
v

Ovrrangs: 2O%on all

Maximum Input Voltages:

Between Input High
Between

Between

Between O Signal High and
Range
Maximum

either

Low terminal

Guard and

Seleaion: Manual,

Function

DC

Volts

AC

Volts

Reading

Rate

Ohms

.1 kto

100

k

1,000

k

10.oo0

'Sample

not

Response

coincident

DC
ACVolts:
Ohms:

Ohms

Maximum

Nominal

Overload protection:

Power

10o

Power

Environmental

Operating
Humidity
Storage

k

Rate

in

Volts:

0.1
10O0
10,OO0

Terminal

25 V
1 3 V

O.1
100
10,000krange:

Nondestructive:
Fusedestructive:

Raquirements:

v,

Consumption:

Control

owrload.

(to

Time

with

encode

(

200

<lsecond

k

to 100

k ranges:

k range:

k range:

CharacteristiG3:

voltage

in

overload

for

valid

reading

current

k to

kand

120

Temperature:

through

10 k

ranges:

1000

V

,22O

Characteristics:

Temperature:

Range:

within

ms

(

across

<60

(

040/0451

Sample/Hold

digits

range5

and

Chassis:. 4

autornatic,

(Minimum

Option

measurement

plus

overrange

except

Low: t 10O0

and

Guard: I

500 V

Low: t

or

Sample

050

240.2ms+5ms
+

1.26s

.025s

24O.2ms+5ms
3O0.2ms+6ms

set to FAST

rated

triggerl:

(

200

ms

5SO ms

unknown

unknown

.l

mA

rtA

r

2SO

V

r

10OOV

or

24O

,

VA

Oo

C to

% relative

-

2Oo

C

+

12

accuracy

ms

pA

10

y

l+

with

5Oo

humidity,

+

to

ms

resistance:

resistance:

5

%,

all options

75o C

66O.3 ms

2S0

(

k ranges:

l

V

g5

"1 ",

IOOO

Vrms

250

Vrms

Remote

periodr

200.1

1.05s

20O.1

250.1
55O.2

position

for

-

1O %l;

C

Table

displar/

V range.

Table 1-2.

(1

1500

200 V

(Optionall

per

Readingl:

Option

060

ms+4ms

+

.025s

ms+4ms
ms+5ms

*

ms

and instrument

a

step input

48

Hzto

Oo

C to

4Oo

1-1.

Specifications

is

4 full

General

peak)

V

10 ms

applied

.:

44O Hz

C

(Cont,d.)

Sample/Hold

1ü)0 V

24

hours

30.days

90 days

months

6

year

1

1230 c

Temperature

reading

+

Information.

GENERAL

All lines

Input

Output

GENERAL

SAMPLE/HOLD

Acquisition

Aperture
/''

Sample/Hold

PURPOSE

are

HIGH

true.

Signals:

Each

input

ground,

to

Signals:

Each

output
open-collector
out-

isolated
and chassis
maximum

Range

Time
command
Hold

model:

Track/Hold:

ation<t10ns.

Acquire/Hold:

1V,

100

10

Sample/Hold

V ranges

V, 1000

$Tp]9/!9!d

HIGH
Signal
Must

edge
amditude

Drior

2

1ts

Measurement

ranges!:

(23o

r

c

(23o

(23o

(239

0.0O1

10

r

c

so c)

r

c

so

r

C

r

so cl

Coefficient

% of range/o

So C)

INTERFACE

LOW true

line is terminated

and

one

can

drive 15

driver

PURPOSE

from

inguard

{power tine)

of

40 V

above

(Settling

Time

Maximum

(Delay

betwsen

receiwd

h

(

400 ns

ranges

V

Trigger

I nputs:

TTL

2.4
be HIGH

capable

AC

Trigger

pulse

a

of

2

to

negtive-going

Trisser
V) to

of

V to

()+
must

be

of

Accuracy

c)

c)

(04

C to

C).

except

TTL load.

GplB loads.

capable

INTERFACE

circuit

common

ground

chassis.

tam6

for a f

within

sinking

at least

Acquisition Time

0.Ol % of Final

the

and

the time

(typically

t

615

rls

154

t

6

(dc

coupted):

LOW

{<+

at least

I mA.

(ac

coupled):

2O0

V.

transition.

(DC

(%

t

of reading

BUS

HRFD

with

3 kslto

of sinking

BUS

ult+ange

function,

r

{0.01
(0.01

r

(O.01

r

(0.02

r

(o.02

I

50o

C)r

LOGIC

and HDAC,

(input

and

I V through

oÄ

+

+0.0151
+

0.015)

+

0.015)

+

0.0151

+

0.015)

t

!O.OO2 % ol

LEVELS

+

S V

The

output

4g

mA

(ourguard)

Low terminal!

may be

inputl:

slep

oI

which

and

ground

floated

to

Value

time

a

Sample/Hold

Amplifier A entors

22O nsl; cVcle-to_clrlcle

4O0 ns
40O ns

0.4

V}

ps

prior

600

Negative-going

30 ns

wide

Signal must

512.6

129.4

lnput must

for

r

lls

t

tts

at teast

going

to

and having

be stable

rcngel

6.2 ke

is

at 0.4

Trigger

the

vari-

zl00

4OO

go

from

30

LOW.

leading

at least

are

an

V

is

a

ns
ns

ns.

an

l-5

Section

34904

I

Model

SAMPLE

HOLD

Sample/Hold

Maximum rate of

Maximum dV/dt during

Minimum

AC Characteristics:

tracking:

of range/ps on

2.5 %
range/prs

% of

5

Samde/Hold

1000

Response

Time

time response

The

form

Similarlv,

measured

(CONT'DI

dB

3

!

amplifiersl

Range

1V

10v

v

100

v

Characteristics

can

be

vs/n = vin

input waveform

the

data

change

on

Bandwidth

approximated

the

10 V and 1 0OO

the 1 V

digitization:

:

r

3 dB

of

Sample/Hold

+

equataon:

the

by

of

and 10O

:

Kl

1-2. General

Table

input voltage to maintain

V ranges.

V ranges.

V/t s

50

(external

20
4O
15 kHz
20kHz

FrequencY

kHz
kHz

for

equation:

the

by

dvin

_f,r

can

be

input terminals to

input wave-

any

reconstructed

from

lnformation

dVs/u

RATIO

Range

External
lnput

Ratio

1
10

Polarity Display

+
_

No

Ratio

Maximum
Maximum

(Cont'd.)

Slope
small enough

measurement
linearitV.

=

Velocity

K1

range

Range

1V

10v

v

100

v

1000

Selection:

Reference

Range:

Display:

V Ext. Ref

V Ext. Ref.

+DC/+DC or

for

+DC/-DC or

for

polarity

Measurement

Numerical

lnput

of signal as measured

is as

that the waveform

points

factor. The

follows,

VelocitY

Typical

-

10,rs

-

-

approaches

2,rs
3ps

+7tts

Manual

Range:

automatic,

Manual.

ratio directly

Read

Range:

.

{automatic)

disPlaY

Range:

-DC/-DC

_DC/+DC

for

CaPabilitY

Display:

Voltage:

Multiply

:

AC/DC

:

10O0

in

typical

Factor

remote

or

display

1 20O0O

Vrms

increments

between

or achieves

factor for

(optionall

bv 0.1

any Input

on

each

range

vin = vs/H - rl

Where:

=

Displayed Sample/Hold

VS/n
Vin = 39OA
dVi.

dt

Slope

input

of any

voltage.

portion

dvs/H

dt

measurement.

input

of an

wavefori?i.

Maximum

Input

Environmental

Reading
DC/DC: Same
AC/DC:

Protection:

to 4o:c,

O:C

to 5O"C

O"C

RaE:

for

as

for

as

Same

Vrms

250

Requilements:

(

95%

maximum

dc volt'age

voltage

ac

(t

400

humiditY

relative

operating

measurements

measurements

peak)

V

continuous

temperature

range

t-6

Model3490A

Section

II

|NTR0Dt

2.r.

This

2-2.
necessary

Multimeter.

power

and

mation,

cedures,

INITIAL

2.3.

2-4. This
chanically and electrically
free of mars or scratches

upon

receipt. To confirm this,
inspected
instrument
carrier.
and test the
using the performance
Section V. If
warranty

Check

2.5. POWEB

24. T\e
source

supplying

+

5V),48H2
maximum.
instrument

CTloN.

section contains

installing and

for

Included

grounding

installation

instructions

and

INSPECTION.

instrument

physical

for

was damaged in transit,

for

electrical performance

there is

in

the front

REOUIREMENTS.

Model 3490A

to 44OHz.

Refer

tum-on procedure.

are initial inspection

requirements, environmental

instructions,

was carefully inspected

damage incurred

supplied

of this

can

100

V,

to Paragraph

INSTATI.ATION AN

information

interfacing

interconnection

for

repackaging

before shipment.

perfect

and in

the instrument

file

accessories

of the

test procedures

damage or

manual.

be

l2OV,

Power

deficiency, see

operated

220

Y or 24O

dissipation

3-18

instructions

and

the

Model 3490A

procedures,

for shipment.

both me-

It should

electrical

should

in

transit.

a claim

@aragraph

from

(Section

with the

instrument

outlined

any

V
is

III)

SECTION

infor-

pro-

be

order

be

If the

1-10)

in

the

power

(-

l0

%

60VA

for

tl

D

INTERFACE

IOOV--r

r-

20v-l

I r-r

ilil

Lzqov----l

I

\-22OV

Volts

IOO

l@V-

r-

rzov-l

I a

ilE

L

zqov--]

I

L

220V

220

Volls

Figure

2-1

appropriate
offset pin

2-12.
the

instrument
contact
the

adapter

receptacle,

on the

To preserve

to

power

the protection

from

two-contact

to power-line ground.

'

'-

-1O%,+

90 to 105
108
198 to

216 to

. Line Voltage

grounds

plug

a two+ontact

adapter

nominal

5% of

volts

to 1 26 volts

231 volrs
252

volrs

is the

feature

and connect

Selection.

the

instrument.

ground

when

outlet,

The

connection.

operating

use a three-

the

wire on

2-7.

Before

sure

the
correspond
shown

installed.

2.8. POWER

2-9.

Figure

used

for
above
power
tion.

If

the

instrument,

Office

(|.

2.1

2-11.
Electrical

mends
ed.

The

ductor

connecting

rear panel

to

in

Figure

CORDS

2-2

-hp-

power

each

drawing

cord

equipped

the

appropriate

and

a replacement

GROUNDING

To protect

Manufacturer's

that

the

Model

power

line

the

voltage

2-l

. Also,

AND

illustrates

cords. The

is the part

with

power

notify

the

REOUIR

operating

instrument

34904

cable

which,

power

ac

selector

of

to

the

switches

the available power

be sure

the proper

RECEPTACLES.

the

standard

-hp-

number

a connector

cord is not included

nearest

cord

will be

configurations

part

number
for an instrument
of

that configura-

-hp-

Sales

provided.

EMENTS.

personnel,

Association

panel

is equipped

when

(NEMA)

and cabinet

with a three

plugged

3490A,

are set to

and

the

National

ground-

be

into an

make

line

fuse

directly

with

Service

recom-

con-

as

is

2-13.

The 349OA power

and

mating

forth

,(rEc).

2.14.

2-15. The
equipment
flow

of air
operated
0o

C and 40o

95

%.

between

8r20-1689

connectors

by the Intemational

ENVIRONMENTAL

Model 3490A
if the

around

where

The instrument

-

20o

the
and the

C

C

and + 75o

8t20-r369

@

sT0

"'i,nur"

2-2. Powercord

cord, power

meet

the safety

Electrotechnical

REOUIREMENTS.

requires no special

instrument is

surfaces.

all

ambient temperature

may

mounted

The instrument

relative humidity

be stored at temperatures

C.

8120-t35t

ffi

Gonfigurations.

input

receptacle

standards

Commission

cooling

to allow

may be

is

between

is less than

8t20-r348

W

set

free

2-1

Section

2.16.

II

INSTALLATION.

2-17. Bench Use.

c. Install 03490-60306 Isolated

right opening

provided (see

in

the instrument

Figure 2-4).

BCD

guard

Model 3490A

Module in

using screws

the

2-18.

The Model
tilt stand
The
convenience
tilt
the
Packard

2-19. Rack
2-20.

rack mount kit
instrument.
rack mount is an
mounted
must
dimensions of the Model 3490A

in place, ready for use

front of

stand. The

instrument

instruments.

The Model

using the
provided

be

OIMENSIONS

Figure

2.21. INSTALLATION

2-22.

T}te Isolated

the Remote

349OA

factory with

2-23.

l-24.
Isoiated
to

s:rard.
rnsrrument
Out suard

only if

lsolated

Use the

Data

be installed

a. Remove
b.

Remove

This plate

llotherboard

3490A

the instrument

of operating

plastic

on top

Mounting.

3490A

(-hp-

Instructions

EIA

IX INCHES

ANO

MILLIMETERS

2-3. Model 3490A

is shipped

feet

of other full-module

may

0349G84401)

are

standard

rack mount

at the

OF OPTIONS.

Data

Output

Option 022

the instrument

the BCD/Remote

Data

following

Output. If

at the

top

cover

screws

between

may be installed

0utput

procedure

the Isolated

same time,

and shield from the

holding cover plate

is located

the Inguard

A8.

and viewing

are shaped

rear of the

0ption 021

plastic

with

as a bench instrument.

may

be

elevated

lowering the

by

to permit placing

be rack

included

mounted using the

supplied

with the kit. The

width

are shown

19

of

inches. When

kit, additional support

instrument. The

in Fizure

I

(9r.4)

T_

Dimensions.

(BCD)

Option

the

in

equipped

was

Expand

in left

Option 020.

(-hp-

for installing

Remote

refer

also to Paragraph

3490^.

to instrument

portion

rear

Motherboard

111ZlAl.

option is

feet and

for

Hewlett-

the

with

2-3.

and

021

Model

at the

the

of

Al and

If

d.

Isolated Remote

this

time, install cover plate

opening
installed,
ule in the opening to

Figure

0349U66509 into
between this Assembly
Isolated BCD

03490-66510
between this
Isolated BCD

cables

h. Replace

ment.

2-25. f

2-26.
Isolated

option is to be installed
Parugraph2-23.

b.- Remove screws
guard.
instrument between the Inguard
the

c.
the
provided

d. If Isolated BCD
time, install
opening in the
place
opening

24).

e.

er

Assembly
Cable
the Isolated

f.

0349046512

in the guard.

place

the 03490-60308

24).

e. Insert the Isolated

Connector AlJ8

Module

f. Insert the Isolated

into Connector A8J9

Assembly

Module

g.

Make sure all

are securely inserted

top

shield

solated

Use the following procedure

This plate is located

Outguard Motherboard

Install

left opening in the

the

Remove the

Board ard

W6

Insert

Bemote 0ption 022

Remote option. If the Isolated

03490-60308

(see

Figure

cover

guard.

03490-60306 Isolated

to the

right of the Remote

03490-66504

insert the

0349U66511 into

between

this

Remote Module

the Isolated

into

Connector A8J10 and install

(lll22L)

03490-04117

If Isolated

the left of the

BCD Inguard

and the inguard

(see

Figure

BCD

the

and

(see

Figure 2-4).

boards are

in their connectors.

and top cover

at the same time,

holding cover plate to instrument

in left

A8.

Isolated

instrument guard

2-4).

(11121A)

plate

03490{4117

If

isolated BCD

Isolated

Connector AlJT

assembly

(see

Remote Outguard PC

is not installed

over the left

Remote is

Isolated

24).

Outguard

outguard side

seated properly

Motherboard

is not installed

BCD

Inguard

Remote Inguard PC

and

Figure

Remote

BCD

Module

PC

Assembly

and install

and

(-hp-

for

rear

Remote Module in

is to

Module

the inguard

Cable W4

side

PC

Assembly

install

Cable

of the instru-

11122A1.

installing

Data

refer

portion

Al and

using screws

over the

installed,

be

Module in the

(see

Remote Jump-

and

2-4).

Assembly

to

be

Mod-

(see

of the

W5

of the

and

all

the

Output

also to

of the

this

at

right

Figure

install

side of

Cable

at

Model3490A

Section

Il

(F

I

I
l<-

f---

rffi
|

-J- --\

I'

I ;+CABLE

i

;<-caBLE

t\

-_

cABLE

TSoLATED
MOOULE

f-1

w7

REMOTE

03490- 60308 | 05490 - 60306

rY6

Figure 24.

IO

A8J

aa,rs

ISOLATED BCD MODULE

:

r-l

AI.J8

7

AIJ

Installation of lsolated BCD

OUTGUARD REMOTE

03490-

- -

/

.

___/

Output

665t2

03490-66510

.

l_J

I

­E

and Remote Options.

TNGUARD BcD

JJiJV-99JWt

03490-56511

W4

W7 between
Isolated

g.

cables

this assembly

Remote Module

(see

Make sure all boards are seated

securely

are

inserted in their connectors.

h. Replace top shield

ment.

2-27.

Option 050 and

2-28.

A Model 34904
can
and vice

converted

be

versa.

Only
options. These
input

resistor in

the

correct parts

Table

2-1.

Option

Frequency

Option 050
Option 06O

3.333 MHz

4.000

2-29. INTERFACE

2-30.

Data

0utput

2-31.

Data

shown

in

Output

Figure

Option 060.

Option

to an Option

two parts

are

the Clock

the Integrator

for

each option.

050 and

Crystal

hp- Part

o4100466

MHz

0410{465

CONNECTIONS.

0ption

connections

2-5.

The

and

the

outguard

side

Figure 24).

properly

top

and

050

060

cover

(50

(60

of

Hz

Hz

the

power
power

are different for these two

Table

100

kfi

84.5 ko

crystal

2-1

Part

Changes.

A'1R207

07574465

0@8-4510

Oscillator

circuit.

Option 060

No Resistance +lp- Part No

021.

and logic

measurement

levels

magnitude,

of the

and all

instru-

line)
line)

and the

shows

are

;^.

range, function, polarity
contained in ten
information.
or

LOW true,

the

Outguard

a

Data Flag output

four-bit

This

information

as selected

Data

Output Assembly,

signal is provided
during a measurement
line is HIGH

true.

LOW
in

Figure

inguard circuit

and may be floated

mating connector

._.The

connector J6

true.

while Hold and External Encode

All

input and

2-5. Outguard

common

a

-hp-

is

Output option.

2-32. Remote

2-33.

Remote

levels

are shown in
program
are LOW
Trigger

The Program

040.

to-inguard
Data Flag
sequen@. The
for use with the
output logic

Outguard

inguard
may

be floated

mating

Gontrol

Control

lines

are HIGH true,

true.

lines

are for use

transfer

output

Stretched

levels

ground

common

a maximum

connector

The

Flag

Sample/Hold

(pins
and

for the

and overload information

groups

by the

sequence.

output logic

ground (pin

and chassis (power

maximum of

the

for

Part No.

l-248

of

may be either

BCD coded

HIGH true

HIGH/LOW switch

In

Al0.

goes

which

The Printer

Hold input

levels are

50) is isolated
line)

40 V above chasis.

panel

rear

125l{086

Data

(Amphenol

0ption 022.

input

and

output

Figure 26.

while

Sample/Hold Mode, Delay

with the Sample/Hold

output is

program

of
is HIGH

Pulse

HIGH during outguard-

during a

Output

option.

are as indicated

7, ll

and 12) is isolated

chassis

(power

of 40 V above chassis. The

rear

lines

Range

and

all other

information,

measurement

is

also

All

in Figure 2{.

ground

line)

panel

Remote Input

input

input

is

on

addition,

HIGH

are

shown

as

from

ground

Output

and logic

function

lines

and

Option

and the

intended

and

from

and

:-J

Section

i

7N

3i

LOGIC

Output

Outguard ground
and­40

Printer

information
Assenilclv,

II

-s

t**

LEVELS

LOW = +

Input

Lines:

LOW = +O.3

High

Reference

Low

Referenc€

H

after

signal

L after

signal

chassis

V

above

columns

410'

{JrJ

Lines:

0.3
HIGH = +

(power

chassis.

may

This

ü,1t;

=

HIGH

V r

0J V,

r

V

O.3

=

+

5.3 V

-

{ V

Outguard ground

name

means

narne

means

is

isolated

ground

linel

DIGITAL

numbered

be either

switch

+

39 V t

lS

mA rnax.

3.9 V a
V,

HIGH

LOW

1.5 V,

2

mA rnax.

is

from

is true.

inguard

and

RECORDER

from

right

HIGH

i.u"

must

be

set to

z9

:!
;9eFe

1.5 V,4OO
10O

rrA

true.

circuit

,nay

be floated

PRTNT

to

left.

or

LOW

correspond

TA

OUTPUT

:

qi

z

22

?ä;-;03":'

Y

3 EKBö ?

laEFä=;

g

;

COTruECTOR

oPTtoN

äF cö

i: ^j3

6s

Ed

ä

996<

iää

,^j

-8

5

021

DATA

pA

rnax.

max.

Changes

and

PRINTER

HIGH

sampling

HOLD

Continuous

and

EXTERNAL

common

up

ro

When
minimum

Paragraph

(Using

CODES

columns

true,

as

to the

-hp-

through

1

selected

logic

trr"

50508

5

by

t'he

inprt

.IO

=:==

8885

(Print

FLAG

from

returns

permits

Standard *

print

levei

LOW

to

LOW

HOLD
input

le\rel causes

until

level

LOW

external

ENCODE

"Hold"

ol

mode

24O

364.

numerical

HIGH/LOW

required

Command

HIGH

to
at

completion

returns

to

input

tevel

triggering.

(Trigser)

is selected,

ps

initiates

print

-

or

1248

value

of measurement.

switch on

by

the digital

Mating

Connector:

-hp-

Part

Amphenol

Outputl

at beginning

of a reading

349OA

to

LOW.

disables

autornatic

LOW

one

reading

Wheell

the Outguard

recorder

Model34904

No.

1251€086

No.

57-30500-378

of measuremenr

rycle,

stop

autornatic

sampling

input

le\rel

for

cycle.

See

coded

output

Data

Output

used.

l-r

Dkplay

Multiplit

T,i",,*

DaE
kilohG

Fundid

DC,

Re@te,
tl, BemG,
AC,

Remre,

T6t,

Rmte,

OC,

Remre

N6

0

O.ta

to-r
to-2

to-3
to{
to€

'to€

Ratio

Ratio

Ratio

raG

Rario

lJ.

Data

ex@Fit

HlcH

Data

OCBA

LLLL

LLLH

HIGH

Ragr

8ir

DCBA

LLLH
LLHL
LLHH
LHLL

LH

LH

LHHL

i:

Multiplier giv6

for

Ratio

HIGH

Function

DCBA

LLLL
LLLH
LLHL
LLHH
LHLL

Colqmn

6

Tru.

Print

0

I

Colomn

t

Tru.

Print

'|

2
4

5

f: ,1.:

nesurerent

|@iuEments.

g

Column

True

Bit

Print

0

I

2

4

Dat€

DCBA

LLLH
LLLL

Rangr

OCBA

LHHL
LHLH
LHLL
LLHH
LLHL
LLLH

,t;:

Functioo

Figure

LOW

LOW

Bir

;

an rclB

LOW

DCAA

HHHH

HHHL

HHLH
HHLL
H

LH

Trü.

Tru.

Ptint

Print

o

o

8il

H

or

Tru€

2-5.

Print

0

1

3
4

Data

Output

FüfFtkh

O,

Remlo
AC, R.mt€
T6,R.@E
DC.

F.tio

Jl, R.tio

{nor Elidl

AC,

F.r'o

TH,

Ratio

oc

o

AC
T6

Polrity,

Onrlod

+

+,

OL

-.

oL

S..tipb/Hold

Mode

ON

OFF

Connections,

Fundid

D.b

DCEA

LLLL
LLLH
LLHL
LLHH

D.b

DCEA

HLHH
HHHH

Option

Column

HIGH

DCBA

LH

LH
LHHL
LHHH
HLLL
H

LLH

H

LH
HLHH
HHLL
HHLH
HHHL

HHHH

HIGH

Column

HIGH

021

8it

L

Cdumtr

Tru.

Print

o

2

Tru.

.

Tre

1

P.int

I

l0

Print

8
9

+

DCBA

LLHH
LLHL
LLLH
LLLL

Fundion

DCBA
H

H

LHHH
LHHL

LHLH
LHLL
LLHH
LLHL
LLLH
LLLL

LOIV

O.b

LOW

Dü

DCBA

HHHH
HLHH

LOü

LH

LLH

HLLL

Tru!

Print

Tre

L

n

8it

Print

Tr{

Pr&rt

6

7
8
9

+

4

Model34904

Section

II

LOGIC LEVELS

.

lnput Lines:

open

circuit

=

+

LOW

closure to

Output

Lines: HIGH

=

+

LOW

H

after signal name

after

L

signal

Outguard
and chassis
40 V above chassis.

INPUT

ground

(power

SIGNALS

Remote

Range Programming:

front
trols

tions.

Range

.1 V,.1
lV,
10v,
100v.

Enable:

panel

and

1KO

10ko

100ko

HIGH

0.3 V
ground

0-3 V

name

is isolated

linel

Range,

enables

ksl

=

I

through

=

1

0.3 V,

means HIGH

means LOW

ground

Continuous

remote

1000v,1000ko
10,000ko

Autoränge:

ables
selects

Function

Function

DCL
'rlL
ACH
Test

HIGH input

programming.

range

Test

No. 1.

Programming:

34904-B-296a

+

0.3 V,

t

V

3.9

+

39 V

Function,

lnput

1.5

2 mA rnax.; or

<

A.

300
j

i.S

15 mA max.

from

CBA
H H
H L
H
L H

V, 400

is true.

true.

is

inguard circuit

and

may be

LOW input level

and

programming

Logic

L

L H
L L

level

selects

In

Test Function.

Input

Logic

B

H

REMOTE INPUT

"

2-

pA

V,

100

rnax;

contact

pA

nnx.

common

floated

up to

of

these func-

Test

autorange

disables

2

3
4
5

6
7

and

Sample/Hold con-

Levels

L

H

L

H

L
H

autorange

Levels

A

L
H
L
H

CONNECTOR J7

oPTtoN 022

FE
lo

rE=ä;:
t:uE3X:I--

e

52 H * F E I =

qd

E

39H;;5EEiF==

or

No.

dis-

5 fr i F 3 ä

; ? 3

ä-j=!9il

äEHäEä

t:Litr

EF!!A

= Ir

*

-

INPUT

Sample/Hold

Sample/Hold

.*'

iL.

S/H AC Trigger

OUTPUT

Program

Data Flag

Stretched

i ä

6 s

qc

.<

=a

*

SIcNALS

Track/Hold
Acquire/Hold L

Program

initiates

tion,

Hold: Continuous

sampling and

External

ted,
one reading

minirpum
Stretched Pulse

input
tude
and

of outguard-to-inguard

LOW

HIGH at

LOW

Hf

Sample/Hold

Programming

Execute:

outguard-to-inguard

and

Sample/Hold

Encode

"0"

input

Trigger
of

pulse

from

2 V to 15

Stretched Pulse

SIGNALS

Flag:

indicates

(Print

beginning

completion

at

Pulse

to

GH

LOW for

(Cont'd)

LOW input

LOW input

permits

(Trigger:

level for

cycle.

(Option

ns

30

triggers

Output circuit.

(Option

least

at

Output circuit.

Changes

transfer

Commandl:

of

Output

a

Trigger

Mating

-hp-

Part

Amphenol

(Option

Mode

L

level

transfer

program

level

external

040):

30

from

of

or

triggering.

When

minimum

O4O):

Sample/Hold

Negativegoing

ns

wide and

V triggers

LOW to H|GH

information

is

complete.

Changes from

measurement,

a reading

(Option
minimum

S/H AC

Connector:

No.

1251

No.

57-3Ob00-37S

O40):

Delay

H

L

for

minimum

of

information.

,,Hold,,

cycle.

Trigger input.

Range,

disables

mode

of

24O

LOW input

having

Sample/Hold

at

transfer.

and returns

04Ol:

Changes

ot

24O

{O84

of

autornltic

is serec_

ps

initiates

levet

circuits

edge

an

ampli-

circuits

beginning

Return to

LOW to

for

tts

5 ms

Func_

for

and

of an

to

from

each

Figure

2-6. Remote

Input

Connestions,

Option

022.

2-5

Section

II

Model 3490A

connector

57-30360-375).

Remote

2-34. Rear

2-35. Options
connector
connector

J7 is

Control

Input.

parallel

in
is shown

This

option

020 and

3490A Rear Input
pin

Do not connect these

B.

The

mating

connector

-hp-

in Figure 2-1 . The

connector is internally connected

No.

Part

l25l{084

connector is supplied

provide

030

a rear

with the front panel

inner

points

together externally.

for this rear

panel

(Amphenol

with the

panel

terminals. This

guard

input is

Part No. 125l-1233, Component Manufacturing

Inc. Part

No. A-1369. A six-foot
03490-61612, is
This cable

is terminated

Rear Input

A

High\

B

LoryJ

c

Input Low

D

Input High

tr

Conn. to B

r

Guard

Mating Connector:
Mating

Cable:

supplied with Options

one end

at

Connector,

Signal

)

o

Sisnal

Ext.

Ref.

(lnt)

-hp-

-hp-

Part No.03490-61

or

Part

(External

No.

-hp

cable,

Part

020 and 030.

by the rear input

J10

Wire Color

Cable)

White
Green

Black
Fled
NC

Shield
1251-1233

612

Figure 2-7. Rear Input Connector and Cable.

input

of the

to

-hp-

Service,

No.

mating

2-36.

.then

2-38.

however,
Purpose

connector; the other

2-7

also shows the wire

General

2-37

. Figure

panel

GPIB connector, Il2,

of each

in

Section
3-90). The
Figure
The

connectors

and consist

panel

rear
which

be
connector
hood is
in Table

Purpose

2-9 shows the signal connections

signal. Additional

III,

Operating Instructions

1063IA/B/C

2-8 are

will receive

used to connect

of a

connector

paralleled

is not

molded

around the

2-2

mate with the

at either

plug

another

as

available as a separate

another cable. These
for securing

2-39. As many
parallel

the connectors.

Interface

to

the same

Gable

15 instruments can be connected

as

the following

Figure

4-20 shows the

Interface

bus system.

colors

lnterface

which mates with the instrument

or another cable, and a

shown

do

Length.

General

l. The cable length between

cannot exceed 12 feet.

2. When
parallel,

in
instrument

3.

The total
exceed 5 I

than two instruments

more

the

cannot

cable

feet.

end

is unterminated.

Figure

in this cable.

Bus

Connections.

at the

rear

gives a brief

and.

signal information

Interface Cables

instruments

the

end of the

(see

cable

description

included

is

Paragraph

shown

together.

identical

are

in

receptacle

plug.

cable

cable.

not

in Figure

rear

provide

Instruments

4-20. The

unit because

The connectors

panel

connector

thumb

the

screws

may
dual

the

listed

or

in

Purpose Interface

bus;

restrictions must be observed.

cabling

for a typical

General

two instruments

connected

are

length to

cable

exceed 6 feet

length to

each additional

per

unit.

units

all

cannot

Figure

2-8. Interface Bus Cables.

CABLE

10631A
106318
10631C

PART

NO.

LENGTH

3ft
6ft

'l2tt

Model

3490A

Table

2-2.

General

Purpose

Interface

Bus

Connectors.

Section

II

A.

B.

a

D.

Description

Cable to

with hood

Cable to

with hood

Rack

and

Rack and

D.

D.

or

or

-hp-

Part

1251-0293

'1251-0431

-0389

1

251

-0388

1

251

Jl2

*

6

No.

Amphenol

51-30240

57-60240

57-10240

57-20240

Mates

with

plug

chassis

and clamp

chassis Receptacle

and clamp

panel plug

panel

Receptacle

GPIB

ro(oF@

9999f

n^^A
JJJJJ

BUS

panel

Rear

with

B or

AorC

panel

Rear

with

B or

AorC

CONNECTOR

OUTGUARD

GROUND

8ä;;'iEFq8ä+

No.

Mating

-hp­Amphenol

Mating

10631A
10631

10631C

Connector:

Part

No. 1251

No.57-3O24O

Cables:

3

B 6 ft.

12

4293

ft.

ft.

LOGIC

preceding

H
indicates

Input

Each

6.2 kO to

Output

Each
open{ollector
O.4

SIGNALS

LMRE

L Multiple

GPIB
ler.

LSRO

L

attention

'Outguad

floated

LEVELS

signal

Signals:

input

Signals:

output

V output.

to

be addressed

Service

of the

ground

a maximum

signal

name

is

HIGH true;

line

ground,

can

Response

Request indicates

is

or as first letter

is terminated

and

one TTL

drive 1

S

driver

capable

Enable

or unaddressed

controller.

isolated

of 40 V

from

above

GPI

L indicates

with

3

load.

B loads.

of sinking

allows

that

the

inguard circuit

chassis.

of mnemonic

LOW true.

+

kO to

The output

all units

34904 wants the

4g mA

the control-

by

5 V

and

is

on the

common

an

at

(input

LEOP

L End

activity

HDAC

H

Data

Returns

data.

HRFD

HIGH,

LDAV

L

Data
from the
available if

HIGH.

LREN

L Remote

the

Remote

LDIO1 through

L

Data
form
3490A if

Low terminall

Output

on the

Accepted

to

LOW

Valid

34904

3490A

Address

Enable

mode.

LDIOS

Input/Output

to the

34904 if

addressed

and chassis

is

used

bus.

indicates

when

indicates

if

addressed
is

is

valid if

enables

to

talk_

(power

by controller

34904

34904

valid

output

to

addressed

MRE

is LOW.

the

34gOA to

lines

carry

addressed

linel ground

to

terminate

has

accepted

is finished

data

talk,

or input

to

listen

be

information

to listen

and

data.

processing

is

available

data is

and MRE

placed

in

octal

from

or

may

all

is

in

the

be

Figure

2-9.

General Purpose

lnterface

Bus

Connections.

a1

Section

II

Model 3490A

TRIGGER CONNECTOR Jl1

E

UtJJE

!2 lg

9V
=g

FCE
JF

-v

FL

L

Mating Connector:

*rp- Part No.

Amphenol

;22399ä

1251.0142

No.57-30141

Sample/Hold

LOW

Sample/Hold

reading.

Sample/Hold AC Trigger:

Negativegoing edge of an
wide and having

Sample/Hold circuits and/or

reading.

TTL Trigger:

input level

circuits and/or

((+

0.4

an

amplitude

V) for

least 30

at

triggers 34904

pulse

input

of at

triggers

nstriggers

at least 30

least 2 V

3490A

take

to

triggers

to take

a

ns

a

ooooo
zzzzz

zZ

l

tr

*

Outguard
ground

6ö

E6

(9c,

t*

ground

may

and

Figure

Trigger

2-40.

Figure 2-10 shows

241.
nector,
mating
(Amphenol

2-42.

243.

Jll,
connector

57-30l4l).

Sample/Hold

Option

Connections,

lists the

and

for

Connections, 0ption

045.

GPIB 0ption 030.

the rear

External

-hp-

Jll is

Figure

2-ll

Part

shows

trigger connections for Option 045,

EA

IlJIE

\:/JIU

oclo

no(,

F=F

)
!-

: HF

*o(JifC)(Jr

ui

z

l

ol
t-?

z

z'@O zzAi

oooo

2ZZZ

zz

--

ai ,4

**

is isolated from inguard

floated

be

a maximum of 40 V above chassis.

2-10. Trigger Connections,

panel Trigger con-

Trigger signals. The

No. 12514142

040/045.

the

external

is

which

F
()

A

Sample/

TRIGGER

Mating Connector:

part

+rp_
Amphenol

1251*,142

No.

No.57-30141

LETF:

L
ready for an external
trigger is received

circuit common

(input

GPIB

Hold without
connector

1 25 1 41

2-44. Sample/Hold

When

020.
with the
Hold trigger
Input
and

describes

CONNECTbR

Sample/Hold TTL Trigger:

Sample/Hold

Stretched

The mating

Jl1

LOW
Sample/Hold
Must

be

Negative-going
having
circuits
stable

at

Changes

minimum

Sample/Hold

(Amphenol

030.

External Trigger

Low Terminal) and

Option

Option

Flag

(34904

030.
020 or Option

for Trigger Connector

(Amphenol

42

57-301 4

with

Sample/Hold

BCD

Remote

Expand Option

connections

Connector,

J7. Figure 2-6

the trigger signals.

level

input

circuits and/or

HIGH

at

AC Trigger:

edge

an amplitude

Pulse

triggers

and/or

ps prior

least

2

Output:

from HIGH

ot

24O

AC Trigger

connector for

57-30141)

O.4

{(+

least

ps prior

60o

of

input

an

of

at

3490A

to negtive transition.

l2+z.q

each

for

tts

input.

Jl 1 is

supplied

goes

LOW when

trigger, and

is not looking

chassis

goes

(power

030.

Jll is

I

).

BCD Remote

included in an

is

Expand

020,

are

located

on the Remote

shows

The mating

for .)t least 30

V)

triggers 34904

to

pulse

least 2 V

to take a reading.

to

V)

Sample/Hold

*tp- Part No. 1251{142

with

to take a reading.

going

Low'

least 3()

at

triggers

({+

LoW

TTL Triggpr

Option 045

the

HIGH when

for a triggerl.

line)

{rp-

3490A

The

Part No.

is

mating

Option

instrument

the

Sample/

this connector

connector

ns triggers

ns wide and

Sample/Hold

Must

be

for

o.+ V)

or

a

or

Option

*

Outguard
ground

ground

and may be floated a maximum

is isolatedfrom

Figure

inguard

2-11. Trigger Connections S/H Option

circuit

of

40 V above

common

chassis.

(input

Terminalland

Low

045.

chassis

(power

linel

Model3490A

Section

II

-hp-

for

J7

is

Part No.

s7-30360-37s).

245.

Sample/Hold

the Trigger

shows
trigger

125

2.46.

signals.

(Amphenol

l-01 42

REPACKAGING

with GPIB Option 030. Figure

Connector,

The mating connector is

57

-301

4 l).

FOR SHIPMENT.

NOTE

If the instrument

service or
identifying
to be accomplished. Include the
serial number of the instrument.

identify the instrument
nulhber. If

-hp-

Sales and Service

247.

The following

the

instrument for
available,
appropriate

tape

or metal bands.

available,

proceed

is to

repair, attach a tag to

the owner

you

have any

place

the

packing

shipped to

be

indicating

and

by model

questions,

Office.

general

is a

shipment. If

instrument

material

If the

follows:

as

and seal

original

1252-0084

Jll,

Hewlett-Packard

the
model
In

any correspondence,

number

contact your

guide

the

original

in

the

(Amphenol

and describes the

-trp-

Part

the

instrument

service

or

number

for

container
well with strong
container

and full

and

full serial

nearest

repackaging

container

2-10

No.

for

repair

with

is not

a. Wrap

before

b. Place

instrument

plastic

or

c. Place

heavy

d. Mark

MENI"

If
Hewlett-Packard

o tag
owner
be accomplished.

is

and
any

by

you

est

the

instrument

placing

carton

in

an inner

packing

and protect

foam.

the

instrument

and seal

shipping

"FRAGILE."

the

instrument

to

the instrument

and indicating

seiul

number

any

Sales

number

questions,

and Service

full

cotrespondence,

model

have

-hp-

in

heavy paper

container.

material

with strong tape

container

etc.

for

Include

and

around

panel

face

with cardboard

and inner

'.DELICATE

NOTE

is to

be shipped

service

or repair,

identifying

the service

the

model number

of the instrument.

identify

full

contact

Office.

the

seriat

all sides

container

or

metal

attach

the

or

repair to

instrument

nimber.

your

near-

or

plastic

of

the

strips

in

bands.

INSTRU_

to

In

If

a

2-9

Section

III

Model3490A

1.2.Line

Switch,

Rate Control.

Sample
clockwise
known delay.

Manual Trigger

J.

control.

4.

Sample/Hold Switch
Hold mode.

Ratio

5.

6.

Switch

referen@.

Range

Switch

The

Range

is,

when
ously selected
on a range key,
result-

a

Signal or

terminals.

push

on/push off.

position.

Maximum sample rate is selected in

Each

Pushbutton in

(Option

(Option

keys.

one range key

0801. Selects

keys are

Switch

is

key

or

External Reference

counterclockwise

center

of Sample

o4o/045).

is

released.

mechanical

Selects Sample/

internal or

interlocking.

pressed,

not

Do

damage will

(Option

Figure

step adds a

external

That

the Previ-

pull

up

O80l input

.'^".

Rate

31.

.

._.8.

9. InPut

i\-

10. Function Switch.

1.

1
'|

2. Rear

1 3. Line

14.

1

5. Line

16, AC

17. Data Output

18.

19. Trigger

Front and

Guard terminal,

terminals.

Thermal Adjust. See

Panel input connector in
terminals. Included
2-7.

voltage selection switch.

Remote

2-6.

General

030).

Figures 2-l0

Input connector J7

fuse.

power

@nnector.

connector

Purpose

Figure 2-9.

See

connector J1 l

Input

and2'11.

Inter{ace

Rear Panel.

Paragraph

with

Options 020

(Option

J6

3-41.

parallel

gee

Figure

(Option

0201.

connector J12

Bus

(Option

with

or

030. See

.

2-1

0201. See

Figure

See

030 or 045).

front

Figure

Figure

2-5.

(Option

See

l-rJ

Model3490A

SECTION III

Section

III

INTR0DUCTI0N.

3-1.

section

This

3-2.

34904

Model

resistance

and

sample/hold

for

tions
control
may
the

3.3.
3-4.

3-5.
voltage,
S-digit resolution
except
ranges,

1000V; and
Ranging
and display
which

3-6. Output
3-7.

Option
coded decimal
either HIGH true or LOW true,
switch
assembly. With
function may be
information.
option.

3-8. General Purpose

030. The

option

the same

bus in parallel

controlled

control

mode

includes

tude

Controlling

3490A
calculators
Programmer.

3-9.

3-10.
\todel 3-190.{

and

found

be

front

3490A

INSTBUMENT
Standard

standard

The

ac

l000Vac

V

.l

may be

checks

Data

Output

022. Option 021

on

General Purpose

permits

bus lines. The 3490A

by

of range,

possible

is

measurement

and range,

GPIB option

Sample/Hold

The

Sample/Hold

contains

Multimeter

measurements.

output.

data

pull-out card at

a

on

Panel.

CAPABI

I nstrument.

Model

voltage

are

and Remote Gontrol 0ptions.

the

instruments

and

and resistance

and

to

dc.

1000V;

to

six resistance ranges,

manual

automatic.

certain operations within

Option

(BCD)

outguard data output

Option

programmed

External

remote

with several

a single

function,

with

in the

the

0ption

Multimeter

instructions

to make dc

It

and ratio

Basic operating

LITIES.

3490A Multimeter

to I 20 % of range on all

up

3490A

The

4 ac

or automatic. Polarity

A self-test feature is included

021

provides

output data.

O22, the

triggering

Interface

Interface

programmhg

controlling instrument.

trigger mode and sample/hold

Option 030.

status,

function,

format

-hp-

given

that may be used with the

include

Model 3260A

040

or

Option

(040

to sample a changing input

OPERATING

for using

voltage, ac voltage

includes

also

measurements, remote

instructions

the

bottom edge

measurements with

has five dc

voltage ranges,

I kO to 10,000kQ.

the instrument.

and Remote

columns of

ten

This

data

as selected by

printed circuit

349OA

by LOW

possible

is

Bus ll0

and data

may be

other

in Paragraph

-hp-

the

true

with

Bus I/O

connected

instruments and

The output data

polarity, magni-

9800A

Marked Card

045.

or

045)

the

instruc-

makes dc

ranges

voltage

I V to

selection

Control

binary

may be

slide

a

and

range

input

either

Option
(GPIB)

output on

to

Remote

3-126.

series

enables

the

INSTRUCTIONS

voltage

amplitude. This
digitization of
waves.

signal input Low terminal and from chassis
which allows the voltmeter
measurements. The

of

Sample/Hold options are as

When Sample/Hold

3-11. Batio

3-12.

capable of making three-wire dc-to-dc

measurement. Two External Reference ranges are pro-

vided, the I V

10.1

voltages from

3.13.

3-14. Figure 3-l

and connectors

Some of the features shown

certain options.

,.

3-15.

3-l 6.
between

a

chassis. These maximum
front
instrument

and hold

The

extemal

in a 3490A with:
BCDiRemote

GPIB

Option

Neither 020 or

0ption

The 3490A

t 1.2V,

V to

t

FRONT AND

MAXIMUM INPUT

Table 3-l

input terminals,

panel

and

may

If the

34904 has a rear

the

front

connected
be applied, always

nals. Be

before connecting

open

terminals

front

sample

that

permits pulse

changing

trigger circuits are

designations

is

installed

Expand

030

030

long enough to measure its

height measurements and

waveforms

follows:

Option 020

such

to

make

used for the

The

Sample/Hold

is designated as:

Option 040
Option
Option 045

080.

equipped with Ratio Option

range accepting reference

the 10V

and

I V to t 12V.

PANEL

REAR

shows the front and rear

gives

and

a brief

OESCRIPTION.

description

are available

VOLTAGES.

the

lists

must

resull.

maximum allowable voltages

and between the

voltages are

not be exceeded or

also

wAR]ililG

input connector,

and rear terminals are

puallel.

in

the rear input

ilre

If

protect

and vice

voltages may

high

the open

terminals

input to

an

versa.

as ramps or

isolated

guarded

040

or

ac-to-dc ratio

range accepting

panel

terminals

shown

damage

internally

termi-

sine

from the

ground,
floating

34904

option

080

voltages of

controls

of each.

onlv

with

and

on the

to the

are
the

is

3-l

Section

III

Model

3490A

Table

3-1 .

Between Input
Between fi
Between
Between Guard

3.I 7. GENERAL

3-18. Turn-On

3-19. Before
sure the rear
correspond to the
shown

in

HIGH and LOW

HIGH and

Signal

either

LOW
and

OPERATING

and

Warm-Up.

connecting

panel

voltage

Paragraph

Chassis

2-5 and Figure 2-1.

3-20. Guarding.

3-21. Common-Mode
are those
of the source
between the

ground
voltages
error in

drop in
the resistance
cant.
ground
may

existing between

circuitry

Low

measurement point

of the

source

flows into

measurement

the

measuring

of

long input

Wide separation

point

and

the

result in high

common-mode

the 3490A

Maximum

terminal

LOW

and

Voltages.

Guard

Maximum

Voltage

100O

Vrms
250 Vrms
2O0 V

500 V

INSTRUCTIONS.

power

ac

line selector

of

Voltages. Common-mode

the power

and that

circuit. When

results

circuit. In systems

between

ground

to

the 3490A,

switches

the

available power

of

current

line

the

and

are set to

ground

34904,

power

due

input terminals, some

because

of the voltage

measurements,

leads

may

become signifi-

the 3490A

point

of the source

power

voltage.

peak
peak

make

line

as

voltages

point

and
line

to

these

line

circuiü,

The

Guard

nected

point

the instrument

3-23.

Guarding Information.

on purpose

-hp-

Application

and

Guarding."

through

your

Terminal

to

Low

in the

and

methods
Note No. 123,

This

nearest

-hp-

must

or to

source

moy

circuit

result.

More detailed

guarding

of

"Floating

application note

Sales and

3-24. Floating Measurements.

3-25. The
measurements.
connected
between

geater

the

than

A. Best

Connection - Guard

r---

B.

Guard Connected To

Model

That

to

chassis

guard

500

3490A

terminal

peak.

V

is

capable

is,

the input

(power

line)

and chassis must

Connected

44904

--------

Low At Voltmeter.

always

be

con-

a corresponding

or damage

information

may

be found in

Measurements

is

available

Service Office.

of making flöating
Low terminal
ground.

The

voltage
not

To

Low

At

Source.

- -

CONNECITON

EEST

SAME VOLTAGE

NO COMMON MOOE

GOES

9!9!'!-9 _ _ _

IHROUGH

CURRENI

Rb

to

is not

be

3-22.
ways
errors caused
Guard is

Guard

Connection. Figure

of connecting

by common-mode

practically

at
measurement point,
through
circuit. In
connected
potential.
through
measurement
common-mode
problem
similar to
manner
between the
gound
circuit­Lou' terminal
rrdicated.
mode
r3ring and

Guard

example
to the
This

the input

or if

A.

allows

of the
Guard

If

the

voltages

damage

and not through

Low

allows

error.

voltages

R6 is

except

any

Low

source
should

or

guard

may

the

3-2 illustrates

the 3490A

Guard terminal

voltages.

the same

potential

so any common-mode

the

B,

the

3490A

terminal, placing

common-mode

lead

resistance

This

are

small

connection

(short

R6, causing some

not

expected

leads). Example

that connecting

common-mode

current generated

measurement point

circuit

to flow in the

alwoys be connected,

to

point

a

exceed

in the

terminal

the

Low-to-Guard

source

is

left open, common-

34904.

three

to

reduce

In example

as the

current

A,

Low

flows

measurement

Guard strap

both

at the

same

current to

flow

may be used if

to

be a

C is

Guard in this

power

and

line

measurement

either to the

circuit

breakdown

is

as

C. Guard

FLOATING

r'-

i*.J

Connected To

- -l

3-2.

Figure

VOLIACE

sÄME

Earth

COMMON MOOE
6OES TBROüGH
CAUSIN6

9E0!{q__

Ground.

DOITEO
DEFEAIS
OAMACE INSIqUMENT

SOLIO
MUCH
CURRENT AWAY FROM
PROVIDED
MOSILY

GROUNO

CURRENT

ERRORS

_

CONNECIION

GIAROI MAY

CONN€CION

OF

COMMON MOOE

THAT

8€TWEEN

Fb,

ECM

Connecting the Guard.

SHUNTS

Rh,

15-

GROUNOS

3490A

Model

Section

III

0verrange

3-26.

3-27. Measwements

to 120

up
ranges. Overrange
the maximum
includes the overrange

3-28. Overload

3-29. lf the
the

Overload

display will read

Bange

3-30.

The 349OA

3-31.

kilohms

decimal
selected. In
indicates

3-32.

3-33.
by the function
control

indicate

available

TST

(except

point

range.

Function Indication.

In the standard

is in use,

that the

special

annunciators

Measürements.

of runge

7o

inputs on

allowable

Indication.

measurement

"OL"

annunciator will

120000 to 120005.

Indication.

in

and

autorange

switch position.

the

front

display

to

rated

within

on all except the

these

input

"1"

display always

Ratio

range switch

mode, the

3490A,

"REM"

panel

assembly

indicate

voltage.

the sixth

as

is 120

%

measurements),

function is

annunciator

switches

adds V,

the

function

accuracy

ranges

of

light.

reads

indicating

decimal point

If

are

1000

would

The

digit.

nnge

The

in volts

indicated

optional

are

disabled. An
AC,

selected.

Vac

or

numerical

with the

the

lights

possible

or

exceed

display

geater,

range
alone

only

Remote

to

Kfl

and

dc

or

a.

Set

Function
Sample/Hold
SAMPLE/HOLD

b.

Set

SAMPLE

wise from

c.
should
in

the
with
shown.
count
The,last

to
logic

d.

t

2 counts.

HOLD.

Select

_follow
list.

All

the polarity

The

accumulates,

two

the

test.

circuits

Select

This

RANGE

last

digits in

If

are

RANGE

options,

to

the

sequence

readings

sign,

reading

these

operating

+

080.024

+

o4.oo24

+

0.20024

+

.0too24

+

0.09032

+

to.oo24

+

200.024

+

4000.24

+

80002.4

+

6000.xx

verifies

to TEST.

set

OFF.

RATE

l,

which

should

numbers,

listed

then

stops
the last
displays

correctly.

OL

2.

The

the

l0

If

instrument

RATIO

control

below,

number

to

INT

one position

is

Logic

Test.

starting

in

be

the

and

decimal

displays

at the

are correct,

all

number

are not

display should

V range

zero.

has

Ratio

REF

and

clock-

The

display

at

any point

order

ih-own,

points

digiis

as

the

shown.

significant

most

of the

be .000000

or

ai

Autoranging.

3-34.

3-35.

In

the autorange

of

range and
ment sequence
the proper
control
button

sample
When
a voltage

valid.

3-36.

3-37.
When
measurement
depressed.
instrument
sampling

3.38.

3-39.
proper
circuits,
procedure
not

correct,
of the
mance

range.

is set

depressed

until

the

3490A

range,

ManualTrigger.

Manual

the

Sample

If

is

will stop

SELF.TEST

The

Intemal

operation

and

the

to perform

refer

other

tests

Checks.

mode,

downranglng

is

not

completed

For

example,

to

Hold

and the

once,

the 3490A

one

reading

is

changed

the

first

triggering

results

the

not

is

Rate

control

each

time

pushbutton

in

the

until

the

OPERATION.

Test

function

of

most

ohmmeter

the

Intemal

to

the

Troubleshootingsection.

are

not

upranging

lOVo

at

unless the

is

taken

to the

reading

available

the Manual pushbutton

is

Hold

button

of the

reference.

correct,

occurs at l2O%

of

range. Ameasure-

reading

if

the

Sample

Manual Trigger

will continue

on

the correct

autorange

in

autorange

on

instruments.

all

is set to

depressed
condition,
is released.

of

the 3490A

dc

circuits,

Use

the

Tests.

If

Test

refei to

is
Rate

push-

range.

mode

from

is not

Hold,

while the
automatic

verifies

logic

following

No. I

Ifany

perfoi_

the

on

to

one

ii

e.

Select

RANGE

readings

accuracy

­+
3490A

l0 V

shoüld
dmplifier

position

'counts,

is

accuracy

-

10.0000V.

+
attenuation

Dsplay

proper
3-40. DC

341.
.l V

should

f.

Select

RANGE

of t

10.0000
dc standard

V. Display

error).

has the

and short

be r

00.0000.

zero.

and

remove

g.

Select RANGE

verifying

h.

Select

RANGE

of t

Display

dc standard

and

i.

Select

RANGE

should

operation

VOLTAGE

For

optimum

range,

first

be

error).

the dc

be

3.

(8

0.01

ratio

EXT

Return

the

0.01

-

09700.0 1

of the

Difference

counts.

4.

Using

a
% or better,
should

be + 09.9990

This

checks

option,

REF

This

set

input

checks the

RATIO

short

from

input.

5. Display

0.1 V range

6. Using

should

zero.

a dc standard

% or better,

should

be - 1000.00

This

ehecks

amplifier

7.

Short fl

xl00

7000 counts.

Ohms

Converter.

MEASUREMENTS.

short

accuracy

the

of measurements

input

terminals

between

dc standard

apply

an

+

(16

+

the

Reference.

RATIO to

EXT

terminals.

Ratio

switch

be

apply

the

dc input

to INT

000.000 t

an input

(35

I

gain.

SIGNAL

This

with a copper

+

having

input

Reference

having

terminals.

and

an

of

counts

Ifthe

REF

Display

REF

t5

an

of

counts

0.01

verifies

the

on

-

J-J

Section

III

3490A

Model

or a large

bar
(Thermal Adj)
through
connector,

the rear

loosen

AlR429.

Be wre

to observe

and

tations

3-1,

Table

rewlt.

may

DC Sample

3-42.

sample

The

3-43.

measurements

3-2. Sample

Table

Function

Volts

DC

Volts

AC
Ohms

k thru

.1

100

1,O00

10,000

*Sample

not in
Option

3-44.

240.2ms+5ms

1.26s+.025s

ko

240.2ms+5ms

kf,,

300.2ms+6ms

ko

660.3

Rate Control

overload.

050 instruments,

Input Resistance.

solid

zero

for

panel.

the

connect

to

copper

wire, and

display.

the

If

hinged

the Guard

the maximum

the

on

noted

damage

or

Rate

rate and

shown in

are

Minimum Sample

050

Option

ms + 12 ms

set to

Each counterclockwise

front

Response

and

response
Table

and Response

Rate

FAST

ms in

200

adjust

AlR429

to

the rear

gain

3490A has

cover

Terminal

voltage

panel

ta the

instrument

Time.

for dc

time

3-2.

Period*

O60

Option

ms+4ms

200.1

1.05s+.025s

ms+4ms

200.1
ms+5ms

250.1

ms + l0

550.2

position

Option

and instrument
adds

step

060

AlR429

is

accessible

input

access

limi-

in

and

voltage

Time.

Response

Time

200.1

1.05 s

2OO.1
25O.1

ms

550.2

ms

240

instruments.

in

to

ms

ms
ms
ms

Frequency

3-50.

Frequency

3-51.

250kHz,
That
is 2OHz

100

3-52.

3-53.

all

r"itft u

is, the frequency

to 250

is 100 kHz,

V

Input lmpedance.

Input impedance

ranges,

and
instruments
instruments

Harmonic

3-54.

The

3-55.

circuit

verter

sinusoidal
input
ments

input.

signal

as shown

Harmonic

Any

even

Bange.

range

maximum
kHz, but

and at

is 2 MO

without

having

D istortion.

3490A

calibrated

Therefore,

will affect

in Table

Table 3-3.

%

is

converter

the ac

of

range

volt-Hertz

for

the

product

I V and

the maximum

l0 kHz.

it is

V

1000

function

ac

in the

panllel with

in

t I

%

panel input

rear

tire rear

panel

input

connector'

has an average-responding

to display

any

the rms

distortion

the accuracy

20Hz

l0

V ranges

frequency

is the

(

(90pF

and

ac-dc

value

present in the

of the

3-3.

Distortion

Distortion

o.1

0.5

1.0

2.O

Error.

Yo Error

{*Fundamental)

Max.

Positive

0.000

0.001

0.005

0.020

Max.

Negativr

to

of 107.

at

same on

pF

65

in
in

con­of a

measure-

Input resistance

345.
o

ohms on

101

t

megohms

3.46.

0.1 5

AC VOLTAGE

Be sure

to observe

and

tations

noted

Table 3-1,

result, and

may

will

ments
The display

341 .

the input shorted.

with

the input
accuracy

shorted should be

of ac measurements

not specified.

AC

3-48.

-3-49.

Sample

The sample rate and

measurements

function

the dc

in

I V, and

V,

the .1

7o

the 100

on

V and

MEASUREMENTS.

connect

to

or

be

will NOT

Rate and

are shown

the

the maximum

the

on

damage

high

front

to

frequency

in enor-

rcad

The indication

less

below

Response

response

nTable

is

10V ranges,

1000 V

Guard

Terminal

voltage

panel and

instrument

the

measure-

on any

zero

on all

50 counts.

than

of full

1.0%

Time.

time for

3-2.

greater than

l0

and

ranges.

limL

in

ac range

with

ranges

The

range is

voltage

ac

Third

Fifth

*Depends

fundamental.

RESISTANCE

3.56.

When the

3-57.
ments,
display

movement

readings

mtusur.*ents

Function
copper
efn+zq
accessible
rear
access

to

bar

(Thermal

through

connector,

input

the adiustment.

to

on

on
.1V
or

phase

0.1

o.5

1.0

2.o

0.1
o.5

1.0

2.O

relationship

o.033

68

0.1

0.338

0.687

0.020

0.1 01

0.205
o.420

between

MEASUREMENTS.

3490A

of the

jump.

to

the .1

dc, short

solid

large

Adj)

rear

the

loosen

is making

instruction

For

kO

the

for

panel.

resistance

optimum

first

range'

input

copper

display'

zero

If the

the hinged

0.003
o.167

0.328

0.667

0.020
o.099

0.195

1.380

harmonic and

measure-

will

card

accuracy

Range

set

terminals

wire, and

A1R429

3490A

cover

cause

with

adjust

has

gain

to

of

and

a

is

the

Model3490A

to connect

sure

Be
and to obserye

tations
Table 3-1

may

3-58.

3-59.
making resistance
be connected,
between
O

Signal

noted

,

result.

Input Connections

Figure

3-3

since there

O

Signal

lead resistance

O SIGNAL

the

the

maximum

on the

or damage

shows

front

to

the proper

measurements.

is

Low and Input

permissible

Guord

voltage

panel

the

Terminal

limi-

and

in

instrument

connections

All four terminals

no internal

Low.

connection

Maximum total

is 10 O.

for

must

Rate

control
signal
connector.

timing

to

Low

occur

must

be set

applied to

The

the Hold

External

requirements

transition

of

simultaneously.

HOLD

are shown
External

Pilä:::",----__1_

,

o

Encode

goes

Flag

External

goes

Flag
sequenoe.

must be

LOW.

HIGH

Tl

-

EXTERNAL

ENCODE

34904.81&

External
Data

changing

Data
ment

to Hold,
connection
Encode

Encode

HtLiH at

This

requirement

Encode

to

indicating

or

a continuous

either

at

signal

in Figure

and Data

teast

HIGH

immediately

the

start of a

Section

rear panel

logic levels

34.

The

High

Flae

r

ps

16

rnay

before

be met

after

measure-

III

Low

and

can

by

Figure

3-3.

Ohmmeter lnput

3-60. 0hms Signal

3-61.

The

maximum
measured
overload.
current
sources

is the

as a

voltage

3-62.

3_-63.
shown

3-64.

365.
capability
either
order

is 13

V for

Table

3-4

for each

are not

ratio

result

which

0hmmeter

Ohmmeter

in

Table

range.

required,

of

the voltage

the

of

determines

Table

34.

Range

10

100

1,000

10,000

Sampte

sample

3-2.

EXTERNAL

The

BCD/Remote

of

remotely

the

Data

Output

to

remotely

Voltage

and

voltage

valid

lists the

across the

measurements

approdmate
Accurate
since

a resistance

across

reference

current, to

the

amount

Ohmmeter

ko

.l

lko

ko
ko
ko
ka

Rate

and

rates

TRtcGER

(Option

Expand

rriggering

or

Remote

trigger

the

Connections.

Current.

resistance

and 25 V in

short

voltage

measurement

the unknown

the

of the currenr.

Current.

Nominal

Current

1mA
lmA
lmA

pA

10

pA

10

1

ttA

Besponse Time.

and

response

020).

Option

instrument,

020 adds

the

3490A through

Input

connector.

circuit

and

current

resistance

reference

times

the

Sample

being

are

the

In

T2-External

before
External
Flag
holding
LOW

sequence.

T3 - External

to

T4 - Data

valid

Figure

3-4.

3-66.

DATA

3-67.

The
measurement
and

overload
output
and

.

connector

1251-0086

.

"

with

50-pin

nection

3-68.

3-69. If
Option
tion
ment
and
level

=0.3V

print

2-5

using

is

triggering.

Option

connector,

to

Output

the

02l

provided,

are

magnitude

overload

=

+

3.9
+

the

numerical

shows

a standard
HIGH/LOW
Assembly,
true

level

3-5

shows

Encode

goes

it

Enmde

went

HIGH, the

External

indicating

Encode

be accepted

Flag

HIGH

and

go

will

to

LOW transition

External

0UTPUT

Data

Output

data,

including

information.

also provided,

Figure

and

signals.

(Amphenol

021

-hp-

Signals

Model

,Ien

information

V r

0.3V,

the print

switch

Al0,

required

the printout

A mating

. A cable

-hp-

digital

recorders.

and Levels.

3490{is

columns

In

addition

information,

1.5

V,

l5mA

magnitude

code

-hp­on

must

be

by the

for

müSt

be HIGH for

Low

to initiate

was

set HtGH

T2 requirement

Encode

completion

must

rernain

initiate

HIGH

Trigger

(Option

immediately

HIGH until

LOW

a rEasurement.

within

of External

Sequence

021).

option provides

polarity,

A Data

as

2-5

Flag (prini

are inputs

shows

connector,

No.

57-30500-375)

terminated

562A-16C,

is

equipped

of l-24-8

coded

to

6 columns

range,

provided.

are

pA

400

max.

max.

Columns

of a measurement.

for columns

print

wheel,

the

Outguard

set

to correspond

digital

recorder

Option

021.

at

least

a measurement.

rnay

Data

of

a measurement

for

at least

ps

230

of receipt

(Option

ten

range,

4gps

after Data

met

be

Flag

24O

Enc,ode.

020).

columns

function,

goes

of a

Commandj

for printer

the

Data

-hp

hold

Output

part

No.

is supptied

at each .nä'by

available

with

Data

BCD

of

for

con-

Output

informa-

measure-

function, polarity,

The logic
The

LOW

I

through

HIGH

level

Figure

7 through

+

or - 124g.

Data

to

used.

10,

The

Output

the logic

Figure

lf

by

ps

of

u

6

3-5

Section

III

Model34904

Column

-_-_ll-

3-70.

The
changes
measurement, and returns
a reading

autorange

reading

HIGH to LOW
signal to a digital recorder.

3-71.

3-12. Three input connections
Output

+
level

ground
Hold connection causes the 3490A to stop
sampling
LOW
sampling
LOW, a LOW input
for
Paragraph

from LOW to HIGH at

cycle. If the

mode, Data

has been completed on

Input

connector. The input logic HIGH

1.5V, l00pA max, or
=

+

0.3 V

through <

until

connection

and

a mimimum of 240

3-64).

10

947654321
0v3012300

l+

Numerical

I

Readino

I

L

*"nn"

F unction
Polarity/Overload
Sample/Hold

Printout.

3-5. Option

Figure

Flag

Data

Signals

t

the

permits

@rint

Flag

transition constitutes a Print Command

and

0.3 V.
A.

300

line returns to

the Hold input

at

external triggering. When

level

ps

021

Command) output signal

the

beginning

to LOW at

instrument is

remains

the completion of

operating

HIGH until after one

the correct range. The

Levels.

available

are
open circuit. The

an

2 mA max.

A HIGH

the External Encode input

at

initiates

contact closure to

or

input at the Printer

A continuous

LOW.

prevents

one reading

Mode

of a

in the

the Data

at

=

+

3.9 V
LOW

automatic

automatic

Hold

cycle

is

(see.

Input

3-77.

3-78. The Remote

of the remote

tion
programming of
optional Sample/Hold.

=

+

level
circuit. The LOW

contact
shows the binary
programming,
input

3-79.

-3-80.
HIGH at

of
the
measurement.

to
to LOW at

instrument

Flag remains
completed on
output
400

3-81.
3-82.

LOW by an external connection.
line
HIGH, range and
the
is shown in Figure 3-6.

3.9 V

closure to

signals.

0utput Signals.

Program

The

the beginning

program information, and

transfer is

HIGH

at

signals

max; LOW

l,rA

Remote Programming

program

All

must be held

panel

front

3-83.'Remote Gontrol 0f

Requirements.

Signal

Control

range and

r

1.5

level

ground

coding required

as well as

Flag output

complete

Data Flag output

The

the beginning

the completion

is operating in

at HIGH until

the correct

as follows: HIGH

are

=

input
LOW continuously.

function

controls. The remote

option

mode

function,
input

For

100

V,

=

+

0.3
through

the requirements

of outguard-to-inguard

the

and

of a measurement,

+

V r 0.3

0.3

lines

program

Test Function.

operation,

of

pA

t

V

returns

instrument

of a

the autorange mode,

one reading has

range. The

Procedure.

are

permits

signals,

0.3 V,

for range

changes from LOW

reading cycle.

V,

remote

including

the

max.,

The Remote

or an

2 mA max.,

<300 O.

for the other

to LOW to

is ready for

changes from LOW

logic levels for

=

+

3.9 V

l5

mA max.

HIGH unless forced

If

capability reverts to

program

selec-

and remote

Test and

logic

HIGH

open

Figure 26

and function

transfer

indicate

and returns

If the

Data
been

t

1.5 V,

Enable

it returns to

sequence

or

to

a

Data

3-73.

3-74. Nl output
connector are isolated from
circuits
will
characteristics
connected.
common
be floated up to 40

3-75.

3-76. In
iunction. the Remote

external

for
during
rrulput
:natinE
\-' r:-3036G375)

.t

ol:on.

la

0utput

and from the input

maintain

and from chassis

REMOTE

addition to

remote

is

HIGH

connector.

lsolation.

input lines at the Data Output

and

normal-

all

with

Outguard

C0NTROL

triggering.

program

during

and

the

Data Output

ground

(power

V above

chassis.

(0ption

remote control

Control option

A Program Flag output is HIGH

execution, and

a measurement

*rp- Part No. 125 l-0084

is suppliedwith

terminals. The instrument

the internal

common-mode rejection

isolated

is

line)

(inguard)

lines properly

inguard

from

ground

and may

022).

of range

includes provision

the Data Flag

se,quence.

(Amphenol

the Remote Control

and

3{4. The Test function may be

programming Function

Logic Test, is selected
line HIGH. Tests
programming

Figure

l0 readings must be
before changing
of two
test. For
Paragaph 3-38
input

required

required for Test No. 7 may be applied

test sequence without affecting the other

No.

4, the ratio

remotely.

Remote Control

A

3-85.

336. All input
connector

circuits

Range lines A, B and C as

When Test No. I is selected, a minimum

2-6.

the program. In

readings

and

is required to record the turnover

other

all

describes

for Test No.

and output lines at

isolated from the

are

from

A and B HIGH.

by

No. 2 through 7 are selected

taken to

tests,

only one reading

the internal tests. The

reference

lsolation.

the input termina-ls. The

selected remotely by

programming the

record all

and

6,

check

Test No.

cannot

the test data

3,

the Q

throughout

tests. In Test

be

the Remote
internal

Test No.

Autorange

indicated

a minimum

error

is

necessary.

-

10 V

short

signal

controlled

Input

(inguard)

instrument

1,

by

in

of

the

34904

Model

REIUOTE
ENAELE

PROGRAI\,I
LINES

PROGRAM
EXECUTE

PROGRAM

349A.4-2936

Tl - Remote

programming.
first. lf Remote Enable
reverts to

Enable must

front

lttltl
rtllll
lrrttll

II T2 T3

For reliable

panel

T4 15

be held

goes

controls.

T6 T7

LOW

operation,

HIGH,

permit

to

T1

should

program

remote

occur

capability

3-89.

The

operating

tion include

program

codes,
information.
can

Standard

bit

octal

code

3-90.

GPIB

3-91.

For

convenience

is

identified

the

signal

name.

GPIB

bus.

An H preceding

the

signal

is HIGH

instructions

address

The

Code

in a parallel

codes

output

format,

GPIB system

for Information

bit, serial

BusSignals.

and brevity,

by a

mnemonic,
Table

3-5

true,

L

indicates

contained

and

address

uses

and

timing

the

code

ASCII

Interchange)

character

each

bus signal

which is

an abbreviation

lists the signals

a mnemonic

LOW is

indicates

true.

Section

in

this

selection,

sequence

(Ameri-

form.

used

on

III

sec-

eight-

line

of

the

that

T2 - Selection of range

T3

T4 - Program

T5

T6

T7

Figure

will
characteristics
connected.
common
be

floated

3-87.

3.-88
the
ment
ment
programming
Sample/Hold

the
output
polarity,
Paragaph
in parallel
controlling
may

-hp
\larked

are

lines
connector. T1

-

Program

ms. T2 and

5

program
depends
occurs.

-

Transfer

Encode may

-

Program
any
line need
subsequent

-Program
quent program

maintain

time

3-6.

HIGH

Execute

Flag initiates

information,

upon

of

lines

after

not

program

Execute

Remote

all

with

Outguard ground

and

from

up

to

GENERAL
(0ption

_The

Model

to

information

Ratio

be

9800

030).

General

3490A

be

controlled

of

mode.

mode

data

includes

magnitude,

3-126.

to

the

insrrumenr.

used

with

series

Card

Progammer.

program

be applied.

40

Several

calculators

and f

unless forced

and T2

level

T3 may

point

may

Program

be

returned

must return

change

Program

normal-

the

unction

may

be simultaneous.

must

be LOW

be simultaneous.

ourguard-to-inguard

Interval

in

scan

information

be returned

Flag

to HIGH

change.

can

be made.

Sequence

and common.mode

Remote

is
chassis
V

PURPOSE

Purpose

Digital

(power

above

Voltmeter

chassis.

INTERFACE

Interface

remotely

to

a digital

range,

Neither

can

recorder.

function,

the poweiline

be programmed

measurement

and

range,

instiuments

same

bus

and

Controlling

the

34904

GpIB

and the

programming.

LOW

at Remote

for

a minimum

between

sequence

is complete.

to

goes

to

HIGH before

HIGH,

LOW.

unless

T3

at

if

Any

required

(Option

Control
isolated

lines properly

from inguard

line) ground

BUS I/O

Bus

I/O

allows

and to

output

peimits

It

trigger

mode,

remotely.

status,

in the

forrnat given

may be connected

controlied

by a sinsle

instruments

option

include

_hp_

Model

Input
lnput

of

transfer

desired,

and T4

which

Exrernar

program

a subse-

of

T3

at

by a

022).

rejection

and r-nay

option

for

the instru_

measure_

remote

and

switch

nor

The

function,

in

thlat

the

32604

3-92.

Data
Input/Output
at the
In

the

3490A,
3-93.

Multiple

ple

Response

the

bus

data

on
command.
been

addressed

addressed

the

0n

'"'

3-94.

Handshake
is called
listeners)
accept
the

bus
slowest
data.

When

talker

puts

When

the

each

listener

data,

it

also

wire
actually go
data.

The

untilDAC
3-95.

RFD. Each

as it

has completed
previous
transmit

Table

3-5.

Mnemonic

DAC
DAV

(1€)

Dro
EOP
MRE
REN

RFD

sRo

Lines

lines

beginning

DIO8

Response

Enable

must

respond

lines

DIOI

When

as listener(s)

DAV,

DAC,

"Handshaking"

a

set

RFD

data.

The

so

that

data

listener

allows

data.

new

on

all

listeners

the

first

data

is

receives

its

OR'd to

HIGH
talker
goes

HIGH.

This

data

GPIB

Signal

Data
Data
Data

End
Multiple
Remote
Ready
Service Request

DlOl

through

are

LOW

the

of

mnemonic. (LOW

is

always

Enable,

line

is
to the
through

MRE

is HIGH,

as the

talker

may

and

RFD lines.

Signals.

RFD

Three

to

HIGH

line

will

not

the

bus signals

are

character

valid,

the

and

has

DAC

output

each

unit,

until

all

may

not

change

listener

may

and

acknowledged

signals

on

the

data lines

Mnemonics.

Signal Name

Accepred
Valid
lnput/Output

Output

Response

Enable

For

Data

DlOg.

true,

as indicated

HIGH,

or

MRE. When

LOW,

all units

controller

DIOT

only

and the

and

are

required

lines

technique.

to

indicate

is

wire

OR'd to

be transmitted

that

(RFD

ready

on the

dattlines,

talker

sets

completed

go

to

HIGH.

and

the line

listeners

have

the

set

RFD

to

the talker

DIOI

Enable

All eight

by

=

logical

..0".

logical

the

connected

and interpret

as

an

adäress

the

unit

which

(or

unit

to

respond

are used

The

for

listener

readiness

all

units

until

it

is

ready

goes

HIGH),

DIOI

DAV

to

LOW.

processing

This

does

accepted

data

on

DIOI

HIGH

as

acceptance

that

it

g.

-

Data

the

..1".)

Multi_

the

has

units)

what

(or

to

on

the

for

the

g.

_

As

this

line is

not

the

_

soon

of the

mav

L

to

or

g

3-1

Section

III

Model3490A

3-96.

DAV.

lines,

it

must set DAV LOW to indicate

vatid.

LOW.
HIGH,
sing

3-97.
goes
longer
same
indicate

3-98.

listener

A

DAV cannot

indicating that all

the

data.

DAC.

HIGH, indicating to the talker

needed. A listener

time

or at any

that it is

Service

having service

any time. This
of

the controller.

unit

on the

pulled

SRQ LOW, or it

LSRQ

does not

the talker

After

not

may

set HIGItr

be

When

listeners

all

time

ready for new

Request,
request

capability

indicates

The

controller

bus individually

hinder

other normal

bus.

3-99. End

End
DIOI
HIGH,

Output, LEOP. When

Output line

-

8, MRE,

all

units

may operate

LOW, all units

DAV,

RFD,

rules.

places

process

again until

listeners

have finished proces-

have

may set

RFD to

after

data.

LSRO. Any

may set

that

a unit

may then

to

see

may ignore

the

immediately

and

according

data on the

that

the data

data

until DAV

DAC

accepted

that

data, DAC

the

data is no

HIGH

goes

DAC

unit

on the

SRQ LOW at

wants

the

check each

which

unit or units

the service

operations

controller

stop

DAC. When

to the

normal

data
goes

goes

the

at

LOW, to

bus

attention

request.

on the

sets

the

driving

EOp is

bus

listen

is

more
they
the

address

instruments

should

positioning
Mother Board
Remove

address

that

only
selectable.
listen

and
provided
address
talk.

Absence

jumper

installed,

be

This code

of

6 and a talk

are

not

have the same

codes

jumper

Assembly

the top

cover

five

binary bits of the

These

five

talk addresses.

by the

is a talk

is

a logical

controller

or listen address;01

jumper

of a

"0".

because

is used to

address of V.

to

be operated on the

address. Table 3-6

possible.

wires in

to

Address is

a header on the

1, shown in

A3

gain

access

to this

selected

header.

7-bit

bits are the same for

sixth

The

is a logical

At least

the 11 1

to

determine whether

one

I 1 address is

seventh

and

for listen.

"1";presence

jumper

must

not

unaddress the instrument

If two
same

Outgrrald

Figure

format

both

bits

l0

always

allowed.

to talk

or

bus,

lists

by

3-7.

Note

are

the

are

the

for

of a

or

listen.

.-al

--] |
I u4 I -^

l^^. |

R6

rÄi+: -cg-

-

-

a3ll

Rlz- aeli

--

Rrs-

lr

lL

li

3-100.
bus
if
may
and
(front
tion

the

Remote

are enabled

the

controller

be set to

sending

panel)

is

noted

bus

respond

Enable,

to

respond to

holds the

remote

its

listen

address.

control

in Paragraph

to

their

is HIGH.

3-101. Talk

3-102.
to provide
on the
data
the

3490^
position
controlled
function,
349OA
Connector
by

connected

The

bus.

information

RFD,

DAV,

rear panel

(see

range,

may

the

SAMPLE

(No

0nly

3490A

with

data to a printer

The printer

and

and DAC

must

Figure

by

the

front

Sample/Hold,

be

triggered

Jll,

or

allowed

RATE

to

the

bus,

to the ADDRESSABLE

3-103.

3104.
addressed
sendine
GPIB I

GPIB

Control

Listen

to

listen

the

proper

is

O

normally

and

Talk
or

listen

REN. All

remote

REN

line

operation

It

may

setting

by

3-107.

REN

Normally,

front panel

Controller).

the

GPIB option

without

must be able to

to handshake

lines.

The slide

be set to

3-1).

The instrument

panel

controls

and

through

control.

the

rear

position.

of

3490A.

Addresses. The

to talk

or talk

programmed

the

to sample

panel

by setting

address. Each

instruments

programming

LOW.

The

by setting

REN

be returned

HIGH.

An excep-

all units

controls

when

may

having

a controller

accept

the ASCII

with the

3490A

switch

the TALK

for

selection

trigger

mode.

rear panel

at a rate selected

When

a

controller is

switch

must

34904

MRE

LOW and

at the

factory

on the

data

3490A

LOW

to

local

REN

used

be

on the

ONLY

is

then

The

Trigger

be

may

34904

for

on

on

of

set

be

F-

F<

I

J>

Figure

3-105.
turned

to

Addressed

on,

the front panel

remote control

3-106. Remote Control. To place
control, set

3490A
ously
is first
front

mode

(TQ),

No
then

listen code.

to maintain

set to
panel
is

and Mode

Output

be

HIGH and the

The

3490A

M, R, S and T,

3490A program codes.

to

listen by sending
timing
3490A

diagram for

is addressed

3-107. Return to Local

a

returned to local control

Position

3-7.

the

Mother

GPIB

of

Board

to

Listen.

programming

control settings. It

programming.

before

MRE

and REN to

REN

remote control. When the

remote control, the

range and function

(S0),

Off

Trigger is set to Internal

of Operation is Addressed

(M0).

AnV chalges in this

made by remote

remote

will accept only the

and digits 0 through

The 3490A may

the

data and

to listen.

Jumper Wires

on Outguard

Assembly A31.

When the 3490A

circuits

the 3490A in

LOW

will conform

must

be

placed

remote

and transmit

must be held LOW continu-

instrument

GPIB circuits store

selections.

Sample/Hold

Sample Rate

Multiple

programming

control. LMRE

programming

alpha

7. Table 3-7

character

handshake lines

Control. The 3490A

setting

by

must

data transmitted.

identifiers

lists the

be

unaddressed

?.

Figure

3-8 is

when the

may

REN

HIGH.

is

first

with

must

be

E,

How-

in

the

the

set

F,

a

be

_r,ö

Model3490A

Section III

ASCII

Listen

Address

SP

:,

#

$

7o

1

(

l

I

0

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

I

;

CODE

CHARACTER

Talk

Address

(g'

A

I

D
E
F

G

H

I
J
K
L

M
N

o

P

o

R
S

T

U

W

X

z

t

I

Table 3-6.

Jumper

b7 b5

See

note

below

Address

BINARY CODE

-+

A5

b5

00000
0000'l
00010
00011
00100
00101
00110
00111
01000
0100'l
01010
01011
01100
01101
01110
01111

10000
1000'l
10010

10011

10t00
10101
10110
10111
11000
11001

11010
11011
11100
11111
11110

Codes.

A4 A3

b4

b3 b2 b1

A2 A1

OCTAL CODE

Listen

040
M1 101
o42
043 103

o44
045
046 106

u7

050
o51
o52
o53 1 13
054
055
056
057
060 120

061 121

62
063
064
065

066 126

067

o70 130

o71 131
o72
073 133
o74

o75 135
076 136

Talk

100

102

104
105

'to7

110
111

't12

114
115

116

117

122
123
124
125

'127

132

134

Note:

Only first five
and

ever,

it cannot

reading.

If

REN
reading output
remote. In
HIGH
may
and
setting
continue
a

9800
listen
sampling,
may
typically
longer

3-108.
programming

with the
191-ul

followed

order

when no

also

be returned

back on

REN

to

again.

HIGH,

output

series

but is

not

since

appear

be

be

under

Remote

E

command

programming

by

calculator

to

expected

is not

one

F2R4S1T2MlE

of

bits

seventh

bits

be returned to local

goes

HIGH then

is in progress,

to

return to local, then, REN must

reading

output

to

If

the 3490A is

but

is not

readings. If there

on

able to

receive

it

cannot

be

a failure,

to continue

program

Program

control.

Sequence. The order

important

to execute

sequence

digrt.

selects

AC volts,

binary code are

determine

whether address

during output of a

LOW again while a

the 3490A

in progress.

is

local by turning its

returned

unaddressed

to talk, it

is a listener

the

bus that is

the 3490Awill

data,

output

data.

This

since the 3490A

sampling and no

except

For

that it

program.

the

is

one alpha identifier

example,

l0V

the

range,

given,

and

is listen

stay

will

be

The 3490A

power

off

to local

by

will

such

addressed

stop

condition

would

ofremote

must end

The

progam

Sample/

in

as

to

these

(011

r''

bits

the

are

(1O).

talk

or

Hold off, Next

'j

Output
might

stored
unless
more than
valid

FRl5T20SMF3E
graph
9820A
power

$109.
graphs
3_7.

3-110.
the
taken, and the
internal sample
control is set

same for

both listen

and

External Trigger,

(see

Table

3-7).lf it is necessary

be R3E. In

as

long as the instrument is in

changed

identifier

3-l3l

Calculator

other words,

by a subsequent programming

one

alpha identifier or

or digit

will

be accepted

gives

programming

a

as the controller

line switch cannot

Trigger

explain

T0,

Hold line

Source

the trigger

Internal

Sample Rate.

when ready for a new

instrument

rate. If

to the

Hold

talk

addresses.

Sixth

Addressed Multi with

change

to

program

data

will

remote control,

data.

is sent, the last

digit

will be stored.

example

programmed.

be

For

example,

R5T@F3E. Para-

as

using

the

printer.

and

Program. The following

source codes shown

in

The 3490A

measurement

is triggered according to the

the front

position,

panel

Sample

it will not sample

only

remain

if

-hp­The

para-

Table

releases

to

be

Rate

3-9

Section

III

Model

34904

CHARACTER

*

until

the

manual pushbutton

trigger

occurs,

hold.

11.

3-1

leases

Encode

T1,

the

command

begin. It is,

the

front panel

3-112.
Hold line
when
tngger

T2,

LOW

ready to

occurs,
command.
pushbutton

3-113.

T3,

and checks

to

used

store

R

1
2
3

4

5

6

7

F

0

a

2
3

s

0

1
2
3

T

o

1
2
3

M

0

I

2
3
4
5
6
7

E

lf Internal

or

the front panel

lmmediate

Hold

line,

when

therefore,

Sample

Next

External

and

releases

accept

the

GPIB

Pushing

will

also

initiate

None.

The

for

an

output

data

for

Range Program
10,00O

kf); Test

1

kQ; l

,000

100

kO; 1OO
1 0 kQ; 10
1

kS2; 1 V;

.1

Autorange;

Function

DC Volts
K

Ohms
AC
Test

Sample/Hold
Sample/Hold
Sample/Hold
Track/Hold
Acquire/Hold

Trigger
Internal
lmmediate
Next External
None

Mode
Addressed

Addressed

Addressed

Addresed

lnterrupt
Interrupt
Interrupt
Interrupt

Execute

Sample Rate

V;

kO;

Test

.t V; Test

Test 1

Program

Volts

Source Program

Samole

Internal

of

Operation Program

Multi
Multi
Single with No

Single with

Multi
Multi
Single with

Single

Mode

is

is pushed,

Internal.

but instead

ready

for a new

sampling

at its

Rate control

Trigger.

the

Sample/Hold

the

next

trigger. When

I/O

issues the External

the

front panel

a

reading.

3490A

keeps

request.

output

at a later

USE

ldentifier

7

OOO V;

Test

V;

Test

5

Test

4

3

2

ldentifier

Program
Off
Off

control

The

ldentifier

ldentifier

*

Rate

Trigger

with

No

with

Output

Output
with No
with

of

programmed,

Output

Output

No

with

Output

Operation Program

is taken

3490A

provides

measurement

madmum

is bypassed.

The 3490A

manual

the

Holdline

This

method

time.

Table

6

ldentifier

Output

Output

Output

make sure front

an

external

out of

never

External

an

rate, and

keeps

the

Inhibit

line

an external

Encode

trigger

LOW

may be

.'-'

re-

to

3-7.

Program

panel

OCTAL

CODE

122
061
062
063
og
065
066
067

106
060
061
62
063

123

060
061
62
063

124

060
061
062
063

115

o60
061
062

063
0il
065

.i066

067

105

Sample

3-1
explain

3-115.
mode,
control

Codes.

b1 b6 b5

1010010
011000'l
0110010
0110011
0110100
0110101
0110110
0110111

1

0
0
0
0

1

0
0
0
0

1010100

0110000
0lto001
0110010
o110011

I

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
o

1

Rate control is

14.

Mode of Operation. The following

the

.M0,

operation is similar to

and not addressed
according
occurs.

3-116.

strument
the

it

M1,

reading if

will

wait for

will

address to be
receipt of new
to the

beginning of the

for the next

3-117. M2, Addressed

instrument takes

BINARY CODE

ba

0

1
1
1
1

o

1

,|

1

I

0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

0 0

set

0
0
0
0
0

1

0

1

o

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

o

1

0

1

0

1

o

1

0

1

0

1

0

0 0

to

desired

mode of operation

Addressed

Multiple

to talk.

to the

programmed

Addressed

take a

Multiple with

reading

addressed to talk.

its talk

programmed.

address to

After

programming

program

reading.

Single with

one

reading when triggered

b2

b3

1

1

0

0

0

0

1

o

1

0

I

0
0

0

0

1

0

a

0

1

0

0

0

0

0
I

o

0

1

1

0

1

0

1

I

1

1

position.

codes shown

with No

in Table

Output.

operation when in

Readings

trigger,

but no

Outpüt. The in-

triggered

when

Ifnot addressed

output

data

output

data,

to

of the

the

GPIB

determine

No

Output. The

b1

0
0

1

0

1

0
1
0
1

I

o

1

0

1

0

a

o

I

I

paragraphs

3-7.

In

this

local

are taken

output

and output

to

talk,

or its listen

data or

I/O

returns

the trigger

and does

_i-l0

Model

MRE

Data

3490A

Lines

Section

III

LDAV

to

34904

is available

Timing

is

initiated by

local control.

The instru-

HRFD

not output
reprogramming

18. M3, Addressed

3-1

the reading. A

the 34904 or by

349OA
accept

new

Single

will

data

Figure
reading

going

with

lndicates

that data

3-8.

to

Output.
ment takes one reading when triggered and outputs
reading

if

addressed to
waits for its talk addres to
be

reprogrammed.

new

reading is initiated

going

by
before
taken

3-119.

gramming

this

3-120.

is the same

to local control. If

output

of

according to

M4,

lnterrupt

of No

mode is

the same

M5. Interrupt

as
addressed to talk,
line

LOW after

each
HIGH when the
progamming

3-1

21. M6, Interrupt

ming

of No

mode is

3-122.

the

same
add;essed
line

LOW
HIGH
programming

data

Output

the same

MT,lnterrupt

as

M3

to

talk,

after

each

after

output

data is

talk.

If not addressed

output or

its listen

to

talk,

addres

After output of the reading data, a

by reprogramming the 34904 or

reprogramming occurs

the

reading

the new programming

Multiple with No

Output

overrides

M0.

as

Multiple with

Ml

it

except

will

reading

that if the 3490A

pull

the

is taken. This

reading is

is

received.

Single with No

overrides that

new reading

daIa, a

data.

that of Interrupt, so

Output.

Service

outputted

See

Request

or when

Paragraph 3-l

Output.

Interrupt, so this

of

will be

Output.

This mode

is not

(SRQ)

line is taken

16.

Program-

as M2_

Single with

except

it

will

reading

of the

received.

that if the

pull

the

is taken.

reading

See

Output.

Service Request

Paragraph 3-l

This mode is

3490A

is
(SRQ)

This line is taken

data or when new

18.

is busy

349OA

not

will

accept

349OA has accepted

processing

and is
data

Diagram,3490A

the

it

to

Pro-

new

not

Program
from controller

and

data

34904 will
aocept new
data

3490A finished
processing

Addressed to Listen.

3-123. Repeating
to output the same
accomplished
and outputting the

"T3E".

with
many times

new

ates a

3-124.
dressed

reading.

Addressed

to

the 34904

.-by addressing

character­handshak'e
the

3490A is

an Output. The

reading more than

programming

by

reading. Then reprogram

The 3490A

as

desired.

Programming

to Talk. The 3490A

talk by setting

talk

address.

any other

. Figure

lines

when a printer

addressed

unit to

3-9 is a timing

to talk.

can output the

MRE

It

3-125. Output Control. Two

possible,

are

the 3490A. If

Addressed

inhibit

will

depending on

normal

output

Single, Table 3-7) is programmed,

triggers

after

each

already addressed to talk. Ifnot
wait for
listen

programmed

will

recogrition

will

its

address to

issue

a

inhibit

talk

address before outputting

be reprogrammed. If Interrupt

and the 34904

Service Request

by the controller. If it is

triggers

after

each reading

output data.

3-1

26. Output

properly

put

Format.

into

an ontput

After

data

3490A
busy

data

3490A can be

the

once. This

3490A

same reading

with

with

the

"TlE"

may

can

"M3E"

3490A

be

LOW and transmitting

may be

the

unaddressed

talk,

or

diagram

is

addressed to

general

modes of

by

to talk

sending

for

data and

listen

output

remote programming

(Addressed

Multiple

the 3490A

reading and

output data if

addressed to talk, it

data, or for its

output

is not addressed to talk,

each

after

reading and

addressed to talk,

proceed to

and

the

3490A

mode, the

has

data

will be

made

be

as

initi-

ad-

the

and

of
or

will

is
it

await

it

been

3-l I

Section

III

MRE

Data Lines

LDAV

HRFD

Printer and 3490A
will accept

data

390A and
will not

accept data

printer

349OA
printer

accept

and
will

data

3490A

not

will

printer

and

accept data

Model

Printer

will not

accept data

3490A

outputted

in the

NDCfXXXXXXE-Y).

Code Alpha*

Status

N Normal
OL Overload

R

Ratio Mode

S Sample/Hold Mode

RS

Ratio

Function

AC

Code*

AC Volts
DC DC Volts
KO Kilohms
T Test

*Status

character is required,
output

and Function

format

will always

Polarity

+

-

Positive
Negative

Data

xX)c()ü

E

Six digits,
Exponent

Polarity

Y
CR

LF

Exponent (Range
Carriage

Line Feed

Printer

and

processing

34904

data

Figure 3-9. Timing

following

format:

(Example

Operation

and Sample/Hold Mode

are two-character codes. lf

a

blank space will

be the same

Input

or Positive

Input

or Negative

be

length.

left

most significant

Identifier

of Exponent

Digit)

Return

so

Ratio

Ratio

34904
finished
processing

listing:

only one

that

the total

digit first

printer

and

data

34904
processing

Diagram,3490A

3-127.
questing
polling
operation
M7)
talk,
after each

3-128.
Multiple
both the
3490A
030,
SRQ LOW, when
will transmit the ASCII character

enth bit

service. The
concerning the status. After
Dsable
0ll
it is still

will
unaddressed to talk before
will keep the

to output or its listen address

will set SRQ

3-129. lf the 34904

receives
reading is completed,
x0xxxxxx. The

did not request

significance conceming status. This code

"0")

other

and

printer

and

data

Addressed to

Service

Talk.

Request.

service on the

for identification

specifies interrupt with output

which

programmed

is

pull

it will

the

reading.

For serial

Response

Poll

Status

talk address.

binary code

being a

"l "

other

(SPD)

command

the 3490A will output

001),
addressed

return

the

Service

SRQ

HIGH

the

command and

SPE

seventh bit being a

is

it

transmitted if the

also

of operation

modes

receives

the

Printer

and

finished

processing

34904

data

3490A

The

and responding

bus

status.

and

capable

is

If

either

to
mode of

(M5

34904 is

and

Service

polling, the controller must

Enable

(MRE)

Enable

The

SPE

011 000.

00

it

receives SPE

not programmed

Request

(LSRQ)

line

pull

line LOW and send

(SPE)

command and the

command is octal code

If the 3490A has

and its

talk

address

xlxxxxxx. The sev-

signifies that the 3490A did request

bits do not convey any

it

receives

(octal

031, binary code

code

the reading

to talk. After outputting

Request line

the

line LOW and

command is sent, it

SPD

wait

to

be

information

the

Status

data,

the

data,

to

for

HIGH.

its

If

talk addres

reprogrammed. It

if it is reprogrammed.

is in operating mode

its talk

it will

respond with

service,

the other bits

and

address before a

"0"

indicates that it

M5 or

the

M7

character

have

(seventh

(M0,

command and

SPE

3490A is

Ut, M2,M3, M4, or M6)

in any of

its talk

address.

of re-

serial

or
to

LOW

the

pulled

it

Poll

00

since

it

it is

and

no

bit

the

J-t -

Model3490A

Section III

3-130.
addressed
not
data

3-131.

3-132.
Model
must
have
the

lO63lAlBlC,
9820A.

3-133.

trol and

In the M3 Mode
provides

it outputs

following
this
If
calculator, substitute
STORE in the

If

but

talk

to

status

transmit

if

be
the

proper ROM

Function DC Volts
Range
Trigger

Mode

proces

you

a

programmed

0perating

GPIB

following

The

both

9820A

as

equipped

Peripheral

This

programs the following:

an internal trigger

program

do

with

block

needed to connect

is

program

l0
Immediate Internal
Addressed

this

data.

is repeated

not

wish

following

and Tl Trigger

steps to

3490A

the

requested

has

not sent

code

output

for

example uses

controller

Control

places

V

until the

the EXECUTE

the SPE command, it

but will output

(Ml,

ExamPle.

the lll44a

II

ROM

slot.

An Interface

the 3940A in

Single with

to

take one

It

then

is

take
to store
sequence:

service

the

M3, M5,

a Hewlett-Packard

printer.

and

Interface,

the

Source the 3490A
instructed

another

stop

this program

or M7).

The

installed

Block

Cable,

3490A to

remote

Output

reading,

reading,

button is

key in

and is

will

reading

98204

and

must

-hp­the

con-

and then

by

the

and

pressed.

in the

place

@o@@üo

f-R-\

0

(r

ooü

f-E\

in

of

@üoü@

STORE

=

6

3490A

listen

=

U

9820A

This

sequence
Immediate
Output.

@o@@

O13@O

address;

talk

address.

programs

Internal

3490A

trigger,

and

Addressed

to

DC,

10V

Signal with

üo

r-'\

rrui

range,

EXECUTE

Initializes

@o@o@o

calculator.

'5

V = 349OA
Programs
9820A

@o@o

Sets

LREN

LOW

on

bus.

r?. rfi

\coMMANO/ \ I

\--l

["]{

LJ\-

STORE

IFIXEDNI[1J

@o@o

STORE

OrPR'Nrr@[

=

9820A listen

to print.

lersl

sy

Irl

address;

talk

address.

the

34904

to

output

data

and

o@@üo

oaoo@

STORE

r;l

programs

Addresses
control.

REM

3490A

to

annunciator

listen.

should

3490A

be

should

ON.

so

to

remote

Programs
seqeunce

3490A

to

2

output

to take

new

another
data.

reading

and

return

3-1

to

3

Section

Ends

To run this

III

calculator

program.

program, press

STORE

3-135.

Suppression
programming
tors

without
Return
the
as two
LF
the
suppressed

(CR)

calculator

programming

may

be suppressed

end of

by

9820

example:

the instructions.

of CR

instructions

using

the

and

Line Feed

must be

sending a semicolon.

and LF. When

from the 9800

CMD statement,

(LF)

suppressed. If

characters

in

the

by

9820 by

In

the

Model 3490A

outputting

series

the

normally

not, they

the

9830,

output

3490A.

transmitting,Z

they

calcula-

Carriage

by

are seen

CR and

at

may

be

To halt

To

3-134.
programming
programming
operating
tions.
and
Because
the
then
make

programming
either
whichever
progammed
statement
would
There

change
For

reprogram
For example:

-1-ll

program, press

program

list

Special Trigger

information

according

The

instructions

do not

E when

transmit

a reading.

are two

a.

After

example:

b. First program

require

of this,

the programming

instructions,

when

MRE goes

occurs

with

CMD"?U6","E"

take

two

ways

sending

the

listen

"?U6'"

CMD

öMD,..E,,,

it

for

CMD
tional

"?u6",

c\tD

-

sroP

I

L-J

(print

out stored program),

END

I
\/

the

3490A,

one programming

the

E

However,

first.

"M3Tl.

readings

to

the

and,talk

..?5'\P,

the

a trigger

"?U6",

in

this

Ltsr

ll

Programming

the E

and

to

the new programming

stored

are

the E

when

it is

if

the 34904

LOW

Consequently,

.

instead

prevent

programming

addresses

"F3R7M3T1''

34904

when

"F3M3R7T3E',

statement)

..TlE",,.?5V"

l

Technique.

indicates

allows

the 3490A

as they

in order to

technique

instructions

desired that

the

E is not

will take

or when

if
. ." initially,
was

used, the

of one

as

this:

instructions,

until

for

no trigger,

a

reading

press

When

the end

to

instruc-

are received

be accepted.

is

to

are sent,

the

3490A

sent

with

a readin!"

an E is sent,

the

3490A

and then

instrument

programmed.

d.on,t

the

E is sent.

and then

is to

be

made.

(The

E

is

start

omit

and

the

was

the

op-

"?U6";FMT

CMD

9830 example:

10

20

3Q

"?U6''

CMD
OUTPUT
FORMAT

3-136. Controlby

3-137.
grammed
the
marked
binary

of

card.
representing
marked
clear

LOW,
3-138.

reliable

.j

whilö it
allowtid
card
making
sampling.

The 34gOA

by using

-hp-

Model

3260A

card programming

code

shown

Use a soft

(unaddressed).

and should

1. The

reader

a. Before
Rate
trigger
pleted,
from
Then

necessary,

HOLD

b.
HOLD position
mode

the

3490A
rate, and the
effect.
conditions,
OFF
to local (front

"l"

a

whenever

The

following

programming.

3490A
is making
to

sample, programming

will be

a reading.

programming,

control to

mode.

change

the

HOLD

if

a subsequent

the

Sampie

position

Set

the

T1 , Immediate

will continue

front

In

order to

the

and back

panel)

be used

Instead,

ON

"M3R7FQE",Z;WRT

(13,

..M3R7F@E";

30)

B

Marked

a Marked

in the

the

a

Two

the

the

position

again

3490A

and program

3490A

Card Programmer.

with

Option 030

Card Programmer

or

Model

9860A. An

is shown in

in

Table 3-7

black pencil

code. The

3490A

"200"

The

only for

instructions

cannot

reading. Therefoie,

ignored

methods

HOLD position.

Sample Rate

change

Rate

before

Sample Rate

Internal

panel

reprogram

Une switch

again. This

control.

is used in

is addressed

bit

receive programming

the

by

may

set the

after programming

to the

in the

control must

programming.

the

Trigger.

to

sample

control

the 34904

returns the

maj, be pro-

example

Figure

3-10.

marking

to

mark

"200"

pulls

addressing.

must

instructions

desired sample

3490A

setting

each space

space

to listen

the

MRE line

be observed

if

tn.

:+gOR

from
3490A
be used

3490A program

while

to control

3490A

Do not program

control

at

should

manually

be

set to the

control

for trigger

In

this

the

maximum

will

under these

be tumed

instrument

13

such

The

the

must

for

data

the

it is

Sample

is com-

rate.

to the

mode,

have no

as

of

be

or

i,

is

Model

3490A

Section

III

2. The
lowing
space
3490A

programming
blank,

3-139.

3-140.

3-141.
operation

3-14,
Sample/Hold
Sample/Hold
the
SampleiHold
for

measurement

integrating

completes

3-142.
Track/Hold
Sample/Hold
lnput
full-range
begins.

3-143.
command,
Ior

measurement
when
retention

line

the last

marked)

to be

the character

SAMPLE/H0LD
040

or 045).

Definition

Track/Hold.

in

begins

34904

capacitor

a

measurement,

Acquire/Hold.

mode

and

step

Hold

the

the

Hold

period.

3.7

TABLE

SEE

BLANK LINE+

on the

line

should

in the programming

character

in

on

which

marked

MRE is pulled

be left

is

sent. If

that line

MEASUREMENTS

Sample/Hold

of

This

term
which the
within

Trigger

amplifiers

DC

Input

Trigger

the

in

trigger

Sample/Hold

input

Mode.

Sample/Hold

command

the

"Hold"

400

nanoseconds

command.

follow,
Amplifier.

command,

voltage

at that

the

This

that

precise

a

path.

This

amplifiers

voltage

Following

the

voltage

Sample/Hold

present

mode

AmplifierJ

was

rffi'slisli

349OA

lrrruE

NO. )tEr

I

iLEAR

3

I
9

to

M t5

ll

l?

E

13

Figure 3-10.

card immediately

blank.

This enables

routine

this

will be ignored.

Terms

describes

mode

after receipt

Prior

to

or track, the

Upon

the

amplifiers

on the

time.

.track,'mode

After

differs

delay is

delay

to

before

present

the

a

Sample/Hold

at Amplifier

received.

amplifiers

co0E

27-l

2C.C,

T ,21

06l

F toG

6 0,60

R t22

4

o64

I

06t

to5

LOW

before the

line is

the

mode

paragraph

(see

this time,

output

receipf

Amplifier

the
resumes.

from

added

allows

the DC

respond

Äold

A

and B retain

During this

are said to

zoo rool40

r

lfl

EE

C:I

Etrf

EI

--

EI
EE
E=I
EE

Example

fol-

(,,200-

the

first

not

left

(0ption

of

oi a

the

of

of

a

..hold"

A

3490A

the

in the

to

a

mode

Trigger

A

r.l.i...l*jiiä='8ffifr

PRoonnvr

zo

rol

+ z

Ei!

-l- -l-

of Marked

r rir

r

r alr

-I

E

El

=!n

r r

E

-rtrlitrfIfl

r

tlcf

-}EE

F

EIE

r EIt:]

r

c:lr

.EI
E:] ff
IT:I

UIUUU

--

programming.

Card

be in

the

Hold

the

Hold

mode

portion

3-1u14.
ment,
input
a subsequent
dition

3-145.
between
the

.place

3-146.
required
to

3-147.

Acquire/Hold

Sample/Hoid

time

3-148.
led
a
for

least

command

certain

"Sample/Hold

manua.l,
trigger

of the

Track

the

voltage

is

referred

Aperture

receipt

time

at

Amplifier

Maximum

for the

respond

Delay.

to include

Sample/Hold

command

Hold

mode.

a minimum

600ps

will initiate

conditions

referring

signal.

Sample/Hold

to

prior

],'ir

I

r

r
c=

r

E

c=

trf r

E [f

E r:

I

mode.

These

during

measurement

Mode.

After

amplifiers

until

they

are

Sample/Hold

to

as the

Time. This

of a

Sample/Hold

which the

A

DC

a full-range

This

operation,

trigger

the

to

the

The sigral

of 30

Trigger"

Sample/Hold

in

the

Hold

Acquisition

Input

step

term,

refers

path

acquisition

Trigger

Sample/Hold

nanoseconds.

to going

3490A

a

(see

Paragraph

is

either

to

amplifiers

the

run-down,

cycle.

completion

placed

Trigger

Track

is

mode.

Time.

and

input

as

used

to the

which

time.

(TTL).

go

must

LOW.

measurement

used

as

a dc coupled

are

also placed
or

of

follow,

in

command.

mode.

defined

Trigger

Sample/Hold

voltage.

in

extends

circuits

from

It

(See

general

a

or

the

Hold

as the period
command

switching

This

is the

connection

delay

added

the

This is

the

which

HIGH to

must go

Figure

3-165).

term

or

2-l l.)
only

ac

discharge,

a

measure_

track,

mode

This

con_

and

circuits

time

amplifiers

with

in

the

aperture

coup

dc

initiates

LOW

HIGH

This

under

The term

this

in

coupled

in

the

by

at

3-l

5

Section III

Model34904

3-149.
mand
command
pulse
between

least 2 ps prior

3-150.
a
A command
Amplifier
Sample/Hold

3-151. External
3490A
set to HOLD.
for

3-152. Special

Sample/Hold

has the

same

(TTL).

This signal

at least 30 nanoseconds

2Y and 200

to the negative transition.

Hold

Command.

Sample/Hold

amplifier,

switches

B. Both commands

logic

circuits.

Encode.

measurement

This

signal

a minimum

of

240

S/H 0perating

3-153. Display. When
the Track/Hold
the

display is

full

digits

of the

uncertainty
However,
Output

output

(BCD)

data
be restored
connection
assembly.
connected
bly,

Al,

and

Test

Point
Circuit
display

3-154.

Assembly

cable

.1 V
acy is not
output

amount

of

rapid
the
of

3-155.

of

of wideband

the

amplifier

response

Hold

the noise-

Autoranging.
readings (initiated
Consequently,

or

normally

plus

the

if the

instrument

Option

includes

to

the

of

the

For

a

to Test

for a 5

M.

These

connector.

Range.

specified

the Input

and

time

mode

to

the

Acquire/Hold

overrange

display

white/black
4 - digit
Point

-

just

for the

of the

occur

internally)

final

AC Trigger. This

effect

as the

Sample/Hold

must

wide

V.

The signal

This

is

an intemal

resulting

Amplifier

in

A and

are generated

This command

when the

Sample Rate

must

be

from HIGH

ps.

Gonsiderations.

the 3490A

blanked,

in

the

021 or the

the

fifth

L on the

digit

display, it

test points

to

the rear

Sample/Hold

.l V range.

amplifier

noise

due to the

the

amplifier

Sample/Hold

anywhere

Autoranging

reading

is

mode, the

leaving

"1".

This

fifth

digit

is

equipped

GPIB

digit.

if

desired

wire

S/H display,

Main

should

are

located

of P2,

measurement

contains

gain

rvithin

requires

when

loses

coupled

ac

com-

Trigger

be a negative-going

with

an

amplitude

must

a Hold

Hold

be static

command

mode.

B switches

at

to

Hold

in the

initiates

control

operating in

fifth

a

display of 4

is

done
due to
with the

Option

The

by

030, the

fifth

digit can

changing

from the

this

Circuit

is

to

LOW

either

digit in

because

noise.

Data

the

display

wire

is

Assem-

a

be moved to

on the

Main

which is

the

-._"

accur-

this

On

range,

the

an appreciable

broad

bandwidth

of

X100. The

circuits

the

allows

envelope

successive

changing

its time

ranges.

relation-

ship to
Sample/Hold

3-156. Guard

3-157.
to
measurements,
by a low-impedance

3-158.

3-1 59.The
certain
input
degrades
of

voltage

measure the voltage.
Amplifier
Amplifiers

measured can

to

input voltage

The
ability
ramp
for a ramp
sine
input signal
digitization

3-160. Sample/Hold Trigger

3-161.
initiate a
(TTL)
course,
is
signal.
Trigger

Paragraph

the extemal

information.

Connection

The

Guard terminal

the

Low input

unless

Input

Signal Limitations.

analog-to-digital

amount of time,

to the A-to-D

the

accuracy of the

Sample/Hold

at a specific

maintain tracking

2.5

%rangelps

5 % of

rate of change

of

or sine

wave

Either

is

is ac coupled.

used

as
tn

does not initiate

is to

and the

restrict the

change. The

is within the

rmgelps on the I

the

instrument

wave.

the

and

to

be measured

is

also limited to

of 50 V/ss.

of two signal

Hold mode. The

coupled,

dc

general

a

some option

3-165).

trigger

and

in

Sample/Hold Meaurements.

should

terminal

when making

guard

the

and low-noise

conversion process

and any change in the

conversion

"fresze",

point

The

response time

rate at which the

Sample/Hold circuits

only if the

follo,wing limits:

on the

l0 V and 1000

input

in

voltage

with

Table 3-8

maximum

within the

Signal

Sample/Hold Trigger

and the AC

The

term

term

in this

combinations,

a 3490A measurement

therefore

always be

is

not

connected

useful

Sample/Hold

can be

properly

driven

source.

requires

voltage

circuits during this

time

measurement. The purpose

or hold, a changing

time

in

bandwidth

of

the

and

of the Input

Sample/Hold

voltage to

input

accurately

be

are able

rate of change

of the

V ranges.

V and 100 V

SampleiHold

shows the

frequency

a maximum

ranges.

(dv/dt)

to

maximum

for

accruacy

dV/dt

affects the

digitize

dV/dt

a full-range

given.

The

during

Requirements.

inputs

may

Trigger

"Sample/Hold

manual to

refer to either

a

Sample/Hold

be used

input

input,

Trigger"

to

of

(see

a

a

-1-l o

Acc|Jracy*

(%

of

Rangef

.01

1%

1%

*Accuracy

%

specifications

Ramp

30 v/s

300

3000

Table

v/s

v/s

are

3-8. Ability

Sine Wave

Crossing)

lZero

5Hz

Hz

5O

5O0 Hz

to

be added

of

Sample/Hotd

10v

(%

to

of range)

Sine Wave

(Peak

Reading)

75O

275O

Hz

75OO

dc specification.

to

Hz
Hz

Digitize

BANGE

1 V,

100

Ramp

12.5

125 V/S

1250 V/S

a Ramp

or

V,

V

v

1000

(Zero

lS 2Hz

Sine Wave.

Sine Waw

Crossing)

20 Hz

2OO Hz

Sine Wave

Reading)

{Peak

3OO Hz

90O

3ü)O Hz

Hz

Model3490A

Section III

3-162.
TTL

(>+

Sample/Hold

circuits

logic

to

V)

2.4

nanoseconds

HIGH

be

must

external

The

I mA

3-163.
pulse
amplitude
stable

at

AC

at

for

(+

0.4

Trigger.

least

initiates

at

Trigger

requires

LOW

order

in

at

for

triggering

(TTL).

this

((+

0.4

initiate a Hold mode. The signal

to

600

least
circuit must be capable of

V.

leading

The

nanoseconds wide and 2 V

30

Hold mode. The sigral

a

ps

2

least

before

Compatibility with

signal

go

V)

for a minimum of

ps prior

edge of a negative-going

the negative-going transi-

tion.

3-164.

nections.
precautions
of
cross
input
be
spurious
in

Termination

When

are

the

SampleiHold

talk within

connector. Only one of the two trigger inputs

used at any

triggering

two ways:

one of

l. The unused

no wire in

the

of Unused

operating in a

necessary

to prevent

circuits,

an external cable

one time in

the

at

other input may

input

may

cable connected to this

Trigger

S/H

Sample/Hold

unwanted triggering

which can be caused by

attached

given

a

left open; that is,

be

connector.

The unused input

2.
end of
coupled)
level
connected to

3-165.

3-166.

the cable.

input

line should be connected to

()+

2.4V). The AC
a LOW logic level

Initiating

The

Sample/Hold option is

The TTL

a

Sample/Hold

different configurations
of initiating
is

aväilable with the

(Either
Option

020.)
Purpose
con{iguration,
without
remote control,
in

Option

ods

of initiating

the

various

externally

3-167.
040

with
Rate
Sample/Hold
ment

sample

the
operation provides
possible
point in the

a

Sample/Hold

Data

Output

022 or

both

Sample/Hold is

Interface

Sample/Hold

any

of the other

except

045. The
a measurement in instruments having

options.

triggering

Internal

control

Sample Control, Option

Option

020.

is set

Trigger

will

automatically

rate selected.

to

s1'nchronize

input

signal.

BCD/Remote Expand

may

Bus I/O

following

Table 3-9 lists the methods of

a

Sample/Hold measurement.

to

command is

only

may be

which

Option

also

Sample/Hold

When the

any

hold and read

random sampling, since it is not

the

terminated

Sample/Hold

Trigger

input line

(<+

0.4 V).

Measurement.

available

employ

measurement.

021

or Remote Control

installed

be

also

available

Option 030.

is

options.

position

However,

measurement to

with the General

available as Option 045,

No data

Trigger, is

paragraphs

iront
except Hold and

applied,

the input signal

be from HIGH

30

going

to

LOW.

sinking

to 200 V in

must be

Input

Con-

mode, some

to the trigger

will

situation,

be

and

prevented

with

pin

at

Trigger

a HIGH

the

on

the other

(dc

logic

should be

in three

various methods

SampleiHold

Option 020.
with Option

In the

third

output

or

available

discuss

045

panel

meth-

and Option

Sample

no

the instru-

at

this

method of

specific

any

Table

3-9.

Initiating

Measurements

S/H

External Triggering.

Sample/Hold

Option

o40 o20

040

045

3-168.
tion
programmed
instrument

Internal

030. The 3490A
for internal

will automatically
signal at the
internal sample
since the
specific point

measurement is not

in the

3-169. External

is present

Hold
Remote
designated
Hold

Expand

as

Option

Trigger command

Other Options
in

the

34904

030

neither

020

or O30

Sample

Control,

with

the

sample control.

sample

rate

control provides

input signal.

Triggering,

in

Option

Option

an instrument

020 or GPIB

In this

045.
automatically

Measurement

Initiated

Separate

Sample/Hold

Sample/Hold

External
command
Pulse

Output connected

to External

Option 040

GPIB

Option 030 may

hold

and read the input

selected.

only random sampling,

synchronized

045.
with neither

Option

case, either

surement.
3-170. External

020. With this
measurement
two

ways. For either

circuits

must be in
Rate control
instrument
face

Hold line may be

initiating

'separate

to initiate

,"

signal inputs,

command
may be

applied at the same time,
command
Sample/Hold
Stretched Pulse
circuits

(J7
External Encode
This

connection provides

initiate

a

Triggering,

combination

may be initiated

the

must be in the Hold

Remote

has

Option 040

options,

of

by

method, the

"Hold"

state.

Control Option

external triggering in

34904

That

position,

held LOW. One method

a

Sample/Hold measurement requires

a Sample/Hold Trigger command

a Hold mode,

to initiate

may be

a measurement. Both commands

applied up to ll2 second after the

Trigger. In

Output from the

pin

10) is

input

connected externally to the

(J6

an

measurement immediately

an External

and

the

or

the second method, the

Sample/Hold

pin

46 or

J7 pin

External Encode signal to

upon receipt of
Sample/Hold Trigger command. Neither signal
any effect
If a
External
will
terminated
by setting the

3-171. External

030.

if

applied while a measurement is in

Sample/Hold Trigger command is

Encode

be locked in the Hold

command,

by applying

the Sample/Hold

mode. This condition can

External

an

Encode command or

Sample/Hold switch to

When

Triggering,

operating

Option

Sample/Hold with General

given

Off.

040

by

By:

Encode

or

Stretched

Encode input.

Trigger

Trigger

with Op-

be

If so, the

Operating with

to

any

When

Sample/

BCD

it is

030,

Sample/

initiates

a mea-

with Option

a

Sample/Hold

measurement

is, the

Sample

if the

or

the lnter-

022,

of

two

Encode

External Encode

trigger

24 or

28).

will have

progress.

without an

circuits

be

with Option

Pur-

a

3-t7

Section III

pose

Interface
programmed
External

Trigger
measurement
Trigger

inputs
initiate

command.

at Jll

a

measurement

Bus

for Next

is

the

provides
initiated.

3-172. Acquisition
by the

DC Input

to

an input

shown in Table

and

voltage

3-10.
into consideration
incorporated
acquisition
quired

accuracy

Table

time.

for the

to a

3-10.

into

amplifiers

step

Maximum
Time

Range

1V

10v

100

v

1000

v

.1

V range

is

controi,

External

programmed,

GPIB

circuits

Either

an

at

Time.

of
External
the

The

Sample/Hold

varies

with

The

acquisition

in

Track/Hold

Acquire/Hold

Figure

3-l
to

input

voltage.

Acquisition

for

Full-Range

Settling

0.01

% of

NOTE

not

specified

the

Trigger

upon

wait

the

Sample/Hold

Trigger

same

time

maximum

Amplifiers

the

operation.

operation

I

shows

respond

Time

to

Final

512

tts

ps

128

ps

512

ps

128

paragraph

(see

3490A

(T2).

should

When

completion

for

an

command

a Hold

time

to

range

selected.

time-must

The

includes

typical

within

a specified

(Settingl

Step Input.

Within
Vatue

3-1541.

Next

of

External

Trigger

mode is

required

respond

be taien

delay

thl

times

be

to

as

re_

Model3490A

3-173.

a

3-174.

Hold

delay

f:

l-2.
lag presents
changing,
be
Track/Hold
ally

Sample/Hold
of
command

in

repetitive

Figure

and

mined

necessary

cycles
ment
convenient,
dv/dt
3{

3-175.
waveform
Track/Hold

Using

the Track/Hold

Digitizing

amplifier

which

On ir

When

circuits

is

approximately

the

3

dB

measuring

no problem.

as a

ramp

considered

in

measurements,

the

input

voltage

Trigger

measurement,

b-y

Figure

a length

3-12

as the

stable

3-1

2. The

the

Sample/Hold

by some

as

may

means,

that

measurements

might

be

be made

if

the

limitations

must

be observed.

Reoonstructing

may

measurements

a

Ramp. The

lags

bandwidth

a stable

However,

input

interpreting

at a point

command

then,

effectively

of time

analog

ramp

may

delay

between

Trigger

such

inferred

on every

waveform

shown

in

an Input

be

reconstructed

Mode.

output

the 3490|input

equal

to

frequency
dc input

for

example,

the

equal

dähy.

be

must

as

an interval

be made

from Figure

2nd,

is

paragraph

by using the

voltage,

if the

the

34gOA
voltage
previous

was

received.

precedes

to

the

Digitization

done

as

the

start

be

accurately

3rd

stable.

3-l5g

Waveform.

from

second

of the

yoltage

" " I ,

L 13dB
shown

this

input

voltage

thii

delay

reading.

reading

to

the

The

the

delay,

illustrated

of

the

timer.

on

successive

3-12.

Measure-

or

nth

The

maximum
and

An input

a

series

equation

Sample/

by

where

in

Table

time

must

In

is

actu_

time

the

point
trigger
shown

of

in

ramp

detei_

It

is not

cycle

as

Table

of

a

is

a

=

t!

UJ
a

E

J

J
tt

tJ-

a

=

uJ
F

at,
lrJ

o

F
J

F

uJ
(9

z
tr

J

200
100

to

1.0

0.1

6.6t

^

u.l

,,rs 1.0ps

TYPICAL

TIME

IOps

REOUIRED

Figure

TO

SETTLL

3-1

IOOps

1.

Typicat

1

V

RANGE

TO O.OT

Response

lms

X

.z

uJ

t-

=

o-

.lLl

o
=

o-

LIJ
F

.tt
Ll,

(9
F.

J

o

F
f,

=

tJ.

o

n

(r

J
J

f
IL

öR

0.o1

to a

200

100

10

1.0

0.1

0.1

Step Input

lrs

1.0

TYPICAL

rrs

TIME

REOUIRED

Voltage.

10,/s

100

TO

SETTLETO

rc

1

%

Model3490A

Section III

VOLTAGE

TNPUT

TIME

A
T
V
S

S/H

OF

=

ANALOG DELAY

=

SAMPLE/HOLD

=

VOLTAGE

=

SLOPE, SEE

AT

TRIGGER,

t

/l

/l

TRIGGER

MEASURED

PARAGRAPH

VOLTAGE ACTUALLY
MEASURED.

(TRACK/HOLD

FOR

3-12

MODE)

MAXIMUM

PERMISSIBLE.

SLOPE

I
I
I
I

Ar

shown
cteristics"

Table

in

heading. The

l-2

surement points,
structed waveform

3-176.
when-digitizing
measurement
dV/dt
Table
reconstructed
mation

3-177.
loscope.
delayed gate
Sample/Hold
For
accurately,

as
Delay
output

Tdry:.

oscilloscope

3-l

a.

the

60.

b.

Digitizing

and

frequency

3{

must

as

discussed

Ramp

An

example,

as in

Choose

{rp-

Model

Generator

from

input

Connect

to

a ramp

of

from

Linearity

oscilloscope

output

measurements

linearity

the

an

plug-in

the

signal

the

the

under the

shorter the time

greater

the

the

will be.

a

Sine Wave.

@aragraph

a sine

wave. Keep in mind that

given

limits

be

observed.

the

Track/Hold

in Paragraph

Measurement

with

can

be very

of a repetitive

of a

following

oscilloscope

l80C

with

unit.

oscilloscope

requirements

Delayed

S/H

AC

Trigger

Figure

"Time

Response

Chara-

between mea-

accuracy of the

The rules that

3-174)

in Paragraph 3-158

The waveform

recon-

apply

also apply to

and

may

measurement infor-

3-175.

Aided by an Oscil-

delayed sweep and

helpful in making

waveform.

ramp can be measured

procedure.

with

delayed

the l82lA

Be

sure the

meets the

given

sweep, such

Base/

Time

Delayed Gate

Sample/Hold

päragraph

in

Gate output from the

input. lf the 3490A

3-1 2. Digitizing

has Option
Pulse

graph

outputs

the

as the
time

be

the 3490A
slope of the
Paragraph 3-158
main sweep

a

measurement
the
ramp.

number
ramp, as shown

ment
linearity.

be compared

a

Ramp.

installed,

020

connect the
Output to the External Encode
3-170).

c.

Connect

both the Main Gate

from the oscilloscope to

-hp-Model5300Al53O2A)

accurately.

d. Connect

e.

Set

delayed-sweep

Position

f.

the ramp sigral to

input

and the oscilloscope

ramp must

and

the

at

beginning of the

the

SampleiHold control to

then be

will

be

Table 3-8. Trigger

triggered

intensified trace

the

delayed-sweep intensified

within the

of sampling points (at

in Figure 3-13.

g.

The slope

points

ln

the

of

ramp

between various measure-

can then be compared to

Figure

3-13,

for example, slope AB should

to slope BC

as follows:

S/H

Stretched

(see

input

and Delayed
an interval timer
to

determine the

be measured

vertical

input.

limits

the

oscilloscope

given

ramp.

TrackiHold. The

the point

at

appears along

trace at

least

three)

along

determine

Para-

Gate

(such
delay

to both

The

in

where

the

any

the

3-r9

Section III

Model3490A

Slope AB

Slope

Non-Linearity

%

,"1

A

",1

A

3-13.

Figure

&178. Filter
loscope.

plished

oscilloscope,
counter.
ofa

as the
Delay
be either
channel
and
output
Trigger
3-1

Measurement

by the

The

filter.

a.

Choose

-hp-

Generator plug-in

single- or

feature permits

output

from the

input

60.

vs-ve

-

=

Ts-Ta

-vs

Vc

-

=

BC

Tc-Ts

Slope

=

Slope

Delayed-Sweep

Using

LinearitY

RamP

Response Measurement

of filter

use of Sample/Hold,
a square
following procedure

Model l80C

at the

wave

an oscilloscope with

dual-channel. However, the

same time. Be
oscilloscope meets the

signal

requirements

Measurements.

response may be accom-

generator,

the 1821A

with

unit. The

display of both the

-

BC

Oscilloscope

Aided by

and a time interv-al

tests the

delayed

vertical

sure

given

AB

Slope

AB

DELAYED SWEEP
GATE OUTPUT

a

delayed-sweep

response

sweep,

Time

plug-in

filter

the

Delayed

Sample/Hold

in Paragraph

100

x

in

an Oscil-

tiniö

such

Base/

may

dual-

input

Gate

b. Connect
oscilloscope to
has

Option

Pulse

Output

graph

3-170).

c. Connect both the Main
outputs from the oscilloscope

-hp-

as

the

the time delay accurately.

d. Connect a square wave
Model 33llA Function
input and

output to l0 V at
one half of the square wave is

response

300
3-14.

Track/Hold operation.

to

scope is used, also connect the hlter output to the

oscilloscope input.

ward the right side of one
determine

3490A reading
final value
displays
intensified
to observe

3-179.

3-180. Measuring a
Hold
input voltage because
mand
voltage step. The aperture time,

between
beginning of a Hold mode, is of sufficient length
include

is satisfactory

Hz

e.

Set the

3490A

the

f. Position the

g.

Shift

Using the Acquire/Hold Mode.

mode of operation

may be applied

the acquisition

the

Delayed Gate output from the

the

S/H AC Trigger

020 installed, connect the

to the Extemal Encode

Model

5300A15302A

Generator,

the

oscilloscope input.

a frequency such that the

time

the time required to settle

receipt

the

of

filter. For

3490A

to the
terminals.

input

delayed sweep intensified trace

the

final value of

the intensified

is

reduced

in

noted

trace may be

any

overshoot

Step

a

of

for the filter shown in Figure

l0

Connect

half of

the filter output.

trace toward the left

to within XVo or X mV of the

step f.

positioned

or ringing

Input

is

the

simultaneously

Sample/Hold

time,

input. If

Gate and

to an

Counter,

generator,

Set

greater

example, a frequency

V range, DC function

the

If

a dual-channel oscillo-

the square

The time interval counter

Voltage.

useful for measuring a step

Sample/Hold Trigger

shown

as

the 3490A

S/H Stretched

(see

input

Delayed

interval timer,

to

determine

such

to

both the

the square

than the expected

output of

to this

the

at

in the

with the input

which

Trigger

in Figure

the

as

duration of

the

wave

until the

value. The

other

filter oütput.

The

Acquire/

is

the

and the

Para-

Gate

such

filter

wave

filter

other

points

com-

delay

3-l 5.

-hp-

of

and

to-

and

to

_1-10

5o6mH

Figure

mH

5e6

3-14. Filter

Output

Measurement.

3490A

SAMPLE

/HOLD

W|TH

Model3490A

-

FULL

SCALE

SAMPLE/HOLD
TRIGGER

APERTURE
ACOUISITION

STEP INPUT

TIME

>

TIME

Figure 3-16. Ratio Input

reference

voltage

reference

voltage

between

may

3-188. lnput

may

be either a positive

0.1

V

1.2Y.

and

positive

be

or negative,

Connections

Connections.

or negative

the

On

l0 V

I

to

V

l2

Section

range,

V.

III

the

3-15. Measurement

Figure

The step
duration
Table 1-2.

3181.
used to measure
The

must

l-2. Triggering

leading

3-182.

3-183.
a

for
crystal
060 provides
tal
2-1.

$184.

3185.
the
following
wire"
REF
are connected
used
ments,

input

of the

Measuring

width of the

greater

be

edge

Using
050

The

50

Hz or

50

Hz
(Y2)

in

CYI)

RATIO

Instructions

Model

ratio

input

for

Ohms

these

voltage

of each input

50

or 060).

3490A

60

Hz

operation

in

the clock

for

the

clock

lf'leasurements

3490A,

paragaphs.

measurements

Low

intemally.

two

must

remain stable

Acquire/Hold

Pulse

Height.

the

height

of a

pulse (or
than the
may

Hz

has

power

60 Hz

one-half

aperture time shown

be applied

pulse.

or

Hz

60

the capability

source.

and consists

and AlR207

operation

and

AlR207

(0ption

for

making ratio

Option

terminal

measurements

functions

080,

DC-to-dc

can

be made; that is, the

and the

Because

are

mutually exclusive.

of a

aperature time

hcquire/Hold

pulse

coincident

Power

Option

of using

and

=

Input.

Step

for

at

shown

or square

of the

square

with the

Source

of operating

050 is

a 3.333 MHz

=

100 kSr.

uses

a 4 MHz crys-

84.5 kQ.

See Table

(Options

080).

measurements

are contained in the

and

ac-to-dc

INPUT

the same

and for Ratio

Low terminal

terminals

measure-

least

the

in

may

be

wave.

wave)

in

Table

from

available

Option

with

..three-

EXT

are

3-189.

voltage

3-190.

3-191.
the
reference
dc/dc
the
polarity,
3-ll).
displayed.
the

'upranging

lO%
voltage

The
should

Extemal

must

minals

Guard

Ratio Display.

Ifthe I

display

ratio

external

In

input

of

measurements.

Table

dc external

be

connected

Reference

be

at the same

are connected

to Input

reads

range is

measurements,

reference

and - if they

ac/dc

Any

range selected.

occurs

range.

External

Reference

I

Low.

V External

the

used, multiply the

measurements,

ratio

measurement

l2O

at

Overload indication

3-11.

Ratio Polarity

nput

+
+

+

reference

Low

potential;

intemally.

Reference

ratio

the polarity

and input voltages

are opposite in

If

of

%

nput

I

Signal

+

+

ac
ac

and unknown

as shown in

Input

and

these ter-

range

directly,

display by

symbol

polarity (see

no polarity

is limited

autoranging

rcnge

and downranging

is the

Display.

Displayed

Polarity

+

+
none
none

but if the 10

Fizure

Low

Connect

is selected,

is

are the

symbol
to l2O
is selected,

same

input

3-16.

0.1.

+

vshsn

same

Table

as

%

V

In

is

of

at
in

tu

$186.

3187.
lntemal
ence

range.

External

The

Reference

Beference

front

If

the

panel

or the

I V

Voltages.

Ratio

switch selects

I

V or l0

range

is

V External

selected, the

either the

Refer-

external

3-1 92. Ratio

a.

Set RATIO

range.

If the

external

Measrement

switch

Procedure.

to I V or

reference

l0 V EXT

voltage is between

REF

1.0

3-21

V

Section III

Model3490A

and' 1.2

V, the

I

V range

accuracy.

b.

Connect External

REF

terminals.

c.

Select DC or AC FUNCTION

input

signal to be

measured.

d. Set RANGE switch

e.

Connect input signal

and External Reference

should

Reference (dc

to

desired

(dc

or

ac). Input signal

Low must

be at same potential,

be used

only)

to

correspond

range

or to

greater

for

EXT

to

to

AUTO.

Low (<1

since these terminals

f. Read ratio

is

selected. If

display

by 0.1.

When
than

ing

on

display

10V EXT

operating in Autorange

full-rcale

V

110

or

uprange

connectedinternally.

are

directly

if I V

EXT

REF

REFrangeisselected,multipiy

NOTE

mode

with less
External
V),

the

Reference

reading

first

input

foiow-

will be incotect.

range

J-L-

Model

34904

Section

IV

INTBODUCTION.

4I.

section

This

42.
the

in

used
voltage,
circuits
measurements,
described.

more detailed

+3.

44.
integration technique for
in
to
discharged
reference
mined by
the
Digital Converter shown
Figare
3490A
through

45.

46.
Input Attenuator,

Converter
applied
the

47. Reference

4-8.
Amplifier

ac

needed

A

GENERAL

The Model

an integrator charges

which

a voltage

at a fixed

voltage.

the

sigral.

input

4-2. A description

contained

is

4-l 8.

Conditioning

Signal

The signal

circuits.

to the

measurement

One of

input

describes the

Model

voltage,

general theory

explanation of the circuits

3490A

and resistance

for ratio measurement,

remote

control,

THEORY

34904

proportional

The

discharge time,

The

integrator is part

in Figure

conditioning

the

The

DC

Amplifier

sequence.

Voltages.

three

reference

for

the

methods

Multimeter to

and

data

ofoperation

OF

OPERATION.

Multimeter

measurement

for

a fixed length

to the

input sigral,

rate

determined

measurement

which

in

the Basic

the

of

basic operation

4-2

Gircuits.

circuits include

AC

Converter,

output

ofone

for

the run-up portion

voltages

run-down portion

is applied to

THEORY

circuits

and

make

measurements.

sample-and-hold

output

are also

is

followed

used.

uses the

is

Block

and

ofthese

dual-slope

(see

Figure

of

and then is

by a known

display is

proportional

the

of

Analog-to-

Dagram in

Paragraphs

the

the

and

circuits is

the

4-1),

deter-

of

Ohms

of

SECTION

OF

dc

The

by a

time

to

the

4-5

DC

IV

OPERATION

measurement
by the

and/or the polarity

+9. DC Amplifier.

z1-10.
range input

measurement
the Analog-to-Digital
measurements,
Sample/Hold
Hold

4l 1. Analogto-Digital

412. The

consist

and,
positive
(near +
0

V) when
input
run-up
polarity,
is

derived
between
determines

413.

of

4-14. The

.

.qontrolled

influencöd

'"'

clock

DC
the

number
counters.

sequence.

Logic circuits

The

DC

on

except

circuits

output

is

Analog-to-Digital (A-to-D)

of

an

Zero

a

Detect Amplifier.

during

5

V)

during run-up

the

is negative,

and

HIGH

as well

from this

the

start

the numerical

according

of the input

Amplifier

any range in

Sample/Hold, this
Converter circuits.

the DC

applied to the

Integrator,

Amplifier

(see

run-up,

Integrator

the

A-to-D

at the zero

"end

as

output

ofrun-down

Logic.

timing

by

by the

is

a crystal-controlled

of timing

The

of

the logic

range

signals

sample

proper

The

output is l0

Figure

Converter.

followed

the

is

measurement"

of

value

the

circuits.

and function

are derived

rate is

reference

to the

signal.

any function.

output is

421),

A-to-D

Converter.

by a x20 Amplifier

If the Integrator

A-to-D output goes

and retums to

discharged to

output

point.

detect

signal. The

and

the zero

of the

measurement

This timing

selected.

oscillator,

controlled

is selected

function

Vdc

for

output goes

In

Sample/Hold

applied to the

nd the

conversion

LOW

zero. If

goes

LOW during

Input

information,

length

detect

display.

sequence

The

from

through

by the

selected

a full-

For

any

to

Sample/

circuits

input

HIGH

(near

the

signal

of time

point

may

be

basic

which

dividing

logic

is

is

a

GREATER

SMALLER INPUT

INPUT

3490-8-3584

_

-

- -

- -

.r\?

ßüy

INTEGRATOR
FOR

FIXED TIME.

Figure 4-1.

CHARGES

INT€GRATOR
AT FIXED

Dual-Slope lntegration.

RATE.

\-

RO

DISCHARGES

4-1

Section

IV

+REF
.REF

oREF

Model3490A

<

-{
{

MEASUBEIVIENT

SEOUENCE

oTrrrTzlzTr

Prior ro the

oTr

smple rate control

tTz

allowed

The I ntegrator charges tor a fi

T3

2

Signal

3Ta

rhe

The

eTs

sTo

This

5Tq

s490 - a-55!3

ll
rl
ll
ll

tl

tl

tr

run{p

lhis time. the input to the DC Amplifier

During
in lhe

Auto-Zero

Following any delay required,

lo. the

amplitier

pola.iry

DC Amplilier

ll the instrument is in
upranges or

is

liltegrator

discharge. at a

downranges

is an Auto-Zero

tz

portion

the [e-mail] sequence,

ot

sening,

and

(see

state

Para$aphs 4-37 and 4-5O).

to settle

xed

determined and

plee

in

the input signal.

of

tixed rate

autoJange,

ooe range aod.initiat€s another reading.

period

of 65

rhat

any

delav

the

input signal

the run{p

belore

p6iod

ti me to a

of

prop€r

the

which

it

determin6 whether

(See

ms.

Paragfaphs

the

required by

be

grounded

to the

applied

period

begins.

proponional

rcltage

by the reference wltage.

the reading is

4-37 "nO

3490A

and

may

is

is

referen@ wltage is

is

determined

inerts any

the fundion and range selections.

this

amplifier

DC Amplifier

lo the input rignal

plected-

on

q-SO.l

requi.ed by

delay

and the Integrator arc

and sufficient

relerence is

The

the @rrect range. It not, it

time is

.

applied

the

to

circuits, and is
setting,

as well as the function

dependent

upon the

and range
auto-range operation, the logic circuits
range. The input polarity information

circuits

logic

to select the correct reference

run-down.

Display.

415.

,1-16.

The

display

most significant

during
operation
this dist. The

and
has
lights

!.

normal

(Test

"overload"

an

a Remote

*tren

remote

consists
digit is
measurements.
No.

display

annunciator light. If the instrument

Control

operation

of six digits;

zero or

either

During

1),

other numbers are displayed

also contains a

option, a

"REM"

is selected.

Basic

4-2.

Ftgure

sample rate switch

selected. In

the

select

is

utilized by

an

the

correct

polarity

however,

overrange

logic test

the

for

the

"1"

in

polarity

annunciator

symbol

also

Diagram and

4-17. Range and

4-18. Range and function
panel
with one of

provided

is

General
$aph4-196).

+19.

ar20.
analog and digital

in the

421.

4-22.

DC Amplifier

Operation.

Function

Control.

may be selected by the front

control

022

shown

if the

paragraph

describe

Figure

in

switches

or remotely,

the remote

by Option

Purpose

ANAL0G CIRCUITS.

DC

general, the following

In

Interface Bus I/O

circuits

diagram

block

lnput Attenuator.

A simplified diagam of the

circuits

is shown in Figure 4-3. The

instrument

options.

is equipped

Remote

control

Ll74), or by the

Option

030

(Para-

explanations of both

the

circuits outlined

7-18.

Input Attenuator

Input

the

and

34904

Model

switched

Attenuator

trolled by

is

signals
No attenuation
Ranges.

100Ö

Attenuation

V ranges.
measurements,
resistance
voltage
applied
Transistor)

being

measurements,

DC

the

to

switch,

the

from

used

is

of

attenuation

No

because

measured

Amplifier

the dc

and

which are con-

relays

reed

by

DC Switching

the .l

on

used on

is

100

is

required

the full-range

greater

not

is

Logic

V, I V and 10 Vdc

the 100 V and

voltage across

than

the AC Converter

through a FET

attenuator

is not used.

circuits'

for resistance

the

l0 V. In ac

output is

(Field

Effect

4-29. Boottrap

The

4-30.
provided

Circuit.

gate-to-source

voltage

by a

which
Amplifier input voltage
and turn-off bias.
Amplifrer,

shown

The input

in Figure

Amplifier feedback line.

l[.31.

Reference

Voltages.

bias for

to

the

is

bootstrapped to the

provide

of

7-20,

the

the

unity-gain

is connected to the

Section

switching FETs

DC

proper

turn-on

Bootstrap

IV

is

DC

AmPlifier.

DC

+23.

is

a differential

provide

to

stage

ohms on

the

the 100 V and 1000 V ranges

on

the

by

protected

The

is

applied

Sample/Hold

is applied to the

Gain.

the DC

Amplifier

the

by

FET

than

Input

as

output

range

this

If

optional

Amplifier

input

l0ro
resistance
determined

stage is

The DC

424.
a

using
sreater
i*g.r.

l0MO,

is
pull output
excessive

-

full

10 V
operation,
circuit.
the DC Amplifier

Analog

+25.

4-26.

circuits.

OC

T\'rc

100, and

Amplifier

gain

is determined

current.
for aU ranges and
output

output

of

FET switching circuits are used

gain

resistance
shown

ratios, and the

in Figure 4-3.

ARI

M

9.9

AR2

O.IM

aTTENUaTToN,

Figure 4-3.

4-27.

Switching

4-28. Figure
quence.
sigtal

discharge,

applied.

Feedback
plished

contahed

driven

During

is

applied

or

Switching

Attenuator

by FET

in

by signals

aR2

$

Simplified

Circuits.

4-4

shows

the

charging,

to

the

run{own

of these

switching

one

microcircuit

from

and

is

$

Diagram, DC

the

3490A measurement

or run-up

DC

Amplifier

period,

signals

Auto

circuits.

the

DC

amplifier

input resistance

an

I V

.l V,

attenuator.
by diodes which
amplifier output

functions.

the Integrator

to

operation is

circuit

and

The

prevent

is f or

In normal

selected,

Sample/Hold

may be l,

path

FRI-I

OUTPUT

selected.

-FR2,

FR2

--i-

-

FRI FR2

GA N
xr

o

xro 90K

xroo 99K

feedback

to select the fee{back

to

equal

aMPLTFIEF CA]N

FRI

Amplifier.

period, the input

input.

During

proper

the

and

Zero circuits.

These

package,

Switching

reference

others such as a

is

accom-

FETs

A2UZ, and are

circuits.

Logic

lOV

push-

l0

or

as

roox

roK

x

se-

the

are all

lnternal

4-32.
run-down

reference

portion

of the

voltages are

measurement
measurements, if the input voltage is
reference is used; and
reference is

used.

output is positive
run-down. The
ments,
approximately

is

generated

-

if the

input

In

ac measurements,

requiring

Sl

reference, used in resistance measure-

the negative

by the Ohms

I V.

provided

for

sequence. In

positive,

the - l0

is negative, the + l0

the

AC Converter

reference for

Converter

and is

the

dc

V
V

4-33. Overload Protection.
4-34. Protecfion

vided at the DC Amplifier input.

and 1000V

diodes to

ranges, the

input

to the
protection
diode circuit in
for

example, the amplifier is operating
or 100
+
amplifier

and

l6 V, the

gain,
voltage. If the
100, the

-

17

as

gate

Y.If

the amplifier output

it

approaches

on, reducing the

€onsequently, the

1

mately

16

4-35. Leakage

4-36. A
which disconnects the three
the
tor FET
when

the posibility

high impedance

FET switch

AC

Converter output FET

the

4-37. DC Amplifier

is

4-38. During

quence,

as shown

is automatically

ment, the amplifier input

Short FET switch
FET

switch J, placing

against excessive input voltage is

On

ranges,

approximately

protection

amplifier

is also

the

diode

the

input is limited by breakdown

1

13

V. On the .1 V and I

to

provided

parallel

circuits

approximately

with

switched to limit

are

the

at

amplifier output by a

the

feedback

output voltage exceeds

circuit

begins to conduct,

corresponding

with

a

amplifier is operating

of the xl

gain

FET

(K

goes

-

17 V, the

amplifier

amplifier

gain

xl

gain

and its output

is

output

V.

Gontrol.

(B

in Figure

reference FETs

(E),

(D)

from the

xl

Attenuator line is

of leakage

amplifier input

being used. This reduces

these

from

DC Amplifier input circuit.

Auto Zero.

Figure

in

portions

44,lhe DC Amplifier

of

the

zeroed. At the completion

grounded

is

C. The

Auto

the

Zero

amplifier

certain

the 10

x

V.

2

attenuator.

with a

approximately

reducing the

reduction

gain

with a

in Figure

excessively negative,

FET begins to turn

limited

is

44)

also

the

and

.01 Attenua-

during run-up

circuits

measurement

of a measure-

through

then turns

signal

in a

V, 100 V

Overload

gain

of

in

output

l0

of

44)isar

voltage.

to

approxi-

provided

(F,

G,

into

circuit

the Input

xl

pro-

V

the

If,
l0

or

H),

the

se-

on

gain

4-3

Section

IV Model3490A

NOTES

sEE

ON

PAGE.

MEASUFEMENT

FOR FULL RANGE NEGATIVE

tNPUT.
OR
TIMES SHOWN
OPTION. FOR 50 Hz OPTION,

INCB€ASE TIM€S BY 2O%,

A2U2

PIN SWITCH FUNCTION

11

SEOUENCE

NOT DRAWN TO TIME

VOLTAGE SCALE. ALL

ARE FOR 60 Hz

FET RANGE

IV,1V,10VDC

ALL

1m v. 1000 voc

ALL BANGES
& FUNCTIONS

lm v.

ALL AC RANG€S

ALL
NEG INPUT

ALL

ALL ExcEPT sAMPL€/
HOLD MEASUsEMENTS

ALL RANGES

& FUNCTIONS

10 v, 1000 vDc

RANGES

r v, r v. !00 vDc

BANGES,ALL AC

10 K. 1m0 K

10.000 Ktl

r v. rm vDc

RANG€S,ALL AC

I K. lOO KQ BANG€S

r K.10 K, 1m0 K,

IO,OM KQ

II

DC

t}

FOLLOWTNG

MAIN TIME BITS

&

10m vDc

RANGES,

RANGES

RANGES

.."........-

-N.- B -rt-- c -++

t-a

lrrttifilllrrlllrltlrl

ltrl

warrrNc,

.
lpEgroolpenroolcartslpenrool

|

i

, ,

CAA

I

,

rttll

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

oN

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

oN

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

DELAy serecr

1

:l;s,

:y;s

rP.f'

@!! | sms

|

MIN ' MIN

'l

i

'

l+-H-------l

-----]---+---]-.

r

serrrrncl

I I cr-,1--!----t ^ |

i

'*'{t

,Oü

srone

I
lporlnttvl

i^gff*i

sms

50is

|

||-

.K

|

I

srrecr

|

nEr

i-----}...'otu''

l

i'Xk

I to

5ms 5ms 65 ms

---i*

J---{

--r-.

F

|
|

i r

i

|
|

|

itYrs

c

i

I
|

|

l1

2t

H

- C -2940

3490A

'-{

"""

J

tt",

I

VOC..t KQ RANGES

ALL OC RANGES.
POS. INPUT,

I

ALL AC

ELECTRONIC

swtTcH

INPUT SHORT

MTB

^::

ON

OFF

ON

Figure 4-4(al.

Measurement

Sequence.

Model

34904

ac

coNv

OUTPUT

AMPLIFIER

DC

J6N'AUTOZERO
I.AUTO ZERO DISA6L€,

USED ONLY DURING

SAMPL€/ HOLD

OPERAIION

Section

IV

following notes refer to waveforms

The

AUTO

A.

not

is
function
selected,

AUTO

8.
range and
delay; 10
ranges

Range

C.

FET K,

D. Input signal

E.

Reference applied

F.

Reference

G. Auto

H. Integrator run-rup

configuration.
the

feedback
referenced
zero
the
the
capacitor
and cancels

to

during the

amplifier

following

appears

the

ZERO: lf

selected,

uprange

ZERO:

=

0

gain

L, or M.

Zero

At

hold is

determine sample rate

range. lf range is

and

and downrange as

Insert

function

=

Mo

350

delay.

input

with

applied

to

gein

with input

(65

ms of

the same time,

capacitor.

ground

is

Auto

stored

and

Zero

in

measurement,

the

at

inverting

amplifier

offset.

preceding

on

selected, wait

response

selected. DC = 0

ms

delay; 1

(FET

short

to input

(50

input

auto

ms).

amplifier.

amplif ier.

shorted

zero).

for

not

valid

necessary.

time delay

delay; AC = 85

=

MA

50

Gain can

Cl.

(FET

K).

Figure

switch

FET

As

a result, the capacitor is

the

amplifier input is held at

period.

Any residual offset

page:

trigger. lf hold

delay. Check

for function

required for

ms

ohms

delay; other

either

be

4-4(b). Measuibment

grounds

N

in

the feedback capacitor. During

the voltage stored in the

input of the amplifier

J. Integrator rundown

K.
HIGH TRUE WAVEFORM
AUTO ZERO

SIGNAL

SIGNAL
REFERENCE
REFERENCE VOLTAGE
INPUT SHORT

MTA,
AS
IS

NOTE 1.

reference

Select

=MT-B

VOLTAGE
VOLTAGE APPLIED = MTA. MTB, MTC

VOLTAGE GAIN

=

B AND C ARE SAME

MDA,

B AND C IF THERE

NO

SAMPLE/HOLD.

MODE
DC

AC
ol M
s,10 M

(0

polarity

GAIN

APPLIED

MTC-

Sequence Notes.

discharged
reference
the

discharge time

the

charge
accumulates
the

discharge time,
the measurement
diagram

at a fixed

voltage.

(and

the number

the

of

Integrator

Since the discharge

is

the input

and this

amplitude. Figure

-

60 ms).
or

INFORMATION

=

PULSE

reference.

ohm's

MTA, MTB

=MTA,

=

ili=iÄ, TUTC

INTERVAL

ms

65

ms

915

ms

115

415 ms

rate

determined by

MTB

proportional

signal). The

of clock pulses

number is then

circuits.

a known

is

rate

to the

constant,

amplitude of

Data

Counter

received

during

displayed

4-5 is a simplilied

as

INTEGRATOR

4.39.

440. Dual-Slope

4-41. The 34904
todigital
period
rate and resulting

tional to the

conversion.

of time,

Integration.

uses the

as indicated

amplitude

input

CIRCUITS.

dual,slope

The

integrator

in Figure

of the

signal.

The

method

charges

44.

of analog-

for a fixed

The charging

charge are

integrator

propor-

then

is

Integrating

442.

443. Tl're output of the DC Amplifier is applied

Integrator through

run-up and run-down.

during

Amplifier.

the

FET

switch

The

Integating

its input only

at

Amplifier

to the

is inverting, so if, for example, the input voltage
positive

during run-up,

the integrator

output

ramp

negative.

is
is

4-5

Section

IV

Model

3490A

L44. x

INPUT
OC

Amplifier.

20

AMP

FROM

ELECTRONIC

SWITCH

Figure 4-5.

INTEGRATING

AMPLIFIER

Simplified

Diagram, Integrator

XzO AMPLIFIER

Circuits.

Integrator

450.

ZERO

DETECT

AMPLIFIER

Auto Zero.

ANALOG
DETECT

IC

LOG

ZERO

TO

445. The

to

an inverting
output
complementary
output. This
Amplifier.
Integrator
Atnplifier.

generated
both inputs

446. Zerc

447
tional amplifier.
run-up, the

during run-up

point.

Output
Detect
is

applied
Amplifier
will occur.
Zero

448. Electronic
4-49. Two

output

is limited

output is then

A

feed-forward

input to the

This

at the integrator,

of the x

Detect Amplifier.

. The Zero

Analog

If

the

input

goes

LOW

point.

A frxed

to

to

determine the

The

Detect

logic

FET

of

amplifier

to

diode connection

reduces

Detect Amplifier

If

and returns to

during run-up

the inverting

Analog

circuits.

Switch.

switches

act as a sinele-pole

rundown.

and

.tmplit-rer

DC

coflreu-tcd to

the

output,

ground.

the Integrating

having

approximately t

applied to

connection is

non-inverting

noise

and

since

20 Amplifier

Integrator

the

Zero Detect

LOW at the

is negative, the

percentage

input of the

level

ZeroDetect

the

at

double-throw

Integrator

input

and

at all other times

Amplifier
gain

a

0.6 V

between its

of

20,

by

is applied

input

the Zerc

made

input

of the x

switching

any noise is

transieq{s

applied to

simultaneously.

is a

high-gain

input is positive

Output

goes

Zero

Analog

and HIGH

of the

Zero

at the Zero

reference

Zero

at which

input to

switch.

Zero Detect

output

the Integrator
During

is

connected

goes

whose

parallel

a

and

Detect

from the

20

opera-

during

HIGH

Detect

DeLect

voltage

Detect

to the

run-up

the

to

it

is

4-51. Any charge
at

the end of rundown
beginning
Circuit

of the next measurement.

accomplishes
Integrating
x

Amplifier

20
a reference, the Integator then
RC circuit.
during Auto Zero,

n

and
capacitor

x 20

Amplifiers

(see
ment, this.voltage stored in
amplifier

offset.

remaining on the integating

must

this

connecting

by

Amplifier to

ground

output. Using its

the Integrating

Since

wry residual offset in the

will be stored in

Figure 4-5).

During

the

capacitor

be removed

before the
The Auto
one input

the

and

own inverted

other to the

output

discharges through

Amplifier

gounded

is

Integrating

the Auto

the following

capacitor

Zero 2 pF

measure-

cancels

Zero

of the

as

an

the

4.52. AC CONVEBTEB.

z1-53.
responding

AC Converter used

The

circuit,
sinusoidal input.
4-6.

calibrated

A simplified diagram

in

the 3490A

to the

is an average

rms value

is shown

in

of a

Figure

4-54. AC Attenuators.

the

in

4-55. Ranging

attenuating the
gain,
voltage.
gains
full-range

which

Table

each

for

input on all

is

range. The converter

4-56. Converter

4-57.

A dual

AC-to-DC Converter Amplifier

impedance. Two

FET is used

AC

function

input sigral

and

is

adjusting
inversely proportional
4-1 shows the

attenuator

output is

ranges.

Amplifier.

in the

ac feedback paths

to

maintain

are

input

accomplished

the

amplifier

to the

and

+

stage

feedback
amplifier

I Vdc

of the

a high input

provided,

so that

by

for

J-tt

Model

34904

Section

IV

rNeur{

3490A-A-2824

4-1. AC Amplifier

Table

nput

I

Range

1V

10v

1(X)

1000 v

gain

of I or

a
stabilization

Saturation
diode

of

protection

approximately 1 7 V

&58. Rectifier
zt-59.

The

output of the
by a half-wave
complementary
fier diode
the
necessary
practical

is used to provide

amplifier input.

filtering

size. In

converter is

Io the

44)

4.60.

461. The

through
voltage
measured

DC

OHMS

Ohms

the

drop, which

in the

except that the Q

Attenuator

1
1

v

is

the

0.o1

0.01

gain

of 0.1 may be

provided

Converter

through

circuit

peak.

and Filter.

rectiher,

diode

in

Active filtering is

can

be

ac

measurements, the output of

applied through

Amplifier

CONVERTER.

Converter

resistance

is proportional

same

Reference
resistance measurement,
developed

across the

unknown

INPUT

ATTENUATOR

?M

K?

Amplifier

Gain

1

o.1

1

0.1

selected. DC

integating amplifier.

an

Amplifier

which

Converter

resulting

parallel

limits the output

Amplifier

in

with

full-wave

a

obtained

a FET switch

during run-up.

supplies

being

measured.

manner

then,

as

is

used for run-down. A

is

the

resistance, to the

4-6.

Figure

Ranging.

Total

Gain

1

0.1

0.01
o.001

prevented

is

is

positive

a

the

ac

output. A

output

feedback

used so that the

capacitors of a

with

(E

a reference

The resulting

the

to

resistance,

voltage input,

a dc

ratio of

the

CONVERTER

AMP RECTIFIER

Simplified

feedback

by

a

to

rectified

recti-

to

the

in Figure

current

is

voltage

Q

FEEDBACK

DC

AMP

25oK

50K

FEEDBACK

ATTENUATOR

Diagram, AC

Reference voltage.
Converter

4-62.

443. One
current source
voltage
input

selected
an operational
both inputs
cannot
input;
current, which

measured, R1. As the amplifier output

­because df the negative input, the

'"'

is forward biased.
automatically adjusted by
drop across R.e;. The value of
inversely

464. 0hmmeter

4-65. An
Circuits)
counter output is
center-tapped

is inverted

end
transformer

fier, and
Ohms

tance
internally connected to circuit

The
measurements except resistance

FI

LTER

OUTPUT

AMP

DC

Conyerter.

A simplified diagam

is shown in

Current

input of the

(approximately

through

according

at

Fizure 4-7.

Source.

operational

ground.

is referenced

to

-

I V) is

a reference resistance, Rr.1, whose

to the ohmmeter range. The

amplifier

is such that it

the same potential. This

amplifier
The

applied

tends to

be satisified by cunent drawn from

consequently,

it must be met by

passes

through the resistance being

transistor

resulting feedback current is

The

the

amplifier

the

current,

proportional

output

is applied

transformer

secondary is rectified by

this floating
Converter circuits.
measurements,

Power

from

then

the

and

to the

Supply.

the

to

a divide

applied

primary.

other

voltage

This

since the

of R1s1.

value

State Clock

by six

to

both

(The

is not.) The

a full-wave recti-

is used as a

permits 4-terminal resis-

A

Sipal

common during run-up.

Ohmmeter

Power

Supply

is

disabled

measurements.

of the

,fl

Reference

the

to

Ohms

the

in

other

value

nature

maintain

requirement

the

FET

the

feedback

goes

negative

its output

at

to cause a I

then,

(see

Logic

counter.

The

ends'of a

signal

at one

output of

the

supply for the

is not

Low

during

is

of

V

is

all

+7

Section IV

FEE D BACK

CURBENT

Model 3490A

SOURCE

466.

0hmmeter

+67

. An emitter
through
provides

the
voltage,
current
explained
then,
across

current

468. Input

4-69.
accidentally
nals
terminals
terminal.
the I

+70.

471.

4-72.
4

x
the
circuit
so

that the
signal.
of the
sample
of the

473.

+74.

a voltage

a stable

reference

applied

supplied

in

is the

ratio

R1s;,

resulting

Protection.

Protection

applied

is provided

and

Voltages

kfl

series

0ISPLAY
Display

Each

of

7 dot

matrix

digits.

In

to

light

display

Each

unit

number.

rate

indicator.

display

Scan

Generator.

A relaxation

resistor

Paragraph

both

Units.

is

l0 kHz provides

The

oscillator

The

counter

counter

after

output

outputs

every

-1-ö

OURING

RUN.DOWN

,oo.

I

rnre

/

)

Reference.

follower,

divider to

reference

to

to

Rrs6

Rpsg,

R1 by

of

(Figure
determines

442. A

of the

voltage

voltages

from

the

reference

against

excessive

to

the front panel

gas

by

a

discharge

a resistance

in

excess of

resistor.

ASSEMBLY

the

six

numerical

of

light-emitting

addition,

the proper

also

a single

the

each

LEDs,

can

be changed

contains

The polarity

Each

annunciator

LED.

oscillator

clock

signal

drives

a 4-bit

gated

are

I

2th input

ONLY

Figure

whose

base is

a 5.6

V

approximately

4-7).

the

the

current

resistance

across

R* to

being

determined

voltage.

voltage

Q

device

in series

with the

250 Vrms

(Figure

7-2?).

display units

(LED$

diodes

unit

contains

and

a latching

only

during

a

decimal point

unit

also contains

at

operating

for

at

approximately

the

Scan

synchronous

and

fed back

cycle, thus

'J

K1

I

I

V

O

REF TO
DC AMP

4-7.

Simplified

referenced

zener

diode.

-

I

V

across

This

reference

amount

source,

measuremenr,

the

which

Signal

across th:ä

may

contains

a decoding

an enable

to

the right

Generator.

to

providing

voltage
by the

may

be

termi-

hieh

deströy

to

form

circuit,

the left

the

side

counter.

reset the

the

of

as

a

Diagram,

Ohms
proper
Three

scan
Counter
one

digit

Converter.

combination

to release

digit, Nl. These
Output

4-75.

and Remote

Scan Decoder.

4-16. The

are

fed into
applies
time
the
display
beginning

4-78.
switch
disabled
symbol
and the
positive.
polarity

4-79.

4{0.
gated
Overload
signal
driven

an enable

that

unit

Data

Counter.

units

with the

The

or remote control,

during

is enabled,

vertical

The sample

unit, is on

Decimals

Range information

to turn

annunciator is

stored

by a
annunciators (optional)
Function

4.81.
4-82.

signals. Each

L0GrC
Clock.

4-83. Figure
Counter

circuits.

6.8K

signals,

A,

the stored

at a time,

scan

circuits.

four signal

a 4-to-10

pulse

receives

Scanning is

being

scanned

least significant

function

signals,

ac and

the minus sign

bar is

when Main Timing

Annunciators.

and

the

on

correct

in the

Logic. The

circuit

on the

C|RCU|TS.

4-8 is

a block

The

,I

1K IK

10 K I K

100 K

1.000 K

10.000 K

of signals

B,

and

C, are applied

BCD

beginning

signals

outputs

line
to

the BCD

with the

are

from the

decoder. The

each

display unit

count

continuous,

in

from either

gated

are

measurements.

ohms

turned

rate

on when the

indicator,

from

decimal

turned

Remote

Remote

are turned

annunciator

diagram

basic timing

CURRENT

RRer

1APPROX l

K I K

100 K
100

K

1 lvl

to

the

Scan

to the

count

information

least

significant

also used in

Scan Generator

decoder

at the same

information

with

approximately

digit,

Nl.

the

front panel

so

that the

symbol

When

is

on continuously,

reading

contained

Bit

A

is HIGH.

the

Range

Counter

for each

on by the

range.

Overload

annunciator

Assembly.

on

is

a single

of the

for

the 3490A

The

gating

by

LED.

Clock and

l0

!A

l0

!A

Decoder.

Data

the

Data

then

from

all six

1.6

ms,

is

the

is

in the

is

The

is

other

the

Ilgic

Model3490A

Section

IV

CLOCK

STATE

from

is derived
Counter,
Clock Oscillator

a Clock Oscillator

Timing

a

Counter, and the

is

a crystal-controlled
The oscillator frequency is
signed for 60
for 50 Hz operation. The
two

before being applied to

Hz line

operation,

oscillator

484. Data Gounter.

4{5.

The

Data

Counter is
taining
output multiplexing.
pulse
the count
latches.
BCD
digit
The
ously
the

486.

six

decade counters,

from

the Transfer

information

Scan signals
count information
by

digit,

beginning

Data

Counter

until

a Clear

logic

Output

Decoder.

Buffers

At the

and Zero Detect
in

from

the Dsplay

to be transferred

with

accumulates

Data

Counter

DATA

COUNTER

DCBA

TO

DISPLAY

DATA

AND

OUIPUT

CLOCK

Figure 4-8.

which drives

the

State Clock. The

multivibrator.

4 MtIz in instruments

and 3.333

the Data

a hexdecade

six

end of

rundown,

MHz in units

output is

divided by

Counter.

counter con-

4line latches,

a Transfer

logic transfers

BCD

form into the

assembly cause the

to

the

least

clock

signal

significant

pulses

continu-

is

received from

the

BUFFERS

Block Diagram,

Data

de-

and

4-line

Display

digit.

EMITTER

FOLLOWER

OSCILLATOR

6OHz

50Hz

Clock

and

Counters.

Inputs

4€7.

ate outputs
and Divide
are

gated

by
by

signals, HSHC

is HIGH

output

HIGH,

Buffer

the

and LSHC is

is selected,

the Divide

output is

Timing

Counter.

4-88. Timing

4{9.

The Timing

and

a 4-bit
sigrals
input signal.
$quare
and
signals
control
and

produced

are

wave. but is

for I

LOW

gö

to

run-up

function

TIMING

COUNTER

FREOUENCY

LINE 4MHz
LINE

3.333MH2

to

the buffer

from the Data

100,000.

the

The

Select Hundred

and LSHC, from

LOW, the Divide

and if

by 10,000

applied

through

Counter.

Counter consists

binary counter.

in

addition

This

input signal
HIGH for

(or

,000

the

time,

delay.

10,000)

Qualifier

overload

FOR

amplifiers

are

Counter, Divide

outputs of these

Thousand

Logic

Storage.

HSHC is

LOW

output

emitter

an

is selected.

of a single

Five

binary

to

the

Timing

is not

(or

9,000

counts.

Multiplexer,

point,

90,000)

These six

and are used to

sample

LTC

I

HJC

2

HTC

4

HTC

8

HTC

16

HTC

32

two intermedi-

by 10,000

amplifiers

Counts

If

HSHC

100,000

by

and

LSHC is

The

follower

to

D flip-flop

square

wave

Counter

a symmetrical

counts

timing

rate

delay,

INPUTS

NEXT.STATE

FUNCTION

COMBINATIONAL

LOGIC

(GATES,

RoM,

etc.I

Figure

4-9. Typical

PRESENT

STATE

Machine

State

COMBINATIONAL

Block Diagram.

OUTPUT

LOGIC

OUTPUTS

+9

Section

IV

Y=YES

N=NO

Model3490A

IS

34904

TO TAKE

R

EADI

r0,0m

!I IACDC

AEADY

A

NG'

DEl€AMINE
TED. IF AN INVALID BANGE
CONDITION EXISTS,
AUTOMATICALLY RANGES TO
NEAFEST VALIO RANGE

IS

DELAY

REOUIRED)

RANGE

SELEC.

34904

+10

y9c'c-35a5

BECHECK NANGE
OITIONS

SEFORE TAK

ING

MEASUREMENT.

CON

Figure

4-10.

FLAG IS

SEN
34904 WILL NOI
B€SPOND
OR EXTERNAL TRIG
6ER.

Block

MANUAL

TO

Diagram, Main

SET

Logic ASM

Flow Chart.

IF AUIORANC€ IS
ANO REAOING IS
RANGE,349OA BANG€S ANO
TAKES

PROCESS IS

THIS

UNTIL RANGE IS

R€ADING IS
COMPLET€D

ANOTHEF

SEL€CT€O

WRONG

ON

READING.

REPEATED

CORsECT

Model3490A

Section

IV

tl-90.

Algorithmic

3490A

T\e

4-91.
svstem
Fizure
nir

machine

Certain
more

the ASIr{.

timing

until

change

different

492.
ASM
followed
Note
condition
input

4-93. State

4MlIz
(Figure 4-8).
counter
has a
outputs,
phase, and are used for alternate
of input
output
Control

4-94. Read Only

diagram

uses a

called

4-9

nSU

outputs

"qualifier"

signal,

this

the

Figore

flow

that

to

(or

period of

Read Only Memory. Seven

an

shows

outputs

given

a

at

example,

For

the

qualifier

state

combination

4-10

chart.

the

by

many

at

certain

of a

ASM at

the

Clock.

3.333 MHz) output
This

D flip-flop, so

and a

labeled

signals to the ASM storage. The State Clock

also

of

used

the

is

circuits.

Machine.

State

logic

main

Algorithmic

typical

a

are

in

inputs,

Next

of

is a block

ASM

points,

prs

8

HSCK and

Main

State

determined

instant,

the

reaches

the

This

that

The input to the State Clock

signal

Memory.

called

present

determine

qualifier

if the

Function

State

a

Each new

ASM.

outputs.

of

diagram

chart

taking

in

path taken depends

the

This

signal.

particular

from the

is

divided by a

that the

(or

in the Data Output and Remote

ps).

9.6
LSCK, are

Figure

Ingic Circuits.

circuits

State
Machine

state, along

predetermined

employ a

Machine

block diagram'

"state"

the

by

"present

the

with

"next

the

of

illustrates

a normal

signal
time.

State Clock

The

synchronous clocking

+11

The 3490A

the memory

of

state" of

input is a certain

logic may wait

level to

provides

state

the

main

the

measurement'

qualifier

is the

Clock Oscillator

4-bit

two

State Clock

180"

is a block

logic

(ASM)'

of the
state'"
one or

logic

process

the

on

is

the

binary

output

out of

logic

inputs

"present"

the

in
input,

to determine the
outputs are used
initiate the

Memory

Only
sipal to the
sigrral
the
Electronic

4-95.

consists

a

from the

State

present

determine

qualifier

ROM
prevent

4-96.
by a three-digit

levels
in Figure

outputs
the

YMF=0;
YMA

131

with the
4-97.

Qualifier
Enable

are

the

to

Transfer

Present

of seven

Clock

state.

input

input by

uncertainty

State

of

D flip-flop

are LOW

state

=

(l

I

A total

.

highest

Oualifier

Multiplexer

signals

inverted

state

are used, along

to select

other logic

(ROM)

Logic

Logic

utd Zero

Switch signal to

State

ROM

L signal. The

Together

the next

is

ldentification.

7-30. For

is

then

YME=l;

0l 1 I l1), the

decimal number

Multiplexer.

LMQA,

and used

also

Output Decoder, a Memory

Storage flip-flops, Transfer

Storage.

D flip-flops.

clocked

are

state outputs

clocked into

the

State

in the ROM next state

octal coded

outputs YMA

example,

("0").

001.
YMD=1;

state

identification

is shown

LMQS,

to select

next state. Five

qualifier,

the

action.

with the

If

In the

In

addition, the

supplies

Detect

the

Clock

Each state

only

state identihcation

gates,

Integrator.

The Present

The next state

into the flip-flops

D flip-flop

qualifier

of the

memory storage

H signal 4 ps

number

of 128

A

and

determined

through

in state

YMA goes

state

YMC=l;

states

number

block diagram

in Figure

LMQC from the

one output

"Qualifier',

with

a

other

memory

as

well

an

Output Enable

Output

Enable

and

a

State

Storage

outputs

outputs

may

000,

where YMG=

4-1

are the

input,

ROM. The

later

decision.

be identified

YMG, shown

all seven

HIGH

YMB=l;

number

possible,

are

being

of the

2.

Qualifier

out

of eight

as

to

Read

to

Close

by the

they

the

at

to

by the

("1"),

177-

ROM

l;

is

Figure

1.

4-1

Block Diagram, Main

Logic Circuits.

4-l

r

Section IV

Model

3490A

ENAELE

I

NPUTS

ENABLE

4-12. Block

Figure

to each of three 3-to-8

signals

input
three outputs

OR Invert
I-il,IQD

true signals

LOW

one

select

the Invert Gate is

from

are applied simultaneously to

Gate. The other two

and LMQE, are inverted

the three

of

clocked by State Clock

the

is

Qualifier

180" out of

phase

the Present State

Diagram, Qualifier Multiplexer.

used

are

at

decoder outputs. The output
applied
signal HSCK,

Input to the ROM. This clock

with

State Clock LSCKwhich

Storage

flip-flops. This

tainty in the ROM next state

OUALIFIER

TO ROM

line

decoders.

Qualifier

Enable sigrals,

and both

the

AND/OR

Invert

to a D flip-flop, which

and

whose

prevents

decision.

INPUT

These

the AND/

HIGH

and

Gate

output

signal is

clocks
uncer-

to

remains
range. After
the
LOW
the information
allows
Data

4-1O2. Data Flag
this flip-flop

HIGH until after

going

end of

the

transition

measurement

signals

stored

the

Flag

data

goes

to be

from

goes

LOW,

to the
in the

transferred across

"busy'

Flip-Flop.

at

LOW
ment and remains LOW
completed.

LOW
This

If

autorange

until a reading

signal is

inverted in both

has been

Zerc Detect

End of Reading

sequence.
Data Output
Data Counter

"ready."

to

The Data
the beginning of a measure­until

is selected, Data

made on the

the Data Output and

on the

goes

The

circuits that

is

guard

before the

Flag output from

the reading

Flag

correct range.

correct

HIGH at

HIGH
valid

and

cycle

remains

to

is

Remote circuits.

4-103.
outputs

divide

by

the

from

4-104. Turn-On
circuit is

is

instrument is tumed on. This LOW

Timing B and C

Divide by

Select

from this flip-flop are

100,000 or

Data Counter

Clear.

for approximately

LOW

flipflops and

flip-flops, to force

the instrument is first

when

4-105.

Input Polarity

100,000

divide

Flip-Flop.

used to

10,000 counts

by

select

to the Timing Counter.

The output of

the

100

signal clears the Main

the Present

the logic into the

turned

on.

Storage.

The two

either

the

output

Turn-On Clear

ms after

the

State Storage

preferred

state

4-98. Logic Output
uses

four inverted

to

select the

Enable signal

must

LSCK

enable signals

proper

from the

both

be LOW

decoder. All outputs

are used to

and

clear certain

Timing

Counters, to operate the

clock the'Polarity

4-99.

Logic

the six

Logic
inverted Memory
flip-flop
time

4-100.
are
used

is clocked

(or

times)

Main

produced

in controlling
determines inputs
Timing Bit
indicator. When

Auto

the

clock the

storage flip-flops,

and Overload storage flip-flops.

Storage.

Storage flip-flops

Output signal from

during

Timing

by

Logic

to

A

is

also

Main

Zero

circuits

Integrator.
tl-101.

tlip-t1op
the Zero Detect
Ln

End

the

of

Reading

is

normally

of

autorange

Decoder.

This

4-to-l6line decoder

from ROM, HMQA-D,

output. In

ROM, and

to

from

addition, the Output

the

State

obtain

this

Logic

output from the."

an

decoder are

Storage

to clear

Clock signal

LOW

flip-flops,

the

Data and

Range Counter, and

The input

to

change its output at a different

level to

the D inputs

is

determined by

the

ROM.

the measurement sequence.

Flip-Flops.

Storage

the

gain

and

used

Timing

Three Main

flip-flops. All of

DC

Switching

of the

DC Amplifier.

to

drive

is

Bit B

the

in

DC Amplifier and

Timing

Logic, which

sample

the

it

LOW,

these

activates

Flip-Flop. The output of

HIGH,
a measurement.
mode, the

goes

and

LOW

If the instrument is

End of Reading

shortly

true,

to

to

of

the

Each

Bits

are

Main

rate

this

after

sigral

input to this D flip-flop

The

4-106.

output of the Analog

lntegrator

run-up.

circuits.

If the 34904 input is
input will be LOW at
input

negative. Both outputs are used

is

Detect circuits.

the

and

LOW for

DC

-

input.

4-107. Transfer and

4108. The

Counter

circuits

Qualifier

ROM

AND
to the

upper

are derived

signal,

output

given during

is

goes

HIGH

signal

in

gates

two-input

in the
outputs
Transfer
These signals

Integrator
greater than
signal
Data

latch

the
measurement

4-109. Overload.
HIGH until

enable

The flip-flop

the end of run-up, and

The

output

Switching

Zero

Transfer

120

in
Multiplexer,
has

after

and

hand

right

a

and

be

may

reaches

of nnge,

%

transfer the count

to

countet.Zero

the

been

A Transfer

the

at

the Transfer sigral

is applied

the AND/OR

AND

is the

Zero Detect Amplifier

is clocked at the end of

positive,

the flip-flop D

in

goes

to the

LoSc

which

HIGH for + input

is

Detect.

circuits are

Detect

Zerc

Figure 7-30. Two

corner

from

HIGH

issued at

zerc), at overload

Logic

indicating

comPleted.

start of run-down,

to

gate

of

these circuits; a LOW

trve Zerc

end of run-down

or when a False

Test. Transfer

into

Detect

to the ROM

Enable signal from

goes

input of

one

Invert Gate.

The other

is connected

inverted

in the

HIGH if

the

the logic Zero

Display

and

shown

true

Detect sigtal.

(when

if reading

Transfer

goes

the

is one

to

quad

six

input to

the

that a

the

remains

and

This

LOW.

each of

three

input

to the Time

is

Model3490A

Section

IV

32 line

Count
HIGH at

this AND

from

Zero

and

4-110. Negative

Polarity Storage

the
be HIGH.
Analog
Transfer

+111.
tive, the
three-input

is HIGH,

of rundown,

third input

ZercDetect

4-112. False
gate
control
during Logic
commands

4113.

Zerc

Positive

connected to

is

Ovedoad

from

the overload

gate

Detect

Since

Detecr

andZero

Polarity

AND

so when

this signal is inverted

the AND

of

commands.

Transfer. One

the output. When False Transfer goes

Test operation, Transfer

issued.

are

Timing Counter.

the

point,

goes HIGH to

then

commands.

If the

Input.

output

Q

Transfer

Detect

Input.

gate

Enable is

goes

HIGH at

commands

When Jhe 3490A

Storage

positive.

is

Analog

Zero

gate,

f

5

V, enabling the

Storage.

120

of runge. The

7o

34904

to

the next AND

already HIGH,

the

are

output

Q

Again, Transfer

Detect

and applied

resulting

input

of a two-input

This line goes

output

produce

input is

end of run-down,

given.

goes

in

and Zero Detect

Transfer

negative,

gate

will

when

input is

to

Transfer

other input to

posi-

the

other

Enable

LOW at end

to the

and

AND

LOW

output
indicating
range,
goes
the
Display

+il5.

4-1 16. The
and
Time Bits to
during both run-up
protection

tion

AC
gain
addition,
during

relay
ments.
NAND gates

+II7. REFERENCE

ll.l

will

be LOW.

a measurement of

the

flip-flop

to

the Data

Display. A

circuits to turn

DC

SWTTCH|NG LoGrC.

DC

polarity

on the

on the two

Converter

is also selected

this circuit

resistance

at the input to

,Read

A

make up

output

Output circuits

HIGH

Overload

on

Switching Logc uses

information, together

control

in

all

and run-down. This

two

lower

higher

dc

measurements.

ac

by the DC

also enables

measurements,

the AC

Only Memory

the DC

SUPPLIES.

18.

Voltage Mea$rements.

If

Time

Count 32

greater

will

be

sigral is

the

Overload annunciator.

inputs

dc Ranges, input

ranges,

Converter

Switching

thm

HIGH.

(Option

inverted

range, function,

with the

to the

and the

and

and three

DC

includes

The

DC

Switching

the

Ohms

controls

for ac measure-

Logic.

T[ris

021),

output

is

HIGH,

120

% of

output

and to

in

the

three

main

Amplifier

input

attenua-

ofthe
Amplifier
Logic. In

Converter

the

reed

dual-input

+114. When
Overload
measurement

EXT REF

INPUT

Storage D flipflop is

EXTERNAL REFERENCE

a Zero Detect command

LOW, indicating

is less than l2OVo

AMPLIFIER

(oPTloN

+REFERENCE

o80)

of

range,

SUPPLY

is issued,

the

flip-flop

EXT

INT

the
the

4-119.
Reference
+

l0 V

REFERENCE

INPUT

,rtl

Figure 4-13 is a simplified

and Ratio circuits.

Reference from

POLARITY

(oPTtoN

POLARITY

+REF

sENsE I

a voltage

LOGIC

080)

diagram

An

accurate

regulated

RATIO POLARITY

power

of the

and stable

supply

aLL

JUMPERS

RATIO

_<*-b_ REMovEo

OPTION

IS

INSTALLEO. I

Figure

tF

z1-13.

Simplified

Diagram,

Reference

and Ratio

3490-8-2930

Circuits.

+13

Section

IV

Model 3490A

circuit
negative
which senses the reference
input to the DC
that point,
connector
the
is also connected

4-1
positive
amplifier whose
of this amplifier is
output.

fumishes

dc voltage

Inverting

4-1 20.
supply is referenced
emitter circuit of a feedback
diode
improved
adjusted

Plus

and

to

Minus

21.
dc measurements,

4-122. Ratio Measrements

4-123. A
of making
External Reference
Ratio switch

the

make

switching

ence

-

l0

and
fied diagram

4-124. Extetnal
operational

V

the positive reference

measurements.

voltage

Amplifier

though

even

contact

temperature

resistance

Amplifier, which supplies the

to the sense

Reference.

transistor

provide

an accurate

Reference. The

input

adjusted to

ensures

there

The

differential

to a zener

are in the

stability.

is supplied

+

is the

(0ption

34904 equipped

dc-to-dc

external

references

and ac-to-dc ratio

Amplifier has

is set to the

reference

logic, since

of the external

Reference Amplifier.

amplifier, connected

with

I V

in voltage

are used. Figure

reference amplifier

is used in

which

A feedback

the FET

at

the correct

may be switch

in

the circuit.

point.

amplifier of this

diode which is

amplifier transistor.

same package,

The amplifier

+

l0 V output.

-

reference, used

by an inverting

10

V reference.

provide

an accurate

circuit
switch

voltage at

The input to

-

Reference,

in

gain

in ac and

gain

The

-

l0

080).

Option

measurements.

gain

a

range. This is necessary to

compatible

in the non-inverting

is capable

080

of l0

when

with the

measurements

4-14 is a simpli-

A microcircuit

refer-

circuits.

and

the

The

for

V

The

the

mode, is used
reference input.
adjusting the
microcircuit
for

bias current
External
approximately !

voltage up to

damage either the protection
Amplifier.
mately t 14

4-125. Feedback

is

*

feedback

gain

fier
slightly
Ext.
Reference Amplifier a gain

measurements, this

intemal reference.

4-126. Input

the input of the External
cause

resistor

Input

this is
maintains both
voltage, so that
input is essentially equal
input.
input of the input
has

equal
be

above or

Ref. range, the feedback is

an

if this current

Compensation Amplifier. Figure 4-15 shows

accomplished.

This voltage is connected to the non-inverting

gain

a

to

r

0.1

as

a buffer

gain

The

output of the Feedback Amplifier. A third

amplifier provides current to compensate

drawn

Reference

14 V to protect

+

250 V. Greater

The

amplifier

V for the

Amplifier.

circuit so

on the 10

offset voltage drop

of

the External Reference input voltage,

V to + 12 V. The amplifier

that the External Reference
V Ext. Ref. range can

below unity as required. On the I

reference is substituted for the l0

Compensation Amplifier.

its

inputs

the voltage

Compensation Amplifier, U2,

l. The

amplifier

this

of

by

Amplifier

protection

were not compensated

The External

output of

amplifier

input

the

input is clamped

against

input

circuit or the Reference

output

is limited to

of

An

amplifier

attenuated

10,

of

Reference Amplifier

the

across

Reference

at approximately the same

the

inverting

at

to the External

U2,

the

for

is

amplifier.

excessive

voltages

subsequent circuits.

is used in

because in ratio

Bias current

input

then, is essentially

offset is

selected

be adjusted

to give

protection

for by the

Amplifier

(feedback)

Reference

and may

external

by

The

to

input

may

approxi-

the

Ampli-

V

the

V

at

could

how

which

adjusted

INPUT

PROTECTION

+ I7V

Figure

EXTERNAL
REFERENCE
AMPLIFIER

INPUT

COMPENSATION

AMPLIFIER

4-14.

Simplified Diagram,

External

Reference

Circuits.

Model3490A

EXT
INPUT

REF

t

COMPENSATING

I

CURRENT

BIAS

976K

CURRENT

+

+

AT

l7v

VOLTAGE

AMP INPUTS

APPROX EQUAL

EXTERML

REFERENCE

AMPLIFIER

90K

FEEDBACK

AMPLIFIER

+REF

TO
A?U?F

Section IV

FET

VOLTAGE

B - 3044

34904-

Bias Adjustment

the

with

equal

current
Reference

is

Amplifier

4-127. Reference
gration method
reference

voltage
charge) must
voltage.
reference
is
voltage

The

polarity

positive

or

in ratio measurements
internal reference,
rundown reference

extemal

this is

reference

accomplished.
output is inverted
Exclusive

OR Gate.

the bias

to

inPut.

Polarity

of measurement,

used for run-down

be opposite

3490A

automatically

whether the

negative. Since

the logic

polarity

is negative. Figure

The External Reference

and

The other

connected to the stored

circuits.

I"ogic
one

and only one input is HIGH.

HIGH

either

output
reference
panel

display polarity
extemal
are of

opposite polarity.

The Exclusive OR Gate

or LOW, the output

the

of

AC Converter

is selected

in all ac measurements.

symbol is

reference

are of

+

+

FOR

.

.

FOR

+

FOR INTERNAL REF.

=

INPUT VOLTAGE

INPUT

COMPENSATION

AMPLIFIER

Figure

the compensating

that

so

the

current at

Logic.

In

the

the

External

dual-slope

polarity of

(integrator

the

polarity

the input

of

selects the correct

External Reference

the external reference

positive

replaces

signal which

must be

the

selects the

inverted when

4-16 shows how

Amplifier

applied to

one input of an

input of this

Input Polarity signal from

output is HIGH if

If both

is

LOW. Because

positive, a

is

inputs

negative

The front

+

if the input signal and

the same

No

EXTERNAL
EXTERNAL REF.

polarity,

polarity symbol

REF.

INVERTING
AMPLIFIER

-

and

is

displayed

4-15.

inte-

the

dis

input

the

gate

the

are

the

if they

LOW FOR
HIGH FOR

LOW FOR

Input Bias

is

+

EXTERNAL

.

EXTERNAL

INTERNAL

toK

Compensation.

for acldc
reference

and reference

input

of

+128.

FBONT

4-129. Range,
controlled

panel switches. HOLD and

front

true.

LOW

and

Range
Remote

Control

operations

is selected,

range

Range Counter

4130.

4-131.

power

'änd

3490A.

"

POWER

Figure

supplies.

t 5

V

An

O2O, O2l

microcircuit

adjusted.
directly

or indirectly

indicated

REF.

REF.

REF.

ratio measurements.

polarity

required

for

voltages.

PANEL S1VITCHING.

Function,

by HIGH

If

3490A

the

Function

circuits

may be

the Range

in the Logic

and Sample

BCD

true

has a Remote

information are

so

controlled

information

circuits.

SUPPLIES.

is

4-17

provide power to the

outguard

andO22.

regulator,

All the other

the

in

a block

Regulated

+

5 V supply

+

The

and

inguard

upon the

diagram

block

supplies

17V supply

Table

the various

Rate delay are

logic signals

Trigger

MAN

Control

routed

if desired,

that,

remotely.

diagram

t 30

of

inguard

is

a

is

its output

regulator

+

l7 V

Figure

of

RATIO
(SEE

4-2 shows

the

combinations

from the

signals

are

option,

through

the

these

Unless Auto-

is stored by

the

of

V,

circuits of

part

of Options

regulated

the

inguard

t

17 V,

the

by

is accurately

circuits depend

supply, as

+

since

4-17,

POLARITY

4-1)

TABLE

a

l7

FOR

HtGH

FOR . INPUT

LOW

FOR AC INPUT

HIGH

4-16. Reference

Figure

+

tNpUT

,

I

Polarity

Logic.

+t5

Section

IV

Table

4-2. Polarity

in

Measurements.

Ratio

Model

3490A

External

Reference

I nput

+
+

is

volts

-

used as a

17V regulators.

reference

-30V

The
reference. Ul02 in the - 17 V
supply

thru

CR123

until

the
after turn-on. It is then operated
The - 5 V supply is zener
supply. All supplies except
regulated
of
circuits

and current

each

supply is limited

it supplies.

limited for

by a

I nput

Signal

for the + 30

regulator uses - 17V

supply is operated

-30V
off - 30 V

regulated from

the - 5 V

protection.

zener

+I32. SELF.TEST FUNCTION.

+133.
panel

switch
provide
3490A
of the logic
circuits as explained
Table 4-3.

tests,

Seven

settings or

internal

checks on the operation of

circuits. Test

circuits,

which may be selected

by optional remote control,

No. I checks

the

and

other

in the following paragraphs

Ratio

Polarity

Signal

HIGH

+

LOW

LOW
HIGH
HIGH

LOW

V, + 5 V and

as a

off raw

supply comes

up

thru CRl22.

the - l7V

supply are voltage

The output

diode to

protect

the

by front

many of

the

approximately 70%

six

check

analog

in

and

Displayed

Polarity

+

none
none

T€sl

No.

2

J

4
5
6
7

4-134.

Measurement

Reference

Required

DC Amp.

Input

Ground

+

Ref/- Ref

+

Ref
Ground
Input x 0.01

o

Ref

Logic

4-135. A series of ten

indication

visible
logic

circuits are

instrument

autoranges
ing through all ranges,
ranges. Note also

range.

In

each

Run-down

Amplifier

Used

Output

Invert. Amp.

Ext. Ref. Amp.

4-3.

No. l.

as

DC Amp.

x1
xl
xl
x 10O
x
x10

to

Ext. Ref. Amp.

Amp.

Invert.
Invert. Amp.
Ext. Ref. Amp.

Analog Tests.

Gain

100

readings,

whether

DC Amp.

+

-

Ref/+ Ref
Input x 1
+
+

+

shown

the

I nput

Ref/-

Ref

Ref/- Ref
Ref
Ref

below,

display and certain

+

Table

Run-Up Run-Down

Test,

operating correctly. Note that the

step

one

for each reading, uprang-

then downranging through all

that the numerical

test, two

logic

display

factors determine

DC Amp.

Gain

x1
xl
xl
xl
x1
x1

provide

changes for

the

+lb,

RECT IFIER

FULL- WAVE

RECTI FIER

cRil9 - t 20

Figure 4-17.

Power

Supply

REF

REGULATOR

Block

Diagram.

Model3490A

Section

IV

numerical
Counter
output

divide by
Timing Counter
count, and
position of
Data
HIGH,

LOW, the divide

is
Timing

is

LOW,
when the
LOW when

4-136.

Transfer
counts

1,600,000 + counts.
nearly
period.
does
reading, the two
because

display;

is allowed

to the

Counter

the divide

Bit C

it

During

signal is switched

during

all dots

The I

not provide

of known

Timing

100,000

outputs determines the length

consequently,

the most

output

by

is

HIGH,

downranges.

instrument reaches the

the highest range

+

080.024

+

O4.0024

+

o.2N24
+.010024
+

0.09032

+

t0.oo24

+

200.024

+

4000.24

+

80002.4

+

6000.xx

the last

the entire

in the

(in

1,600,000)
a

least

transition

the length

count, and

to

Counter

counts).

significant

selected. If

100,000

by 10,000

the

Both

OL

measurement listed

counting

Because

display

seventh

significant

of time

(divide

In each

the

most significant

digit is

output is

output is

instrument

timing

lowest

is reached.

on for

8 counts and

period,

the

of

appear to be on

is lost

In

digit.

digits

times during the

that the

the Data

range,

the

Main Timing

selected,

upranges,
bits

counting

because the display

all except the last

are

Counter

by 10,000

one

of the

digit. The

result of the

Bit

and if B

used. If

and if

are set

HIGH

range,

and set

above,

off for 8

lasts

which

frequency,
during

predictable
reading.

of six

Main

Data

or

B is

the

for

this

4141.
4-142.

switch (F
voltage
the
does
set

voltage.

EXT

C

used
for both

+143.

4-144.
setting
using
amplifier
FET

used
Test
the

4145.

4146.

first

100 in

run-down
reading in
tion,
offset.
for

+

Reference

Tlnslest

in

through

input

voltage is used

not

have the

to INT

With the

REF

in

adjusting

the

REF, this

input

I V

0.1V Range

The

0.1 V Range is

the

DC

the

normal

input

during

for

run-down

No.

5

checks

DC

Amplifier.

x .01 Atten.,

In

Test

divided

adjusting

the

the

Test

by 100

DC

as in

this

DC

No.

the

Check, Test

compares

Figure

44)

Io a precise

+

the

Ref

for

ratio

option,

checks

RATIO
terminals
the

External

l0

and

V

Zero,

Amplifier

reference

grounded

is

run-up,

and

in

as

a normal

operation

100

x

No.

Amplifier.

a normal

test

Amplifier gain

6 is used

x 100

6, a
in the

could

gain.

precise

No.

4.

the

voltage

input

FET

is used

run-down.

or if the

the

internal

switch

reference

Test

gain

either the

Gain,

attenuator,

The

measurement.

indicate

in the

set

shorted,

simulated

voltages

of

Test

Reference

ranges.

No.

b.

at x 100

through

voltage

the

auto zero

Test

-

l0

+

Reference

error in

adjustment,

Adjustment

for

+

No.

V

then

+

at the

If

RATIO

to EXT

for this

the Input

or - Reference

Ref

FET

voltage.

for

run-up,

the

+

No.

Amplifier

for

run-up,

run-down.

measurement.

The
and

instrument

switch

Reference

and the

4

can

zero

test

and

The

Short

circuits

6.

input

voltage

amplified

is used

An incorrect

the

attenua-

or

a thermal

procedures

is

be

by

is

in

is

by

for

+137.

4.138.
both
configuration.
grounded

Figure
run-down
input.
operating

4139. Turnover

voltages,
between
the
uses
one
run-down
pola.rity
used
for
dures,
3

10

Test

run-up

44).
just

If

correctly,

4-140.

differences

Test

or
positive

same

+

the
measurement,

of

to

select

the

next

after

is

used

to

V Range

No.

2 selects

and

During

through

Either

as in

the

amplifier

Error,

No.

3

in

value

amplifier

and

absolute

Ref

for

in

the

the

run-up

the

run-up

measurement.

the +

Reference

adjust

the

Zero,Test

a DC

run-down,

run-up,

the

Input

+

the

or

a normal

the

checks

offsets

value.

run-up

and

following

-

dc

and its

display

Test

No.

for

between

which

negative

For

and the

_

Ref

measuremänt.

voltage

voltage

ti

has

Reference.

No.

2.

Amplifier

which is

the

amplifier

Short

FET

-

Reference

measurement

auto

zero circuits

should

be zero.

3.

turnover

+

the

readings

this

for

and

result in

tesi,

-

Ref

run_up

in

one

of

the

opposite polarity

tne

RAiustmenf

been

adjusted, Test

gain

of I for

the l0

for run_down

measurement

V range
input

switch (C

is

used

for

with zero

are

errors, such

-

Reference

differences
with inputs
the instrument

+

and

Ref for

The stored

proce_

No.

1s

in

of

in

is

as

4147.

,l-148.
(G

.tlOv

shorted
source
across the
precise
tolerance
correct
Ohms

+149. BCD

0hms Reference,

In Test

in Figure

amplifier,

voltage
reading

Converter

44)

Ref.

The A

to

close

reference

for

No.

this

REMOTE

7-3r).

4150.

4-151.
approximately +
Remote,
voltage
and is
ground
and
maximum

0utguard

A

microcircuit

Trigger

is shown

isolated

is

also isolated

from

chassis
of

from

40 V

Test

No.

7,

signal

the

is amplified

the

thus generating

resistor

is

not

test

verifies proper

circuits.

by

input

Signal

feedback

(see

required

reading

EXPAND

Power

Supply.

regulator

5.3

V to

the

and

Sample/Hold

on the schematic

all inguard

from

the

(earth)

above

ground,

chassis

7.

the Q

at

l0

and compared

terminals

loop

of the e

the

Reference

Figure

for the fl

is I

7000 counts.

operation

0PTt0N

supplies

outguard

Trigger

diagrams

circuits.

inguard

common

and

may be floated

sround.

Ref FET

4-7). Because

Reference,

of most

Data

The outguard

switch

to

must

cunent

voltage

of

(Figure

020

a voltage

Output,

circuits.

+

as

circuits

This

5 VI,

the

be

the
the

of

a

A

a

+17

Section IV

Trigger

Encode

are

photo-isolators,

to

which

there is no

inguard

and

it signals

"hold".

This

the inguard

(rear

pin.

that

at

Stretched

inverted

circuits.

Trigger Circuits.

Trigger.

pulse is inverted twice and applied

Sample/Hold

connection is direct

panel

This trigger

4-153.

lsolated
External

They

4-152.

signals.
followers
emitting diode
Consequently,

outguard

It-l54.

Sample/Hold

4-155. Sample/Hold
HIGH

to LOW for a

nanoseconds,

to

040)
isolation transformer, which couples

to

an

to

sigral
Hold Trigger input
the

connection

present

the

unless
nally to External Encode.

Hold.

and

Hold

and

and applied

are both LOW

through emitter

consisting of a

drives

a

transistor.

photosensitive

electrical connection between

goes

When this

pulse

the

Sample/Hold

width

input
of at

circuits

the trigger

circuits.

The Sample/

coupled,

J7

Pulse

pin

Output

left

is

9)

will

open, + 5 V

not initiate a reading

is connected exter-

true

light-

from

least 30

(Option

and if

Model 34904

INPUTS

SEOUENTIAL

ENO OF REAOING L

C H

SCAN

8 H

SCAN

SCAN A H

MASTER MULTIPLEXER
OUTPUT SELECT

IIULTIPL€XER OUTPUT
ENAELE L

DATA
OUTPUTS

CLOCK

OATA
IO OUTGUARO
SHIFT

is

Figure 4-18.

4-162.

LOGIC

lltlttlltr

courPursl

I

I

I

O

I

I
I

MULTIPLEXE

REGISTERS

Data

I

ltllllt

rnnnnnnnn

Data Output

Output Sequential

I i I i i I

lll
lll

rrirztn:lla

o,,oo,o outou,

I
I

oc.cr

ry'd

ddihq

Timing

Logic.

lL--1t..

I lEXr-19
| | dild I

i i 16i9'i
i"r i98äiä;i

tcl.r.d

i.lormorion

rhi.

d iß

e.riod

Diagram

(Option

I

F

3
i

I
i

021

).

AC

4-156.

negative-going leading

a

Trigger.

width of at
tively coupled to
Sample/Hold

zt-157.
HIGH

Stretched

to

LOW for at
Sample/Hold
may be

connected to External

measurement

This input may

least 30

the

circuits.

Pulse

or AC Trigger
simultaneously with

ger.

+158.

4-159.
are
Power for
outguard + 5 V

DATA

The Data

isolated

OUTPUT

Output

from the internal

the

outguard circuits

power
isolated from inguard
ground,
Figure 7-32 is

4-160. Data

4-161 . Three

4

information
registers.
multiplexer
is HIGH.

The
inputs

outputs of

the

Data

Sequential Logic
mlolTnation

and may be floated

a diagram of

Multiplexers.

multiplexers, each having 8

output lines,

outputs

of the

eights periods

Output information,

are used to transfer

across

"output

An

selects

and

the

other set of four inputs

from two

third,

the

master

determines

transfer.

one set of four

of time

any

be

edge of 2

nanoseconds.

isolation

This output

Out.

to 15 volts

pulse is

This

transformer to trigger the

changes from

least 240 microseconds

input.

Stretched

Encode to

the

Sample/Hold

OPTION

021.

connections at the rear

circuits of the 3490^.

is

supplied

supply. Outguard

circuit common and

up to

the Data

chassis

40 V above

Output

input lines

the

Data Output

guard

the

select"

to

four eight-bit

(Ss)

connection to each

inputs if the

if

multiplexers are applied

"master"

or

multiplexer are

necessary

shown

as

the time

multiplexer.

enabled for only

to transfer

in

Figure 4-1 8. The

and

pulse

having

and a

capaci-

for each

Pulse

Out

initiate

trig-

panel

the

by

ground

(earth)

chassis.

circuits.

and

shift

input

Ss

is

Se

LOW.

to the

The

the

all

sequence

of

zt-163.

Figure 4-18 shows
sequential Logic
enabled when

the End of Reading

inputs

the timing

outputs.

and

the completion of a measurement.
which control
operate
with
Logic

a

signal
desired

4164.
+165.

pulse
These

the

the

consists

inputs to

output

Oata Clock.

A

is issued for

pulses
the outguard Shift
multiplexer

the outputs from

to correlate

Logic

outputs

from

basically

the flip-flops are

pattem.

Frequency

each

delayed

are

outputs

the

Data Counter.

of three

Doubler

transition

slightly

Registers,

to reach

the

is used

to

the

sequence of

The

goes

signal

three scan

The

the Data Counter

multiplexer

The

JK flipflops.

gated

to obtain the

so that a clock

of the

Scan

being applied

before

time for the

allow

proper state.

the

is

Logic

at

LOW

signals

outputs

Sequential

scan

The

A signal.

to

is

Asembly.

transferred across

is

signal

consists of a

which

photosensitive

connection

transistor.

is

made between

circuits.

Registers.

Registers are

Shift

8-bit

parallel output lines. Each

32

of

the information

position

one

Exclusive

lines determines whether

gates

these

of

the output is HIGH.

HIGH

and a

OR

is HIGH

is such that

new input

gate

true

guard through

light+mitting

Consequently,

the inguard and

providing the

used,

time a

in

is

in each of

the coded

one

both

true. The

and only

inputs are

or LOW

if

If

a

diode

no

Data

shift

the

accepted.

shift

the

Data

one

arl67.

lsolation

Each

4166.

photoisolator,

driving

a

electrical

outguard

+168. Shift

4-169.
capability
Clock
register shifts
A dual-input
register

operation
input is

Four

pulse is received,

input

Output

information

:-l

!

34904

Model

the

LOW,

or

HIGH

either

the Outguard Data

switch

LOW
controls
switch
LOW;
level as

gate input

one
other input
the input is LOW,

4170.

+171.
begiruring
sequence
indicates
This transition
recorder.

on

input

one

HIGH,

set to

is

consequently,

input.

other

the

is

always

HIGH,

is also

the output

Flag.

Data

Data Flag output

The

measurement

of a

completed.

is

the

that

Data

constitutes

If the instrument

to each

one input

the

mode, Data Flag remains
correct

L172.
+173. A HIGH signal

that the
and connected

automatic sampling
to
printed
Hold line. If
Printer
output

4t74.

range has been completed.
kinter Hold.

recorder is not

to the

until the

LOW. A slide

circuit

Hold

may

REM0TE

switch

board permits

the

switch

line is

go

LOW,

C0NTR0t

left
resulting

from

349OA

output is

LOW.

Output Assembly

gate.

output

When

HIGH.

the

will

The

the

output

signal

and

HIGH to

the

When

to

will

each

be the

switch

gate

is set

Consequently,

will

be LOW,

be HIGH.

goes

LOW

after a reading

LOW transition

Output information

Print

a

HIGH until

ready

Command to

is

operating

a digital

for

in the

a reading

recorder,

an input,

Hold line.

Printer

the

on

is

in the

open, the

0PTtoN

Outguard

disabling

IN

inverting

..Hold"

in

a

Hold

of the

position

022.

The HIGH/

HIGH/LOW

is

always

same logic

to

LOW,
if
and if

HIGH

at the

is

ready.

a digital

autorange

on the

indicating

is inverted

prevents

This

signal

returns

Data

Output

printer

and the

transistor

condition.

the

gates,

and

a HIGH signal

The

Remote

Remote

program

4180.

4181.
range

and
Execute
ferred

Enable

Flip-Flop

information

0utguard

This

dual

function

command

serially,
Shift Registers.
multiplexer
selection
other

line,

line.

outputs.

and

Figure

sequence.

SEOUENTIAL

PROGRAM

EXECUTE

scat{

c

SEOUENTIAL
OUTPUT

PROGRAM
OUTPUT

MULTIPLEXER

scaNA(So)

+2

cLocK

te.r

(S,}

SCAil A

oUTGUARD

ourPurs

oara

!.sr.s

at one input

signal

cannot

is

being transferred

Multiplexer.

4-to-1

line

information.

is given,

two

bits

at a time,

The

Scan A signal

ftan A is

Scan

A divided

4-19

shows

LOGIC INPUTS

H

-----_-I

LOGIC

FLAG

SELECT

MULnpLEXER

A[ R.hot.
'nrdmoron
crd.
tht.

INPUTS

-

___:-_tt_tl_lt_lt__

doCroh

ronrt.'r.d

ouo.a öuri^o

r.nod ot r,m.-

Section

of

the

other

gated

is

be

so

changed

that

while

the

across guard.

multiplexer

this

the

ll

ll

|

r---l

tlttl

<t

r

6:"

i"

g!9!;?;Fi

rä,?rE

ll
|

i

|

accepts

Then,

when

information

to the

is

used

applied

to

by 2 is

multiplexer

I

I

I

.,

:,'Ei

g

6i";lä

,)ri

i,ä

Sr

|

-

|

a

two

to

selecl

one

applied

gate.

fwa[

remote

g

bits

progam
is

trans-

inguard

the

output

toihe

output

IV

of

+175.

The

control

of

Sample/Hold

panel

Remote

34g0{internal
supplied
ground
from
40
Remote

l}176.

1.177.

diode

carry

electrical

by the +

is

isolated

chassis

V

above

Control

Gircuit

A photo-isolator,

which

each

signal

connection

circuits.

4-178.

4-179.

Remore

When
continuously,
to

the

bcal/Remote

is provided

signal

by

results

Remote

range,

operation.

(earth)
chassis.

function,

Input

circuits.

5

V outguard
from

ground,

Figure

Control

autorange

All connections

connector

Power

to the

inguard

and

7-33

circuits.

lsolation.

consisting

drives

a photosensitivJtransistoi,

across

guard.

Consequently,

bätween

Enable.

the

this

information

two

in

a

LOW

Remote

NAND

Enable

FlipFlop.

gates.

siglral

is

to

Option permits

selection,

at the

are isolated

outguard

power

supply.

from
circuits
Outguard

circuit common

may

be floated

is a

diagram

of

a light-emitting

is

there

inguärd

carrieä

Control

A

one

and outguard

input

is

across the guard

of the flif_flop

LOW

Remote Enable

input

of

held

one of the

remote

and
rear

the

and

up to

of the

used to

is

no

LOW

Figure

4-19.

Remote
(Option

4182.

is

,r-.

zl-183.

'-'of

signal
the
Execute

remains

JK

LOW
command,
While
Clock
tion
when
gate
Iocal/Remote

Program

+184.

4-185.
that

Remote

The

a Program

is inverted

Scan

Sequential

Sequential

Execute

and applied

C

signal goes

command,

LOW

until

flip-flops

output

of the

is present

regardless

the

Logic

signal

and the

may

be transferred

another

in

the

logic

Remote

selection

Execute

Program

procedure.

Flag.

The Program

remote program

output

Control

022).
Logic.

Itgic

is

command,

to

the

LOW

after

the

Ingic

output

Scan C goes

Logic

are

for

each

of its pulse

is

LOW, it

Scan A signal,

into

the shift

output

signal

Enable

signal

cannot

Flag signal
information

Timing

enabled

which

Diagram

by

musf go

Logic. The
receipt

also

of

goes

HIGH. Inputs

gated

so that

program

width

enables

so program

registers.

is

LOW, it

line

be changed

goes

HIGH to indicate

is

being

accepted,

application

from

next

time

progam

a

LOW

to

only

Execute

above

5 ms.

the

Data

informa-

Also,

disables

so that

during the

and

the

one

a

the

and

+r9

Section IV

Model3490A

returns
While the signal is HIGH,
and
At the same time, an
disables the
Flip-Flop, to
flip-flop during
Program Flag
divide-by-two flip-fl

4186.
+187.

pulse is issued for each transition
These
applied
program

+188. Shift

+189.
circuit
contains function
shifts the information
and inserts a new
applied to two

41 90.

+191 . The
ers may be either

four inputs is the
the
front

select"
local
select"

Flip-Flop.
function information

to

outguard circuits

Data Clock.
A Frequency Doubler is used

clock

to

information to

to indicate

LOW

output from the

Clock

State

prevent

a remote

signal is

op.

pulses

the

are delayed slightly

Shift Registers, to

Registers.

One-half of the

carries

Local/Remote

other

panel

connection

or remote program

the

multiplexers.

four outputs

set

is the

switches.

signal

is the

The

multiplexer

range

information.

bit.

of two
remote program

corresponding

to the

used in

programming

it enables

to

the clock

reach

bits in the

Multiplexers.

The logic level

output of the

transfer

allow

signal to

programming

LOW, it

the proper

dual 4-bit shift register

information,

Each Data

The shift

from each of these

sets of four inputs.

multiplexer selects

information.

outputs are the

the

gates

in

of

Sequential

the

t-ocal/Remote

from

period,

disables

so that

the

of

Scan

allow time

state.

and the

registers one

register

information

information

of the

Local/Remote

logic

circuits.

is

complete.

both inguard

information.

l,ogic

changing

the

before being

Clock
outputs

The

the

When the

Scan

a clock

signal.

A

for the

micro-

other

pulse

position

are

multiplex-

set

One

bits, and

from the

"output

either

{he

"outpüi

range

and

of

is operating
HIGH until
completed.

4.196.

A

4-197.
option permits
data/control
ASCII code,
octal code,

has a talk

controlling instrument

measurement

tion.
distinct address codes, a single controller is

instruct

3490A
series calculators.

4-198.

4-199.

total

of 15 instruments

the

bus. Each instrument
address
individually
ler to
ting

on
have a listen
if it

can output data, or

if it

can both receive and transmit

the listen
code character
assigned as shown

4-200. A principal
both remote

in

the

autorange

a

reading on

GENERAL
(0PTtoN

The

General Purpose

parallel

address

Since each

or receive

GPIB option is compatible with the

GPIB

A typical

(or

by

determine which

the

bus at

address for

PURPOSE

030).

the

Model 3490A

bus with several other instruments.

used in this system, is

bit,

and a

to

data or to receive

instrument

data from each one

System.

system is shown in Figure

bus

addresses) so that it can

the controller. This enables the control-

ury

address

programming

if

the

6, and

in Paragraph

advantage of the bus system is that

mode, Data

the

correct

INTERFACE

Interface Bus I/O

to

operate

an

serial character. The 3490A I/O

listen

address, which allows

instruct

may be

instruments

given

can

it

both a

3490A

the normal talk

and data output are done on

the 3490A to

programming

on the bus may

connected
the

on

will

time. An

receive

listen

is

normally the

3-104.

bus

data, a

and

data.

and

Flag

remains

range

has

BUS

(GPIB)

on a single

eight-bif

output

informa-

its

have

able to

individually.

-hp-

4-20. A

parallel

in

is

assigred an

be selected

communica-

be

instrument

talk

address

talk

a

address

For

example,

ASCII

address

Table

3-6.

been

I/O

The

+2-l

the

own

The

9800

to

will

is

V,

4-1

92. LocaURemote

4-193. The

put

select"
NOR
flip-flop.
signal

Flip-Flop

line

at the
sigtal
State Clock pulse
LOW signal
program
other flip-flop
the

display.

4194. Dau

t195.
begrnning
reading sequence

Local/Remote

signal

gate

is

used to gate the

When

from the

to

the

rear

is

applied

to

information.

Flag.

The

Data

of a

to the

the

logic
local

panel

to the

the

output

Flag

measurement

has

+10

Flip-Flop.

Flip-Flop provides

Incal/Remote

State Clock input to

3490A

then

multiplexers selects the

drives

been

turned

is

circuits sets the

When

state.

connector

D input of the

the

sets

inverter

An

the

Remote

output signal goes

and

completed.

Multiplexers.

on,

the

is held

flip-flop.

output

Q

connected

LOW

If the

"out-

the

A

the

the

Turn-on

Local/Remote

Remote Enable

LOW,

LOW. This

annunciator in

HIGH

to indicate

instrument

a

L,OW

A HIGH

remote

the

to

at the

the

L

9820A

CALCULATOR

(CONTROLLER}

FREOUENCY

COUNTER

(TALKER}

(LISTENERI

4-20.

Figure

12

ft. MAX.

ASCII

8US

CABLES

Typical Bus System.

3490A

DVM

(TALKE

(LISTENERI

PR

(LISTENER}

INTE

R}

R

Model3490A

the same data

(which may be
instrument
lines and

to

seven

For

lines.

various

the bus.

control

this reason a

lengths)

lines.

is used to

The cable contains

standard

connect

eight

cable

each

data

3490A
connector.
measurement
operation.

may

If

be triggered

addressed

data

in

through
to
accordance

talk,

the

the

rear panel

3490A

with

will

normal

Section

Trigger
output

IV

bus

4201. Basic
4-202. The

logic systems
A brief
given
ment
outside
system must accept,
providing

3490A internal logic circuits
instruments. The two
separate free-running clocks;
tion

between
736 is a block
3-5 lists

4-203. Information
ASM

to the
there is no
outguard circuits.
circuits to
different potentials.

interprets
responds
information
programs

is

addressed

transferred

Ir then

P11u
DI07

one character

Paragaph
controlled
Paragraphs

4-204.

4-2-O!.

3490A,
mately
state,.and
front

panel

Remote

programming

all
The

outguard

3490A

remote

controlled

+246.

accept
the

front

al)

are controlled

may

be updated

s€ttings.

Theory

3490A GPIB

called

explanation

Parugraph

in

guard (Inguard

guard (Outguard

the

a two-way

the

the bus signal mnemonics.

other

electrical

operate

information

to

the

across

the

3490A

to

across guard

placed

3-126.

the

by

3-94

GPIB

System

Reset.

the

Reset

100

ms.

sets

settings.

storage

logic

circuits

control.

from

Local

Control.

and store

panel.

If

the

of GPIB

Algorithmic

an

of

4-90.

One ASM is

State Machine)

store,

communication

State Machines

two machines

diagram of the

is transferred

by means

contact

This

allows the

on

different

The

from the

controller,

guard

logic

talk,

the

one

on

the

at a time

Tlre

timing

"handshake"

three

through

3-97.

Operation.

When

circuit

This

sets

the

range

It

flip-flops

to

conform

ASM

circuits

indicate

If

not,

the

front

range

Sample

from

at

any

Sample

power

the

also

and the

the

panel.

In

local

and

Rate

the

time

Rate

l/0

Circuits.

circuits employ

Siate Machines (ASM).

Algorithmic

and

and

consequently,

is

GPIB

photo-transistors,

of

outguard

and

to the

circuits.

measurement

digit

bus

data lines

in

of the

is

output

inguard

and function

clears

to

the

then

that

instrument

control,

function

and

front

panel.-This

by changing

control

State

inside

and the

State Machine).

output

link

the

other

are timed

asynchronous.

I/O

circuits.

guard

across

between

inguard

ground

ASM

controller.

transfers

inguard

When

the instrument

output

character

or

DIOI

the

sequence

data output

sigrals

first

applied to

is

LOW

ASM to the-,izero,'

circuits

the

Sample/Hold

trigger

mode, causing

fiönt panel

check

io

the

instrument

continues

the

information

Sample/Hold

ls set to

two

separate

Machine

the

instru-

other

Each
information,
between

bus

communica-

inzuard

anä'outguard

systems

receives

the

ASM,

described

for

see if the

I/O

information

the

HOLD, the

the

system

by

Figure

Table

from

one

so that

and

at

and

It then

necessary

which

data is

at

time.

a

through

shown in

is

in

the

approxi-

to

the

and

settingsl

is in

to

be

circuits

from

(option_

control

4-2O7.
Machine
DAV
valid.

is

is

DIOI
match,
talk
addressed
LOW.
information
State
disabling

Hold
line
HIGH,

4-208.
been
the
receive
seven
at

lines,

349OA
The
valid
guard

line
99rl

Machine
action.
alpha
next
storage
programming

'

'i

processed,
controller

iL

4-209.
must
may
other
indicates
The 3490A
after
address

4-210.
to
shown
controlled
multiplexer
character
circuits
DAV

available.

Address

to go

When

are

DI07

or to

If

Machine

controls.

have

indicating

Remote

instructed

controller

remote

data lines

a time.

the

Outguard

Outguard

for the

to the

HIGH

accepted

then

For

identifier

character

circuit. (See

When

send

address

unit

to

MRE

sent.

Address

talk,

it

in

place

to

LOW,

When

to

Listen.

senses

that

the

LOW

indicating

LDAV

is

compared

is

listen.

to

so,

the

is transferred

the

been

After

controller

3490A

Inguard

and

example,

sequence.)

RFD

that

programming

the

the

on

the

then

has

outputs

Paragraph

by the

and

is transferred

this

to

checked

If

listen.

It then

internal

sets

the

front

panel

As soon

checked,

that

the

Programming.

to

listen

sets

MRE

program

-7

DI0l

each

sets

State Machine

State

Machine

and

State Machine.

RFD

LOW to

and

is

being processed.

interprets

R, the

inguard

(if

it

is
Paragraph

is

allowed to go

the

3490A

ASCII

code

34904

the

bus to

3490A

will

not

again

been

to

Talk. When
the

measurement

3-126.

Inguard

a storage

character

indicating

the

listener

When

MRE

line is

that

received,

the

to

DI07

as
the

data. This

by

character

DAV

the

if

a

After

to

listen

that

to

data lines

34904

determine

is

checks

RMT

line

across guard

3490A

range,

function,

the

address

DAC

output

data has

After

and placed

High so

the

controller,

to

LOW, indicating

that

checks

then

transfers

indicate

data

the

character
circuits

digit) is

3-106

a data

HIGH,

is

ready for
is completed,

character
talk

or it

or talk.

the progamming

accept

set

LOW

the 3490A

The

State

unit.

As each

across guard,

the

on

the

listener

sets

DAC

the

Outguard

LOW,

it

the

data

information

DI05

address

HIGH,

REN

is

to

been

that

data is placed

is placed

to

It

and takes

routed

new

any
and

data in
output
Machine

data

bits. If

if

the

address

the

to

set

LOW

and

the

remote

and

data

and

is

allowed

accepted.

the

3490A

in

remote

the

3490A

one

on the

this

data iJ

see if

the

the

data

also sets

that

the

The

Inguard

appropriate

received

are set

so that

to

for

the

character

ind"icating

data.

the

controller

E,

after

may

address

The

character

more

data until

the

3490A

is

addressed

the

sequence

tlirough

output

the

lines

that

valid

HIGH,

indicating

State

waits

through

thöv

is

3490A

see

if

it

and this

Inguard

control,

Samplef

tn,

fiBN

to go

has

control.

can

on the

character

data

to

the

readv.

datals

across

the DAC

data

has

State

is

the
the

the

ranse

..rnol.

has

been

to

the

which

anv

is

ended.

listen

format

data

öutguard

and set

data is

for

is

tä

is
is

it

6

is

a

+2r

Section

IV

Model3490A

that

the

signals

to the
transferred
measurement
signals

has been accepted,

data

Inguard ASM

guard. The output

across

magnitude

(HSA,

HSB, HSC)

display.

printer

a

I/O

When

the

internal Talk

circuits to

4-211.

set

Talk Only.

to the TALK ONU/

operated with

switch sets

This

enabling

the

measurement. Operation

the front

by

+212.

4-213.
3490^, it
Amplifier and the

panel

controls.

SAMPLE/H0tD 0PTl0N ll40

When the

SampleiHold

occupies

Analog-to-Digital

position

a

as illustrated in Figure
follows
amplifier's
operation may
or Track/Hold

the Input

Amplifier, it

characteristics.

be used; Acquire/Hold

(non-delayed).

that new

timed

is

that

rear

panel

the

position,

without the

output

of the

3490A is programmed

option is

between

4-21 . Because

Either

the

Outguard ASM

may

data

of the six

by

control

the

same

the

digits of

3490A

slide switch

the 34904

use

of a controller.

Only

data

or

may

line

after each

045.

installed in the

the DC Input

conversion

circuits

Sample/Hold

limited

is

by

of two modes

(delayed

trigger),

be

scan

be

LOW,

that

of

measurement, the
allowed to track the

Sample/Hold amplifiers

input

signal.

are

again

is

--._J

pERroD

34904 B'3411

_Jf

Mode.

Figwe

4-23. Waveforms

4-216.

Acquire/Hold

EXTERNAL

TRIGG

SAMPLE/HOLD

ER

lllustrating

Mode.

HoLo MooE

MEASUREMEN,

Acquire/Hold

Figure 4-21.

4-214. Twk/Hold

4-215. The
the

value

This

is illustrated

FiEure 4-22.

Track/Hold

of

+TRACK

a varying input

MOoE

Waveforms

Sample/Hold

Circuit Position.

Mode.

Mode is

useful in

voltage

in

Figure 4-22.Following

VOLTAGE
LEVEL MEASURED
AT THIS

TIME

O MODE EEGINS WITHIN

NANOSECONOS

ElPT OF

MEA5gREMENT

iX]ER^iAL

SAMPLE/HOLD

TRIGGER

lllustrating

determining

at a specific

a complete

ANALOG

DIGITAL

CONVER

CIRCUITS

AFTER

THE

TRIGGER

S/H

pERroD-

1490a'B

Track/Hold

time.

TO

SION

-/

3430

Mode.

__-"

4-217. Acquire/Hold
Track/Hold
between
command
in Figure

operation, except that

receipt of

and

4-23. This

Sample/Hold amplifiers

operation is essentially

an

the time the

delay

to
voltage before holding
making it

possible

to
command simultaneously
lengih
as shown

4-21

the

of

inTable 44.

Table

Range

1V

10v

100 v

1000 v

8.

Sample/Hold

is

delay

dependent upon the

44. Acquire/Hold Delay.

Option 050

615.0rts1400ns
ps

rrs
ps

t
t

t

154.0

615.0

154.0

Mea$rement

4-219. Figure 4-31 shows
Sample/Hold
sequence.

a change
cannot
measurement.
quickly
a complete
ment, the
A

until

is

held by B while

circuits

and
Sample/Hold Circuit A can
in voltage

hold a

at point

fixed level

Sample/Hold

A,

but

can

hold

as

measurement.

voltage

Circuit

is

sampled

B has time

the

measurement

a delay

external

respond

and

apply

with a

400
400 ns
400

Sample/Hold Trigger

Hold Mode

permits

begins, as shown

the DC Input

fully

taking

a measurement,

a Sample/Hold Trigger

step input

Delav

Option

512.6

ns

128.4

512.6

ns

128,4

Sequence.

simplified

a
describes

diagram of the

the

respond

2. However,

long

enough

for

Circuit B cannot
a fixed level
In

a

by Circuit

to

respond. Then

long

Sample/Hold measure-

A,

is completed.

the same

is

as

added

and

to

step input

a

voltage.

The

range selected,

060

ps

t

ns

400

t

ns

4p0

tts

zl00

i
+

400

ns
ns

trs

tts

measurement

quickly to

this circuit

a complete

respond as

enough for

then

held by

the voltage

1-ll

Model3490A

Section

IV

4:220.
measurement
sine
events

Traci
until

Waveforms

and

wave,

occurring

Sample/Hold

Mode

receipt

the

command.

For

connected
period,
iatrnot
voltage

and

used.

be

present

sequence

measurements,

from

to

the

the Sample/Hold

voltage

The

a.

waveforms
3T4,

S. nre

in

the algebraic

is

voltage

shown

for

accompanying

the

the

during

completion

the

the

of

reason'

this

input

the

normal

auto-zero
Consequently,
its output.

in

measurement

point 6

at

Figure

4-31)

sum

point 4

at

@

OUTPUT

DC+

OF

INPUT

AMPLIFIER

Figure

in

single

a

notations

measurement

circuits

the

of

next

Sample/Hold

DC

the

terminals

cycle

there

This offset

voltage

(refer

during

the voltages at

of

sum of

is the

n'z

zOK

illustrate

4-31

measurement

on a

indicate

sequence'

in

be

must

one measurement

Trigger
Input Amplifier
during

this entire

of this amplifier

is a slight offset

is-removed

from

as follows:

to the diagram
the

run-up

period,

points 4 and

the input

signal

AMPLIFIE R

O

the

the

In

the

and

is

A

83"

sz

held by
Input
period
the
the

held
exists.

the

Sample/Hold

Amplifier. The

is the inverse of

voltage at

Sample/Hold

b. During

point

circuits

run-down, when

by the Sample/Hold

The voltages

voltage

is equal

6

at points 4

Input Amplifier's offset

&221. Sample/Hold

4-222. Circuit

diagram of

Sample/Hold Circuit

Analog

Figure 424 contuns a simplified

A.

operation.

INTEGRATOR

+t7vrt7V

cAPAclroR

circuits

at

the

offset voltage.

to

(V4 +

V5

and

point

5

the input

=

input

the

during

the reference

and

the

same condition

5 add,

circuits,

from the voltage at

Circuits.

A

and a discussion

offset

of

the

Ideally,

signal

held

signal).

voltage

removing

point

6.

the

same

then,

by

the

its

of

is

the

a. In
amplifier. This
amplifier
integrator.

b.
capacitor
\toltage

c. When
iunction

provided

d. Sl is

to E through

Track Mode,

between

For each

to

the

across

the
capacitance
by 53,

closed

NOTEr Sl,S2,A53

SWITCIES,
STIOWN

T.

circuit consists

nar

appropriae

the

Hold

which

any

Sl

points

C and

level

capacitor,

comnrand

of

this FET.

alters

during

the Hold Mode.

stray capacitance

ARE

AND ARE

IN THE TRACK

MODE STATE

l-

'.,r,*f

of

ln this Hold Mode,

v-tNTERNAL

-...

open,

is

of a

output

level.

the voltage on

CAPACTTANCE

| _,^

\,,

and 53

52

non-inverting amplifier

D. Very

occurs, the

small

voltage

When a Hold A

current alters the \roltage

This

This

or through

FET

closed.

are

currents

blas

point

at

command is

the voltage

gate

voltage on

its

associated

limits the amount of voltage

the internal

circuit from

The

with

are

D, current

point

at

the FET

capacitor at

capacitance

gain

a

required

flows

received,

R20

R2l

7t

K

7tK

-t7v

-LCIO

56

T'oo

I

v

3490-8 - l39l

point

of 4 between

the

by

through 52

opens and

52

remains constant while a measurement is

D

52

switch

on the integrator

the

other

change

FET switch

of

point

A

FET

goes

input

to

rcgatiw,

at

D operates as

points

source-followers

to readjust the \roltage across

no more current is supplied

capacitor.

to

the amplifier in a similar

point

during the

52

C,

B and

causing a current to

Compensation

prevents

C, and

Hold Mode.

followed

in the input stage

inverting

an

by an

the integrator

complEted.

flow through the

for
fashion.

currents

unity€ain

integrating

of the

to chang€

effect is

this

going

from

the

C

Figure

4-24. Simplified

Diagram and Operation of S/H Circuit A.

+23

Section

IV

Model3490A

(D

R8

-

20K

OF

OUTPUT

CIRCUII

S/H

S4,S5, AND

FET

SWITCHES.

4-223. Circuit

B. A simplified

Circuit B is shown

ARE ALL
CONDUCTING) FOR

HOLD MODE.

in Figure

OFF

diagram

4-25. The
Sample/Hold Circuit B is similar
Circuit A. Circuit B
able to

hold a constant
accurate measurement
for Circuit B
command

occurs
command. The purpose
Figure 4-25
for

dielectric

between

responds

more slowly than

output level

to

completed.

be

to respond to the

about 2 milliseconds

of the

points

D and F

absorption

in the integration

output

amplifier

cr2.

4-224.
the
across
illustrated

This
Hold inreerator

I

Dielectric

memory

the

capacitor is

by

l.

Charge a capacitor

2.

Quickly
small

3.

Disconnect

4.

The
slowly

applied
quite
counts

ment.

phenomenon

rl

Absorption.

effect

of a

changed

the following

discharge the

load

resistance.

the load

voltage

from

zero in the

in

step

slowly,

of

error

across the

but

becomes

circuit

when

Dielectric

dielectric

suddenly.

example:

to a given

capacitor to

resistor.

direction

l. This voltage

could contribute

in the

significant

the

55 ARE

THEY

(NOT

THE

A-B-3433

J490

Figure 4-25.

of

Sample/Hold
operation

to the

long

operation

enough

To

allow

of A, the

after

the

circuit shown

is to

compensate

absorption is

when the

This

voltage.

zero

capacitor

will increase

of the

will develop

Sample/Hold

in

the

voltage

applied to

+I7V+I7V

R58
7tK

Simplified Diagram

of

of

A

is

and

for

an

time

B

Hold

A Haid

in

capacitor,

voltage

may

be

with

a

voltage

several

measure-

Sample/

this

INTEGRATING

-t7v

R39

7r K

D A

COMPENSATION

R36

t8

roo

Ja+z

v

of

Circuit

S/H

circuit

changes from the input

voltage, which is

4-225. Compensation
prevent
due to

deterioration

dielectric absorption,
between the
input to the
and F in Figure
help to
(DA)
and
output

the rc
Cl6
across

amplifier
opens
present

illustrate the

Compensation circuit.

(Figure

36

voltage at

circuit R34, Cl6

assumes the new

R6 is

input.

and the voltage

at
allowing Cl8 to begin
proportional
voltage
As

at

the

time increases between
integrating capacitor and the
for

compensation decreases,

provided

4-226.

tion,

also decreases.

Ottset

the Auto Zero
disabled; consequently, some
present

in
included in
A

B.

and

During

of the

measurement

B.

opposite in

of the

output

of Circuit B

integrator portion

4-25). The

action

4-25)
point

applied

to

When

that

moment.

the

to

charge

point F is the

Amplifier. During

circuit

the amplifier
the

voltage held

both the

period,

@

S5

signal to

polarity.

for

Dielectric Absorption.

Sarnple/Hold

an amplifier circuit

the

and

this

of

circuit

waveforms in

of the Dielectric

During

are closed.

the

Any

D causes current

and R6. This

voltage. The

Cll

and

a Hold B

across

56 also

charging

current

resulting

the

DA

command

Cl I remains

opens

slowly

toward

on C11. The

voltage

developed

a

voltage change

Hold

B command,

and the

Sample/Hold opera-

for the DC Input

offset

voltage may

output. This offset

by Sample/Hold

run-up

and run-down

the input to the

@

OUTPUT

R34

tooK

ct6
o.47

v

R6
toK

the

reference

output

signal

is

used

non-inverting

(pqints

Figwe

4-26

Absorption

Track

Mode,

change in

to

flow through

decreases

voltage

Compensation

occurs,

the

at

level

this

at

time,

a voltage

compensating

across

Cl8.

at the

the

need

compensation

Amplifier is

will

Amplifien

portions

Input

DC

To

D

55

the

as

55

be
be

Model3490A

Section

IV

HOLO 8

crRcurr B

OUTPUT( ooint

'

VOLTAGE ACOSS

(poinr

R5

oa coMPENsATtoN
AMPLIFIER OUTPUT

(

Dolnl H)

"

*

coupeNsaltlc

VOLTAGE ACROsS

(polnr

F)

*

lye

WITHOUT

Amplifier
present. This

Amplifier and
voltage
purposg
mentioned in

4-227.

e outpur

COTPENSATION

*

TxEsE

1490-8-3432

Figure

ILLUSTRATION.

4-26. Dielectric

is shorted,

offset voltage

subtracted

the input to the

at

ald action of

Paragraph

Output Amplifier. This unity-gain

amplifier inverts

+4V

OV

+lov

O)

-tov

+t8OmV

ev

G)

+l80mv
+l8Omv

^.,

VY

-l8OmV

CIO

OV

wav€FoRMs

CANNOT

Absorption

and its output

the

4-220.

the

output from

EXAGGERATEo

8E

OSSEFr'ED

puRposEs

FoR

ON OSCILLOSCOPE

Compensation.

is only the

inverted

is

from the

by the

Sample/Hold

S/H Output Amplifier.

Offset Amplifier

Circuit

B

oF

offset

Offset

sigral

The

are also

inverting
(less

the

Offset Amplifier
Integrator (A
shown
selected,
the

Sample/Hold

4-228.

4-229.
Hold logic
discussed
the

main

Hold

measurements
track the
The

modified

Input

Amplifier

ods.

The

proper
dance
controlled

-

to

in Figure

th9 DC

Sample/Hold

Fipre

delay

with the

44,7

circuits.
in the
timing

input

timing

Sample/Hold

for

by

an Algorithmic
brief explanation
4-90.

4-290.
in
timing

4-231.
Sample/Hold

tal-controlled
divided
sigral
desigred

Timing

Figure

4-28

and trigger

Sample/Hold

by 16, so

has

for

and

details

State

Clock

a frequency

60 Hz

output)

-

4-31. If
Input
circuits

and applies

D

Conversion)

Sample/Hold

Amplifier

through

Logic Circuits.

is

a block

The

function

following

signals

to

and

reference

during

Acquire/Hold

range selected.

of

Trigger

circuits.

Clock comes

that

paragraphs.

must

allow the

grounds

also

the

logic circuits

an

ASM

Circuits. The

the circuits

State
Oscillator,

the

of

line

operation,

this

voltage

circuit

through

operation

output

signal

K2.

diagram

be modified

of the

of

The

each

sequence

for

Sample/Hold circuits

signals

run-up

the proper

at

the

input

to the

and run-down

also determine

measurements

The

logic

circuits

State Machine

will

be found

(ASM).

paragraph

in

block

and

sigrals

used

Clock. The input

from

the 34904

A1U3.

Sample/Hold

250 kHz

This

State

in instruments

and

208.3

to

the

Kl,

as

is

not

by-passes

Sample/

block

is

of

Sample/

to

times.

DC

peri-

the

in

accor-

are

A

diagam

in

the

to

the

crvs-

signal

is

Clock

kHz

in

SAMPLE/AOLD CL@K

SMPLE/HOLO

INHIAIT

r*m

PANET

CONTROLS,
F€MOI€
oa asl

MAIN

FRil

@nEo

CATE

wtcH uusT
PL

E TEO FOR
3490A TO
WITA
iErcV€D

g$A

FFOM

CL@K

O$ILLATOR

EXTEiNAL

TRIGGEA

$MPLE/HOLD

FFW

A$II

@TION

TURN.ON

CLEAF

g9OA

FROM
MAIN

LGIC

"A^G€

r"orr

[

S

,/

OPTION. \ ENAALE

gH

OpTtoN

I
\MODE

TIMING

SIGNALS
{TrME BtTSC,8,A)
34SA

MAIN

LOGIC

ßATIO

rcLARITY

NOTE

I

LrNES r{Or.

SIGNAI PAGS

BE

Cq.

THE

EERATE

SAIPIEAOLO

MAIN

I

I

yr

uooe

)

sELEcrEo

Tos/H

I

HoLo

a

/äl$t?,".

I

NOLD A '

MAIN TIMING

SIGNALS

TO E SWITCHING

-

IO

STATE STOAAGE

Flgure

4-27.

Sample/Hold

Logic Block Diagram.

(SOU€NCE
WH€N

MOOE

S

TO rcO

OISLAY POLAFITY

IO

OI$LAY ANO

g9OA

Sß

OR N[

MAIN

MODIFIEO

MOOE

SEIECTEDI

S€LECTEO

@Trfr

LGIC

IOGIC

+25

Section IV

STATE

CLOCK

HSHC

SELECT

DELAY
IHOSA,
MEMORY STORAGE

HDSEI

FROM

Model3490A

LINES

SAMPL€/HOLD TRIGGER

IHEHCI

llrsHt

FROM

FRoM

ascrl

50 Hz instruments.
nals which
used to
flip-flops.
storage
Memory
The
Hold sigral

4-232. Timing
ing

Counter is
outputs from
Translator,

levels

circuits.

applied

are

opposite in phase,

clock

the

All

six

the

at

same time.

Storage

clock signal

from

Counter

a

this

which

to the

Three

to the

0 V to + 5

outputs

Delay

to

the

the Acquire/Hold

outputs go

4-233.

Memory
from
operation
Hold
command
Hold

the

command

The

and is

Table

Delay

Storage

its

four

is

Trigger

immediately.

mode,

length

and the

delay

required

related

4-5.

to

the

Qualifier

Multiplexer.

input

selected,

Circuit output

the

multiplexer

of

delay

to

EXTERNAL

TBIGGER

(LXEN}

FROM

MEMORY

Two

Sample/Hold

State

"next-state"

Storage

One-half

flip-flops

the

Timing

Sample/Hold

and Level

l4-stage

binary

counter

converts

V levels

from

Multiplexer

delay. The

Multiplexer.

Two

select

the

lines.

the

multiplexer

When

between

actual

beginning

is

determined

the

DC Amplifier

EXTEfrNAL

ENASLE

STORAGE

Figure

4-28. Block

HSHC

and Memory

signals

clock

are

clocked

Counter is

Trigger

Translator.

counter/divider.

are

applied

the

counter

used

the

trvel

and

other two

Delay

Select

Delay

Multiplexer

If

Track/Hold (no

selects

and issues

operating

(Hold

output

the

receipt

of

a Hold condition.

the

by

gain,

TO

OUALIFIER

MULTIPLEXER

Diagram

State Clock sig-

and

LSHC,

are

Storage

are clocked

cycle

into

later, the

simultaneously.

gated

by the

circuit.

The Tim-

Four

to the

output

kvel

logic

by subsequent

Translator

arg.

used in selecting

kvel Translator

lines

from

output

delay)

the

Sample/

a Hold

in the

A

Acquire/

A) determines

of

a Hold

range selected,

as shown

in

LSHC

STATE

of

INVERTED

CLOCK

Timing

S/H

Range

100 v

1000 v

*

Measurement

Operation on this

amount of

and

V.

,1

1V

10v

Table

TO

Trigger Circuits.

4-5.

DC

Amp

Gain

xlOO
xlO
xl
xlO
xl

accuracy is not

Gaussian

age. If these conditions

Sample/Hold measurement.

also

enables the Clock

start

the Timing

quence

Internal

is

begun, the

Hold Command
which continues
remainder
sigral

EXTERNAL

of the measurement. At the

the Memory

from

ENABLE LXEN

TRIGGER,

EXTERNAL

;s,t3i5'/rp,ly,ffi

OUALIFIEF

MULTIPLEXER

1490-8-3440

Gain Delay Relationship.

Delay

Select Nominal Delay

HDSEHDSA

L

H

L

H

L

range is not recommended
(thermal)

L
L

H

L

H

specified

noise

Option 060

2048.8

512.6

128.4

512.6

124.4

for

present.

are correct, this

The

External

Gate, allowing

Counter.

Read Only

to

enable the

After

(through

Storage

the

the

measurement

Memory

Memory

Clock Gate for the

sets the

TRIGGER COMMANDS

INHIBITED

(psl

Option

05t0

2458.5

615.0
154"0

615.0

154.O

the

.1 V

due to

range.

the

begins a

Hold H pulse.

Clock signal

issues

Storage)

same time,

External

to

se-

an

a

4-23.
the
Sample/Hold
ing

Sample/Hold

Sample/Hold

Trigger

one-shot

circuit
approx-rmately
nal

Hold

H.

This
inhibit
Ertemal
Ertemal

l-'h

sigral.

Hold

Triaeer

LISH,

Trigger

Trigger

pulse
whose

40

microsqconds

output

may

from

H

output

Enable

signal

Circuits.

timing

is

applied to a pulse-stretch-

output

be inhibited

the

must

Figure

sequence.

is a positive

in

width, called

by

ASCII

option. Also,

be enabled

from

the Mem'ory

4-29

An external

a

LOW

by a LOW

shows

pulse

Exter-

true

the

Stor-

EXTERML HOLD H

HEHS

I NTERNAL

COMMAND

Figure

HOLD

H

IHC

H

4-29. Sample/Hold

l3O

rs--J

Trigger Timing.

Model3490A

Section

IV

HIGH,

Trigger

Sample/Hold
measurement
initiated
if the
mode,

+235. Read

Memory

Sample/Hold
in the

determine

ROM
step
sequence.

+236.

circuits are
that
of
which are
clock signal, HSHC.
are stored in a selectable
clocked
sigral,
outputs
because HSHC
qualifier
from the
negative-going
method,
and
time.

4-23!.
t9
determine
qualifier

multiplexers.

Enable

internally

3490A

if triggered

or

"present"

provides the

to

be

State

six

all

the next state

by

LSHC. Consequently,

are clocked

inputs,

ROM,

all

all

memory

Oualifier

the

ROM,

inputs

signal
Trigger
sequence.

by

is operating

Memory.

Only

(ROM) is

Logic

state, along with

the next

cleared

of

clocked

the

state

the

state of

proper

taken

and Memory

when

the

State Storage outputs

outputs

negative-going

and

LSHC are

as well

are clocked

edge

of the
storage
storage

Multiplexers.

along

next-state

are

Selection

pulses for the duration

the Intemal

the front

by

the central component

control

in the

the 3490A

by the

The other four

into storage

as

circuits

circuits

with

outputs

selected

is

inhibiting any

A measurement may

Hold

Command signal

the

in

circuits.

the

outputs

Sample/Hold

Storage. The

are

positive-going

input

the

into

clock signal,

the six present-state

determined

automatic sampling

panel pushbutton.

A

microcircuit

Six memory

"qualifier"

two

ROM. In

to

determine the

is

first tumed

stored

next state

storage

edge

ofthe

all

six

at the same

opposite in phase.

control

memory storage

are clocked

are clocked

The

two

from

by two

Read

each

measurement

State Storage

are

LOW. Two

in

D Flip-Flops

edge

unit,

inverted

ROM next

signal

HSHC. By this

at one

at another

qualifier

the

ROM. These

8line to lline

three

bv

further

of the

also be

Only

of the

inputs

inputs,

state, the

next

on.

so

of the

outputs

which is

clock

state

time,

The two

outputs

the

by

time,

inputs

inputs,

of the

present-state

HPC.

ut-238.
ing sequence

in Figure
must
order

for the

measurements.

portions

upper part
measurement
signals
state

sequence

modified

Sample/Hold in the
not

modified;
circuit
Sample/Hold

zl-239.
surements,
Sample/Hold

formation

logic level

supply
proper
plished
gate

output is
HIGH.
output
input

to

the polarity

then

inverted
When
to

the
polarity
both the gate

level

of the

..Ratio

outputs

Sample/Hold

for

4-30. The

be

modified

circuits

The states

of the

of Figure

(not

as

received

for

as shown.

however,

equal

to

State Clock.

Reference

the

3490A

amplifiers.

derived

of the

the

correct

reference

Exclusive

by an

HIGH

If

both

is

LOW.

gate

the

signal

and

Sample/Hold

Exclusive

signal

at

and

Display

Polarity

signal

from

State

Measurement

a Sample/Hold

states

of

for

Sample/Hold

to track

of

these signals

measurement

4-30.

The

Sample/Hold)

the

by

Sample/Hold

a Sample/Hold

During

the

Polarity

from
polarity

voltage

inputs

In

is

at

becomes the

OR

the

the

a normal

3490A),

there

duration

Logic.

input

Consequently,

the Integrator

signal

display polarity

for run-down.

OR

if

one and

are either

Sample/Hold

always

operation

at the gate

LOW, so its

the

other input. The gate

gate

other input

inverter;

Polarity

Storage FIPA,

Sequence. The

measurement

Main Time

the input

cycle

states shown

the timing

is

a delay

signal

gate

only one

Display

is not

is

not

consequently,

signal

input.

Bits

measurements

voltage between

are

the states

are

logic circuits.

measurement

measurement (with

of one

In

Sample/Hold
is inverted

the polarity

is incorrect.

must be inverted

and to select

and an inverter.

HIGH

measurements,

selected,

always HIGH.

is

then inverted

is the

HpB

and

tim-

is

shown

B

C,

and A

for the

various

shown

bit sequence

in

This

of its inputs

or

output

Polarity

for

a normal

the

cycle

is

LOW, the

output

one

the

same

in the

of these

The

is then

Storage

of the

mea-

in

the

The

the

accom-

The

one

follows

signal.

input

The

logic

as

in

is

in-

to

is

is

by

the

4-27

Section IV

SAMPLE/HOLD MEASUNEMENl
SEOUENC€. NOT
TIME

MAIN

NOBMAL MESUßEü€NT

SAMPLE/HOLD MEASUßEMENT

HOLDACOMMANO

IHHDAI TRÄCX

HOLD BCOMMAND

IHHDBI

Oß VOLTAGE

TIME BITS C 8A

N SWrrCHrNG)

{TO

NOTE

IRACK/HOLD

3

OFAWN

SCA!E.

HOLO

TO

9H IRIGGER

42701

c8a

@

11i

GATE

Model3490A

011

il!

INPUI

AMPLIFI€R

SHORTEO

I

I
I

-F-­ill
Ul

i

--j

+enrune

s

rlME=4mBüAX

R€F!RErcE
AT THIS

POINT

VOLTAGE

IO
il0

MLIED

Ll--

r10

0r0

rrpur

lueuFrER sHoRTEo

0t0

111

VAAYING INPUT

STEP INPUT

r

SAMPLE/HOLD

TRIGGER

COMMANO
THIS PERIOO.
BEGINS

N SHOWN.

g$a

2. tf
pLE

FATE

s€T

ENCODE

COMMAND

rNG

TH€ PBEVTOUS

AN

ENCOOE
NEXT PERIOO
SUREMENT.

3, MAIN

TIME

MAL

MEASUFEMENT

TXES€

SIGNALS

HOLO

L@IC.

MODIFIEO

IO THE

PL€/HOIO

MEASUR€MENTS.

VOLTAGE

ortoroo.,

NOr€S

WILL ACCEPf

AT ANY

PEFIOD

ENOS

rs

t(

HoLD

tFoß

To aoLD'

aND aN

WAS NOT

pERlOO.

COMMANO

SEFOBE

AND PfiOCEEDING

SIT

STATES

ARE THE

AS APPLIEO

TIME

8IT SE@ENCE IS

SfATES

I

l- oruY
;

RESPONSE

AN

EXTEFNAT

TIME

DURING

ANO HOLD

MOOE

€XAMPL€,

ExTEANAL

APPIIEO

A9OA WAtS aO8

GOING TO

WITH MEA.

FOR

SHOWN

STAfES

TO THE

SAMPLE/

THEN

SHOWN FOR

J

--Jl
ri--

SAM.
DUR-

NOA.

OF

SAM,

Figurb 4-30.

Sample/Hold

Measurement

Sequence.

HOLD

FEF.

ll
It

*$-c-3$a

j-tE

I

./
;'

I

!:

-J

tfr

ii

,:t

,a

:i

t

.=!

rt

*{

;it,;

ii

TERMINAL

INPUT

-

REFERANCE<

+ REFERANCEJ

GRouN0

GNAL

S

PATH

T{
I

V

OTHER

349OA

CONTROL ANO

TIMING

CIRCUITS

/H NOT

SELECTED

3490

INTEGRATOR

i

:r

.:

J

*

ai

j

:J
,l

'f

I
I

a'

During

lnput

P' .f'1r

holds

c. At

d'

3To

e'

From

f'

At t5,

Hold

54

9.
h'

sg

i'

At

the

terminal.

a

S/H T-rigger

about

t2,

54

is the

t4to

s4

B

occurs

is

switched

is

switched

t0,

all

EXAMPLE

period

2

milliseconds

is switched

run-up

t7,sg

is

switched

at t6.

ground

to

to

the

circuits

are

circuits

6T1,

command

later.

ground.

to

time

for the

is crosetJ

to

the - Reference.

at t6,

lntegrator

returned

OF TRACK/HOLD

are in

the Tract+,Mode

is received.

is

settling

2T3

integrator.

ground

to

and

input

to

the

and

6T7

during

Track

sg is

no

5T6

is used

MEA-SUREMENT

Circuit

A holds

time

for

connected

current

is

suppried

is about

for

amplifier

tg

the

is

7Tg.

Mode

and

s4

and

the

to

4 ms

zero

is again

SEOUENCE

in'put

switch

within

400

amplifiers.

the

I ntegrator

to

the

long.

Hold

settling

time.

detect

connected to the

SA is

nanoseconds,

inpu.

Integrator.

A

occurs

point.

connected

and

Circuit

2

ms after

lnput

terminal.

to the

t5

and

B

1.

Waveforms

Decay

of

are

circuit

not

A

drawn

output

to

time

signal,

o,

"o,,rn"

v3,

is eägger;d

I?[lt

for

the

purpose

of

this

iilustration.

rIOLD

A1

b_HOLD

rll

I

NOTE 2

B

|
gort

tO

;-

-

----+prr2{zrs.i*--

tt t2

l_ i h---l*--r i"'

t3

3r4

------+

qrs

t4 t5

sre

I

I

l.--

t6

ll

-----f

zra

Figure

I

ero

l8

4-31.

Sample/Hold

MeaSurement

-+--

I

-_____-

tO

or r

Simplified

Diaeram

And

Seqüence.

Section V

nstrument

I

Type

Table

5-1. Recommended

Required

Characteristics

Test

Equipment.

Use

Recommended

Model 34904

Model

DC Voltage

AC

Resistance Decade

Electronic

Test

Standard

Calibrator

Counter

Oscillator

DC Differential

Voltmeter

DC Digital

Voltmeter

Oscilloscope

DC Null

Voltmeter

Capacitor

Voltage: I
Accuräcy:

Frequency:
Output
Accuracy
Voftage

for

mV to 1000
1

0.005 %

20 Hz

Level: 1 mV to

(midlcand):

Stability: ! O,O2"Ä

six months

Resistane: 100 A to
Accuracv:

Frequenry:

Frequency:
Output:

Voltage Range:
Resolution:

Voltage Range:
Resolution:

Bandwidth:
Sweep: 0.1
Sensitivity: 1 V/div

Delayed

Delayed

negative-going
>2Vamplitudeand
> 30

Voltage

Capacitance: 1.0
Voltage:

i

0.004 %

50

to

3 Vrms into

1

rrV

10

DC to 10

to 1 sec/div

,is

Sweep
Gate

Output:

ns

wide

Range: 100

vdcw

20

Hz to

25O

1 V

10

//V

pulse

pF

to

kHz

50

mV

mV ro

V

1OO

kHz

10OO

r

0.1

1O Mtr,

60 Hz

s,

to

1

MHz

Performance
Adiustments

Troubleshooting

Performance

V

Adiustments

%

Troubleshooting

Performance
Adiustments
Troubleshooting

Performance

Performance

Performance

OO0 V

Adlustments
Troubleshooting

Performance
Adiustments
Troubleshooting

lOO

V Adiustments

Tlou6leshooting

Päiformance

Checks

+rp- Model

Differential

Checks

Checks

tro- Model

-trp-

Model

ier

Amplif

Radio Model

General

GR 1433-2 Decade
Resistor

Checks {rp- Model

Measuring

Checks +rp-

Model

Oscillator

Checks +rp- Model

Difterential

*rp- Modet

Digital Voltmeter

Checks

Checks +rp- Part

+rp-

Mod€l 18OC/D

1

with

8O1 A and

plugin

units

-hp-

Model

Voltmeter

No.

DC

7408

Standard/

Voltmeter

745A AC Calibratol

7464 High Voltage

53OOA/5302A

System

Test

6524

34208 DC

Voltmeter

34808/3484A

Orcilloscope

1

A

821

419A DC Null

01 60-261

I

t:il:

.:l

t

tE

5-C,

Resistors

Thermal

Converters

Square Wave

Silicon Diode

Resistor

C€lcu lator

Logic

Comparator

Generator

Resistanc€s:

1

ka i 10 %

lokf,} 10.1

1Mf,,rO.1

%

70

Voltages:

1V

3V

Frequency: 100
Output Level:

Time:

Rise

(20

v

piv

(50

20 V

10 kn

GPI 8us Control

Must serve
34904 output

Capable of in+ircuit

of

dual in line

Capabilitv

printer

as

data

TTL lC

Hz to 1

p-p

for

check

kHz

packages

Performance

Performance

Performance

Checks +rp- Part

Checks +rp- Model 1'l051A

Checks
Adiustments
Troubleshooting

Performance
Adiustments

Performance
Adlustments

GPIB Ooerational Check
GPI B Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting

Checks

Checks

No:
0684-r 02 l
06984157

0698.6369

+lp-

Model 11O5OA

+p-

Model

Function

+rp- Part

3310A

Generator

No. 1

901 {040

+|p- Part No.0684-1031

-hp-

9820A

with fip-

I nterface

Control ll

-hp­Logic

11144A

and Perioheral

105297

Probe

Calculator

ROM

Block

ASCII Bus

Äi

Model34904

Section

V

TNTB0DUCTIoN.

5-r.

section

This

5-2.

procedures

ment

performance

operating

ment

within its

procedures are

instrument

RECOMMENDED TEST

5.3.

54. Test

and

equipment

adjustment

equipment

PERFORMANCE

S7.

5-8. Use the
whether

your

lished specifications.

tests

acy

and on the
the instrument
Table l-l
met

. However,

by other

contains

for the Model 3490A

tests determine

published

provided

within specification

required

procedures

that

satisfies

following test

instrument

The test limits

to

the 90-day specifications

if

specifications, such
Gmonth specifications,
accordingly.

tested

be

by

your

mined

The

upon

performance

receipt

accuracy
Spec. MIL{45662A.If
more

of its specifications,
Procedures,
ment

3490A

in

Figure

the

3490A

$9.

Paragraph

should

be

operated

panel

rear

line selector

2-1. Allow at least

before beginning

DC

VOLTMETER

performance

tests

Multimeter.

whether

your

instrument

specifications.

to help

you

maintain

limits.

EOUIPMENT.

the performance

for

is listed in

Table 5-l . Any

the critical specifications

TESTS.

procedures

is

opefating within its

performance

your

accuracy requirements are

the

test

limits

of the

and

at regular

requirements. Refer

the

3490A fails to meet one or

refer to the

5-51. The

3490A and test equip-

ät normal

switches set

one hour

the following

ACCURACY

to determine

given

in

test record compare

the

as
should

instrument

intervals

line

voltage with the

warm-up

tests.

TEST.

SECTION

MAI NTENAN CE

and adjust-

The

is

The adjust-

your

tests

given

PERFORMANCE

pub-

the

accur-

given

in

30-day or

adjusted

be

should

deter-

to Mil.

also

Adjustment

instructed

as

time

for

V

in the table

may be

model.

5.5. TEST RECOBD.

5-6. A Performance
of this

section for the

the

Performance
specifications
can

be removed
permanent
maintenance performed
may

be reproduced

sion.

CHECKS

c.

Select 3490A

negative

within

limits

$11. AC

5-l

Because

2.
3490A
required

Model

745A/746A

the

accuracy of
however,
cases

may not

3490A
Range

.1 V

and

record

outputs

shown in

VOLTMETER

of

ac voltmeter

to verify the

the

accuracy of

Table

DC

substituted for the

Test Record

purpose

Tests.

their
from the manual and retained
of the incoming inspection or routine

for

ranges

listed

each case.

the

voltage range

circuits, more than

AC Calibrator may be used

all ranges

great

be

5-2. DC

Standard

Output

r

0.010O0

r

0.05000

r

0.10000

recommended

provided

is

at

the

ofrecording the results of

lists

record

This

acceptable

all of the tested

limits.

This record

as a

the instrument.

on

your

use without special permis-

and dc standard

in Table

5-2. Display should

This record

positive

and

ACCURACYTESTS.

-hp

to

check

l0 kHz;

V

the

and bandwidth of

test setup is

one

accuracy specifications. The

frequencies up.to I

at

sigral

this

source alone in some

enough to ensure a valid test of

Voltmeter Accuracy.

Display Limits

V
V
V

t

.009995 to

l

.049990

t

.099985 to

.010OO5

to

.050010 V
.10001 5 V

end

be

5-10.
this

test.

a.

b.

LOW

A

dc voltage

Connect
the instrument

Set 3490A

Connect

dc standard

terminals.

standard

Guard to

Input

may result.

FUNCTION

between

(-hp-

7a0B) is required for

Low

or damage

to

DC, RANGE to

INPUT

HIGH

to

.l

V.

and

10v

100 v

1000

*

-hp-

lf

voltage

1V

v

7408 DC

greater

t

o.10000 v

r

0.50000 V

r

1.00000 v

1

1.00000 V

i

10.0000 v

1

10.0000

r

100.000

I

100.000

i

500.000 v

r+

1000.00 v

than

Standard

-

500

I

0.09997 to O.10003 V

I

0.49994 to

r

0.99990 to 1

!

00.9997 to 01 .Oq)3 V

t

09.9990 to 10.0010 V

V
V

v

V.

t

009.997

t

099.990 to

10099.97
r

0499.92 to 0500.08 V
(x199.86

+

is

used, do

0.50006

to

010.003
10O.O10

to

010O.O3 V

to 1000.14 V

not

apply

.0001O

negative

V
V

V
V

5-l

Section

V

PERFORMANCE CHECKS

Model3490A

the

3490A

chart

Such a
during

can

and
output. For example,

0.04%
precise
controls'to
ment control
then

20H2.

correction factor chart

745A1746A Operating

5-13.
frequencies
measurement technique
test setup

voltage to the

differential voltmeter
dc input

signal to
input
level
indication.
equal to the

5-14.
which
accuracy
ment needed
for

some
performance
for

which suitable

accuracy.

should

be

To verify the

simultaneously.

to

Table

be

chart

for the

routine

be used

high at I V, 20H2, the

1 V output. by setting

1.000000
to

sufficiently

To

determine the

above I l0

shown

from

the thermal

both the

return the

This

rms value

5-3

should

of

the

for

checks

can

be checked

In this case,

used

-hp-

periodic

to

set

if the

V and

+0.04%.

accurate

and

ac voltage

in Figure

thermal

for

thermal

Adjust the

differential

results in

of the

lists

the voltage

349OA, together

each check.

is not

still

be obtained

equipment

correction

a

to

adjust the

'745A1746A

calibration

the

745A controls

745A output

adjusting the error
The corrected

to test the

length

will

be valid,

Service Manuals.

t.

kHz, the

may

5-1, apply

converter

a null indication.

converter

converter

an rms value

dc standard

to

If

available, a good

is

calibrator

may

of the instrument,

is known to

745A

can

the

745A voltage set

3490A

of time that the

refer to the

accuracy

be employed.

the

available. r-..

of the

ac to

an

and

adjust the

and

and

test

oscillator

voltmeter

of the

output.

and frequency

verify

the

with the test

equipment

indication

by checking the points

factor

output.

be derived

for a precise

be

set

be

for a

measure-

voltage

dc transfer

accurate dc

Remove the

apply

the

will

I V,

at

latest

34904

at

Using

the

dc

the

ac
349OA
output

to

a null

ac signal

points

ac voltage

equip-

required

of

Connect Guard to Input Low or
the instrument

5.15.

OHMMETER
Preferred

5-l

6.

5-17. A

10
for the
required to check

'Ohmmeter

resistance
algebraic sum
decade error indicated
should

5-l

5-19. If
correction
the
within the tolerances given,
performance

3490A
shown

5.20. DC

5-21. Effective

the

resistance

MO is

required for this test. A correction

decade

function.

decade settings shown

be within

Alternate

8.
a suitable resistance

factor

values

shown

display should

from the

COMMON-MODE REJECTION

peak

common-mode

may result.

ACCURACY TESTS.

Method.

decade with settings from 100Oto

is

necessary

performance

the

Select

the

of

of the

34904

the correction

by

the limits

Method.

chart is not

in

Table

value of the resistor used.

common-mode

given

5-5, whose value is

3490A ohmmeter

be within the number

voltage

damage

to

achieve the

of

the

3490A ranges

in Table

reading and the resistance

for each

decade with

available, resistors

may be used to

to

factor chart

accuracy

the

34904

and

54. The

factor chart

listed.

setting

an appropriate

within

known to

check

function. The

of counts

TEST.

rejection is the ratio of

to the

resultant error in

(O

@\:d

t-,,,-----l

)@u

o-o

o

oo

Figure

5-1. AC

PUT

T

OU

CAELE

Voltmeter

High

Frequency

o@oo@

Accuracy Test.

MULTIMETER

hp 34904

DC

VOLTMETER

OIFFERENTIAL

/ RATIOMETER

hp 542O8

Model

34904

PERFOBMANCE

CHECKS

Section

V

3490A

Range

voltago

1V
1V
1V

10v
10v
10v

v

100

v

100

1000
1000

1V

v

v

1000 v
1m0 v

10v 3V 25O kHz

Table

Rang Docade Sotting Display Limits

39OA

ko

.1

lkn

ks}

10

100 ko

ka

1,Oq)

10,000 ko

Ohmmeter Accuracy.

54.

100 sr

10

100

10

with Guard connected to
7zt0B) is

a.

Connect

Low

terminals,

Figure

5-2.

b.

Set

Note

3490A

required for this

a I kQ resistor

and connect High to

3490A

display.

test.

FUNCTION to

Test Sisnal

1V
1V
1V

1V

5V

10v

10v

100 v

1V 25O

.099983 to .100017

1ks}

kn
ka

lMO

MO

High. A

0.99988 to 1.00012

09.9988

099.988 to
0!X,9.86 to 1000.14

09996.3 to 10003.7

dc

between

Guard as

DC.

Table 5-3. AC Voltmeter

Frequency

Hz

2Q

kHz

10

100 kHz

kHz

100

kHz

2O

Hz

2Q

Hz

100

kHz

50

1O kHz

100 Hz

kHz *

to

10.OO12
1O0.012

standard

input High

shown

RANGE to

(-hp-

3490A

Display Error

t

t

r

t
t

t

t

t
t

r

t

and

in

I V.

Max

400 counts

125 counts
125 counts

35 counts
75 counts

40O counts

35 counts

125 counts

135 counts
125 counts

810 counts

285 counts

the

reading
ing

AccuracY.

AC Calibrator

Test Oscillator

Test Oscillator

c.

Connect dc

3490A

chassis.

d. Set

dc

should not change

common-mode

dc

ECMR = 20log

Table

5€. Alternate

3490A

Range

.1 ko

1k:)

ko

10

1OO

ko

1,000 ko

10,000 ks)

Test

Signal

Source

standard

standard

output to + 500.00

rejection > 140 dB,

Peak

"

Effect on reading

Ohmmeter Accuracy Test.

110o

90to

to 1.1 ko

90O

9koto11

90kOto110kO

ko

90O

gMf}to

to 1.1

11MO

ksl

Msl

Other Equipment

Required

V Thermal

1
Converter
DC Differential
Voltmeter

3 V Thernul
Converter
DC Differential
Voltmeter

between Higfr terminal

more than

0.00005 V, verify­where:

common-mode

voltage

(volts)

Resistor

ToleranceValue Toleranca

t

o.oo25%

r

0.0025%

t

O.OO25%

r

0.0025%

r

0.005%

r

0.01%

t
t
t
t
*
I

V.

3490A

Display

17 counts
1 2 counts
12 counts
12 counts
14 counts
37 counts

and

DC STANDARO

/

DIFFERENTIAL

VOLTMETER

hp 74OB

eEo@oo

-a -

5490Ä

29a!

OUTPUT

CAELE

ho llO55B

Figure 5-2. DC Gommon-Mode Rejeaion

Test.

5-3

Section V

5.22.

AC

COMMON.MODE

5-23.

An

ac

counter (-hp-

a. Connect a

Iow

terminals, and

Figure

5-3.

calibrator

53004) are required for this
I kCl resistor

connect

REJECTION

(hp-

7a5A)

High to

b. Connect electronic counter
and adjust calibrator frequency
349OA is

!

0.1
c. Before connecting

set

3490A FLJNCTION

3490A

d. Connect ac calibrator

Figure

desigred for

if

it is a 50

%

reading.

5-3

and set output

60 Hz

Hz model.

ac calibrator

to DC.

to

voltage

peak).

e.

3490A

0.00001
common-mode
specified
Paragraph

AC

S24.

reading should

V from

(50

the reading

rejection

Hz

or 60 Hz),

noted in step

of 2140

using the

5-21.

NORMAL.MODE

REJECTION

and

between

Guard

to

calibrator

ac

to

60 Hz

line

operation,

output to

RANGE to

3490A

to

70.7 Vrms

not

change

dB at the

formula

TEST.

electronic

an

test.

input

High

as sfiown in

t

O.l % if the

I

indicated

as

more than

c,

verifying

frequency

TEST.

PEBFORMANCE CHECKS

c.

Set

short Input.

d.

Disconnect

3490A

and

output

Hz

50

3490A,

V. Note

in

(100

ac

given

in

V

(10

peak).

V

e. 3490A

I

16

00.3
normal-mode
where:

NMR = 20los

5.26.

DC VOLTMETER

5-27.

A dc

resistor

Connect Guard to Input Low

the instrument

a. Connect
Figure

in

3490A

FUNCTION to DC. RANGE to

Note 3490A reading.

shortandconnectcalibrator

input

input.

Adjust calibrator amplifier

reading should

V from

reading

rejection

of )50 dB

Peak

Effect on reading

may

3490A,

(hp-

result.

dc

standard and

standard

(-hp-

0698-6369) are required

5-5.

Model

to

7.07 Vrms

not

vary more

noted in step c. This

Hz

60

(volts)

for this

resistor

(or

voltage

test.

at

ac superimposed

INPUT

RESISTANCE TEST.

7a0B) and a I MA

or domage to

3490A

l0

verifies

50

!O.l%

shown

as

V.

to

than

Hz),

5-25.

AC normal-mode

normal-mode

voltage
An ac calibrator
(-hp-

5300A)

a. Connect

Do not

b- Using
calibrator
designed
is a 50

l0
i@@@@@@

are required

test

connect

an

electronic counter

frequency

for 60

Hz model.

AC

D

O

e

to

Hz line

rejection is

to the

(-hp-

7454)
for this

equipment

3490A input.

for

60 Hz

operation,

CALIERATOR

hp 7454

0 0

the

ratio of

resultant error

in

and an electronic

test.

as shown in

as

a monitor,

t

0.1

or 50.H2

0 0 00

o@

%

Figure

if

!

the peak

reading.

Counter

5-4.

adjust ac

3490A

O.1

%if

ELECTRONIC

COUNTER

hp

,-..

is
it

53OO

b. Set 3490A

c.

Connect

Adjust

dc

reading.

i^

-Remove

d.
ing should not change
input

resistance

e.

Set

1.00000 v.

CONN€CTEO
CHASSIS

1O

GROUNO

FUNCTION to

jumper

standard

jumper

) l0

across

output to 10.0000V.

from

more than

ro

Q.

DC, RANGE to

I M,fl

I MQ resistor. 3490A

3490A RANGE to 100

MULTIMETER

hp

349O4

r-------l

oQ

lOV.

resistor as indicated.

Note 3490A

read-

00.0010

V, verifying

V. Reduce input

I tlr

+T-F++F

U

oo

to

<t

Figure

AC Common-Mode

5-3.

Rejection

Test.

Model3490A

CALIBRATOR

AC

7454

hp

PERFOBMANGE

CHECKS

Section

V

nr-rnO0000

ä ö

<)

ffi r-r-I-T-'l -T-1
L4

e

f.

Connect

reading.

3490A

g.

Remove
between
input resistance

5-28.

5-29. A

resistors,

t

0.1 %
a. Connect

(\)
resistor as

000.908V

AC VOLTMETEH

test oscillator

I MO t O.l

(-hp-

06984157),arc
3490A, test oscillator, and

as shown

indicated.

ö

rrr-rrr--r]

jumper

jumper.

and

10 MQ

of

%

in Figure

o o--

ö

across

3490A

000.910V.

x

O-15

oD

t".f?

Figure

I MQ resistor and

reading should change

This verifies an

%.

ELECTRONIC

COUNTER

a')

oooo?

5-4. AC Normal-Mode

INPUT IMPEDANCE TEST.

(-hp

652A)

(-hp-

06984369) and

required for

5-6. Connect

two precision

and

this test.

I Mfl resistor

jumper

l0 kQ

across

hp53OO

­\

note

o

Remove

be not

the

have

Test.

jumper

less than

rear input connector,

Reiection

d.
should
not

0.65804 if it does
with the front input terminals.

e. Replace the l Mfl resistor
resistor. Connect

f. Adjust test oscillator frequency to

just

output

g.
play
does

0.41321

amplitude for

Remove

should

not

have rear

if it

V

jumper

be not

does

MULTIMETER

hD S49OA

-y50

5490-B

from resistor Rs. 3490A display

0.65975

V if

instrument

the

or

rear input connector in parallel

have a

(R5)

jumper

across resistor.

3490A

with a l0k{-2

reading of

from lOkfl resistor.

less than

O.492ll

input connector,

the

have

rear

V

or not

input.

n

F-

I

does

not less

than

250 kHz. Ad-

1.00000

3490A dis-

if

the 3490A

less than

V.

b. Set 349OA

c. Adjust test

output

amplitude to

1.00000 v.

3490A

FUNCTION to AC,

RANGE

oscillator frequency to 25H2. Adjust

3490A reading of

OUTPUT

hp

Figure

5-5. DC Voltmeter Input

DC

STANDARD/

-

B

2948

obtain a

DIFFERENTIAL

VOLTMETE R

ho 74OB

to I V.

CABLE

llO558

$30. SAMPLE/HOLD

(0ption

The dc

--5-31.
3490A must be

Resistance

040/045).

voltage

Test.

PERFORMANCE

meursurement

within

specification before

MULTI METER

hp

349OA

performance

proceeding

of

the

5-5

Section V

TEST OSCILLATOR

hp 652A

,,' \ l/-.----\l

(o)@L

\- /

@'\--O

34904-A-?947

'e

@ - @

Figure

PERFORMANCE

oo

5-6. AC

Voltmeter Input lmpedance

CHECKS

Test.

M

ULTIMETER

hp

349OA

Model

3490A

with the
Paragraph

Sample/Hold performance

5-9.
$32. Sample/Hold
5-33. A

procedure,

standard

dc

which checks
Sample/Hold circuits
Track/Hold

specified

not

Connect

and Acquire/Hold

for the

Guard

the instrument

a.
SAMPLE/HOLD
fully

b.

3490A

Set

clockwise.

Connect

FUNCTION

to

dc standard

terminals.

c.
negative
within

d.
repeat

3490A

Select

outputs

limits

shown

Set

SAMPLE/HOLD

step

c.

listed in

BC Mea$rement

(-hp-

7a0B) is

the

dc voltage

to

the

90-day specification

operation.

.l V range.

Input

to

Low

or damage to

mav result.

to

DC,

TRACK/HOLD,

between

ranges

and

dc standard positive

Table

5-6.

in each

case.

to ACQUIRE/HOLD

tests.

Refer

Aecuracy

Test.

required for this

accuracy

in

Accuracy is

RANGE

to

SAMPLE

input

High

and

Display

should

to

the

of

both

I V,

RAT.A,

Low

and

be

and

Table

5-6.

3490A

Range

100 v

1000 v

*

-hp-

lf

greater

\roltage

connäct

Enclode

b.

SEt

Sample/Hold

DC Standard

Output

r

than

pin

0.10000 V

r

0.50000 v

r

1.00OO0

1

1.00000

r

5.00000 v

I

10.0000

r

l0.0O0O

r

50.0000 v

r

100.000

1100.000

t

500.000

'+

1000.oo

Standard

-

5OO

Pulse

28).

1

V

10v

74OB DC

Stretched
(J7

3490A FUNCTION

V.

Output

DC

Accuracy

r

0.0998 to

!

0.4998 to

t

V

03997 to

v

100998

+

04998 to

!

V

09.997 to 10.OO3

t

V

009.98 to

t

049.98

v

I

099.97 to

t

v

0099"8 to

!

v

0499.8 to

r

v

0999.7 to

is

used,

(J7

tO DC,
SAMPLE/HOLD to TRACK/HOLD,
HOLD.

c.

negative

ms/div., Delayed

.1

oscilloscope

Set

slope, and

controls

for External

Main sweep.

sweep to I ps/div.

Check.

Display Limits

0.1002

V

0.5002 V

1.0OO3

V

to

01

.002 V

05.002

V
V

010.02 V

ro

05O.O2

V

100.03

V

0100.2

V

0500.2

V

1OO0.3

V

not

do

pin

l0)

RANGE

apply negative

to

External

tO

SAMPLE RATE to

Trigger,

Main

Set

sweep

IO

V,

to

$34.

Sample/Hold

5-35.

scope

A function

with

delayed

generator (-hp-

l80C/l80lAll82lA),
resistor
Sample/Hold
within
Output
pulse
amphtude

-r490A

f,.

Conne''r

are

the

from

at

ha:

required

circuits

stated

the

least

30

of

I

to

equipment

BCD

acquisition

oscilloscope

100

Remote

i+

Response Test.

sweep

and delayed

a silicon

for

this test,

will

respond

time.
must

nanoseconds

V.

as

shown

Expand

3310A),

diode, and
which
to a step

an oscillo-

gate

output

a l0kh

verifies that

input

voltage

The Delayed

be a negative-going

wide

and havins

in Figure

Option

5-7. If the
020, also

(-hp

the

Gate

an

d.

Set function

to

I

kHz, and

signal

as

e.

Adjust oscilloscope
fied trace
going

transition

which

should be near

f.

Adjust delay so

adjust

displayed

begins

of square

approximately 125

(stated

wave

is 128
reading noted

maximum

ps).

Reading should

in step e.

generator

output

on

oscilloscope.

to square

level

delay control

approximately

wave. Note

zero.

that

intensified trace

ps

after

negative-going

acquisition

be within

wave, frequency

for

peak-to-peak

20 V

so that

ps

450

after negative-

34904

edge

time

for l0

1

0.001

intensi-

reading,

begins

of square

V range

V of the

Model3490A

PERFOHMANCE

CHECKS

Section

V

FUNTION

g.

Set

h. Adjust

output level

i.

Set

j.

Adjust intensified trace to

GENERATOR

3310A/B

hp

oscilloscope

function

peak-to-peak.

to 2 V

349OARANGE

main sweep to .5 ms/div.

generator

after the negative-going
reading, which should

k.

Adjust intensified
after the
should

536.

5-37.
of the
proceeding

Paragraphs

$38. DC/DC

5-39.
are

negative-going

be within

RATI0

The dc

3490A

with

5-9

Preferred

necessary

PEBF0BMANCE

and ac

and 5-l

Ratio

check performance
and INPUT

voltage.

be near zero.

t

0.001 V of

voltage

must

be

the

ratio performance

l.

Accuracy

Method.

for

this

method,

at various

Both

Figure

to

frequency

I V.

to

approximately

edge of

trace to

edge

square wave.

approximately

of square

wave.

reading noted

(0ption

080).

in step

measurement performance

within

specifications

tests.

Tests.

Two

dc standards

making

levels

of EXT

dc standards

(-hp-

it possible

REF

must

be floating,

$7.

200H2,

I

Note

500

Reading

j.

before

Refer

7a0B)

voltage

ms

Sample/Hold

ps

to

"

to

OELAYED

GATE

TO

SAMPLE/HOLD
TRIGGER

AC

Response

since

IMUT

connected

go

ble,

a.

Set 3490A
Connect
adjust

standard

b.

Set 349OA
Connect
nals

and

OUTPUI

INPUT

Test.

internally.

to

Paragraph

a

dc

a second

adjust standard

display should

c.
listed
shovm

EXT

Select

in

Table

in each case.

540. Alternate
a second
stable
Both
be

.e

satisfaQtory

to

TION

voltage

to

within I

the

dc

standard

floating.

A

the secgnd

a.

Set

to

34904

DC,

source.

voltage

RANGE

OSCILLOSCOPE

hp lSOD

Low and EXT

If

only one

540.

RATIO

standard

output

to

to

3490A

+

0.10000 V.

FUNCTION

dc standard

output

+

be

0.99955 to

REF

and

5-7. Display

Method.

source

A dc standard (-hp-

having

mV/hr,

are required

and the

9.8 V

mercury

The

following procedure

source

RATIO

to

switch

10

V.

REF

switch

to

to

to

+

1.00045.

INPUT

should

an output

second

battery

as the

PLI.JG

IN

l80lA

hp

terminals

Low

dc standard

to

EXT

INPUT

DC,

3490A

RANGE

g.lgggg

+

ranges

terminals

IMUT

and

be within limits

of

l0

for

this

voltage

source

(Mallory

battery.

to INT

REF.

PLUG

IN

l82lA

hp

is

availa-

REF

to

termi_

V. 3490A

voltages

74OB)

+

V

method.

TN77)

will

FUNC_

are

I

V.

and

1

V.

and

5

%,

must

refer

is

Ext

Range

Ref

1V
1V
1V
1V
1V
1V

1V
10v
10v
10v
10v

Ext

Ref

Voltage

+

0.10000 v

'+

0.50000

+

1.00000v

+

1.00000

-

1.00000 v

-

1.00000 v

+

1.20000

+

1.00000 v

+

5.00000

+

10.0000

+

12.0000

Table 5-7.

Input

Range

v

v

v
v

v
v

100
100

DC/DC

1V
1V
1V
1V
1V
1V

1V
10v
10v

v
v

Ratio Accuracy

Input

Voltage

+

0.10000

+

0.50000

+

1.00000 v

-

1.00000 v

-

1.00000 v

+

1.00000

+

1.00000

+

1.00000

+

5.00000 v

+

100.000

+

100.000

v
v

v
v
v

v
v

Test.

Display

+

0.99955

+

0.99979

+

0.99982

-

0.99982to-

+

0.99982

-

0.999821o-

+

0.83316

+

09.9955

+

09.9979

+

099.979

+

083.31

to + 1.00045
to
to

to + 1.00otg
to + 0.83350

to
to + 10.0021
to

3

to

Limits

+

1.00021

+ 1 .00018

1.00018

1.00018

+

10.0045

+

100.021

+

083.353

5-7

Section V

PERFORMANCE CHECKS

Model

34904

b.

Connect

HIGH, - to

c.

Connect

set

standard

noted

in step b.

SET

d.

Display should be

Reverse

e.

should be

f.

Set

ofbattery

Set

C.

standard
noted in

+

10.0018.
Reverse

h.

should be

the battery

record

and

Note

LOW.

standard

dc

positive voltage equal to display

output

490A

to

RATIO

+

09.9982

polarity of dc standard output. Display

-09.9982

RATIO

connections.
RATIO switch

output

to - 10.0018.

switch

to INT

Note

to EXT

to negative voltage equal to display

step f. Dsplay should now be

polarity

-O9.9982

of dc standard output. Display

to - 10.0018.

i. Reduce dc standard output

used in step h.

j.

should

RATIO switch to EXT

Set

-09.9982

be

to - 10.0018.

to

IMUT

terminals, * to

3490A display.

to

EXT

REF

terminals

and

switch to EXT REF l0 V.

to + 10.0018.

REF. Reverse

and record

display.

polarity

REF 10V. Adjust dc

+O9.9982

to

to 1/10 the output

REF lV.

Display

External Reference

5-43.

standard

L dc

544.
(-hp-

resistor

a. Set

FUNCTION

b.

0698a157\ are

34904 RATIO

to DC, RANGE

Connect 3490A.

Input Resistance

7a0B)

Chp-

switch to

dc standard and

shown in Figure 5-8. Connect

c. Adjust dc

34904

display.

d. Remove
change more
input resistance

GPIB 0PEBATIONAL

5-45.

546. A General
printer

and a

3490A

Option 030.
in Paragraph 547,is a
any bus

controller.
essentially
the

9820A

operate

correctly,

information, P

standard output

jumper

across resistor.

than 100 counts, verifying an

of ) l0?

Purpose

required

are

Q.

Interface Bus system controller

to verify

procedures are

Two

general procedure to

The second, in

the same

calculator.

procedure

If

the

refer to the GPIB

ar agr aph

7 49 .

and a l0k9"tO.l%

required

for this test.

EXT REF

l0

to

V.

jumper

across

to + 10.0000

Display should not

CHECK

(0ption

the

Paragraph 5-49, is

written

3490A

I/o

Test.

l0 V.

l0 k,f)

resistor as

resistor.

V. Note

EXT REF

030).

used with

be

of the

first,

to

operation

given. The

specifically for

circuits fail

troubleshooting

AC/DC

S41.

5-42. A

(hp-7a5A)

a. Set 3490A

Ratio Accuracy Test.

dc standard

are required for

RATIO
Connect dc standard
standard

Connect
calibrator
be

listed in

output to + 0.10000 V.

b.

Set 3490A FUNCTION

ac calibrator to IMUT terminals and adjust

output to l00mV

0.99865 to

c.

Select EXT

Table

I

.00135.

REF

5-8.

each case.

Ext

Ref

Range

iV
1V

1V
10v
10v
10v
10v

(hp-

7a0B) and an ac calibrator

this test.

switch to EXT REF I V.

EXT REF terminals

to

AC,

to

at

INPUT

and

Display should

10.ooo0

12.0000

RANGE

l00Hz. Display should

ranges and

be as

Ref

Ext
Voltage

0.50000

1.00000

1.20000

1.00000

5.00000

and adiust

voltages

indicated in

Table 5-8.

v
v
v
v
v
v

v

r...

to I V.

AC/DC Ratio

I nput
Range

1V
1V

1V
10v
10v
10v
10v

Initialize

l.

LEOP

HEOP

LREN - Set

-

End

Set

-

Return End Output

Remote Enable LOW

2. Send addresses
address codes)

Multiple Response Enable LOW

LMRE

(77

?

(668)

6

Set

-

Universal unlisten command

s)

-

3490A listen address
mote mode)

HMRE - Set Multiple

3.

programming

Send

i)

Test

No. I

rJ

Accurary

Voltage

0.50000

1.00000

1.00000

1.00000

5.00000

10.0000

10.0000

Test'

lnput

v
v
v

v
v
v
v

Output

[.ow

to iligh

(see

Paragraph 3-104

Response Enable HIGH

instructions

Limits

Display

0.99865

0.99865

0.83218 to

09.9865

09.9865

09.9865

08.3218 to 08.3448

to

1 .00135

to 1.00135

0.8348
to 10.0135
to 10.0135
to 10.0135

for 3490A

(3490A placed

in re-

5€

Model3490A

STANDARD/DIFFERENTIAL

DC

VOLTMETER

74OB

ho

PEBFORMANCE

CHECKS

MULTIMETER

349OA

hp

Section

V

rr \

t:

I

5)

I

I Immediate

r)

-

E

4. Send

Addresses
LMRE
2

(1268)

V

HMRE
Accept

5.
Check

Have

6.
Yes
No

34$A-l_5045

Reading

Single

Execute

-

Unlisten

-

34g}Atalkaddress

'

Address

3490AoutPut

test

logic

for

10 readings

-

-

10

to

Go
Continue

with

Internal

command

of

sequence

made?

been

OutPut

Trigger

listener

Figure

OIJTPUT

il0558

5-8.

CABLE

External

Reference

Resistance

Input

R
4

E

12. Send
l-l\,tRE
? Unlisten
V

HMRE

13. Accept
Check

14. Send

LMRE
? Unlisten
6

HMRE

lo

)

addresses

-

3490A

-

Address

3490A

for DC

addresses

3490Alisten

-

Address

Test.

v Ranse

command

talk address

listener

of

reading

command

talker

of

address

7.

8. Send

9.

10.

I

l

't

I

addresses

Send
LMRE
? Unlisten

-

3490A

6

-

Address

HMRE

programming

E - Execute

Goto4

addresses

Send
LMRE

-

?

Unlisten command
34904 listen

6

-

Address of

HMRE

l. Send

programming

trl

öt

command

listen address

talker

of

instruction

talker

DC

address

instruction

15.

.

.

16. Send

17.

18.

programming

Send

El

:}

zt
E

addresses

LMRE
'!

Unlisten

-

3490A

V

-

Address

HMRE

Accept

for

Check

addresses

Send
LMRE

'l

Unlisten

-

3490A

6

-

Address

HMRE

AC

3490A

AC

instructions

command

talk address

listener

of

reading

comrnand

address

listen

talker

of

5-9

Section

V

PERFORMANCE

CHECKS

Model

3490A

19.

20.

21. Accept

22. Send

23. Send

24.

25. Accept

26.

27.

lE.

programming

Send

il

tl
pl
: I

ol

E

Send addresses
LMRE
?
V - 3490A talk

-

HMRE

Check for KO

addresses

LMRE
't

6 - 3490A

-

HMRE

programming

:t

),
E

Send addresses
LMRE
?
V - 349OA

-

HMRE

Check for I

Send

addresses

LMRE

2

Unlisten

6

3490A

-

Address

HMRE

programming

Send
RI

a I

al

E

Send

addresses
L\{RE
?

Unlisten

-

V

3490A

-

Address

HMRE

instructions

Ko

.l kQ Range

Unlisten command

address

Address

Unlisten

Address of

Unlisten
Address

of listener

349}Areading

and .l

kSl range

command

address

listen

talker

instructions

lkQRange

command

talk

address

of listener

3490A reading

kO range

command

listen

address

of talker

instructions

l0

kf,) range

command

talk

address

of

listener

29.

Accept

Check

30.

Send
LMRE

-

?

-

6

-

HMRE

3l .

Send
RI
;' )

rt
E

32.

Send
LMRE

-

?

-

V

-

HMRE

33. Accept
Check for

34.

Send
LMRE

-

?

-

6

-

HMRE

35.

Send

,PI

; l

z)

E

36.

Send addresses
I.IURE

'!

-

V

-

HMRE

37.

Accept
Check for

38.

Send
LMRE

-

?
6

-

HMRE

39.

programming

Send
RI

;' )

t)

E

3490A

reading

for

l0

kO range

addresses

Unlisten
3490A
Address

programming

addresses

Unlisten
3490|talk

Address

addresses

Unlisten
3491Alisten

Address

programming

Unlisten
3490A talk
Address

34g}Areading

addresses

Unlisten command
3490A listen
Address

command

listen

address

of talker

instructions

100 kO Range

command

address

of

listener

3490

Lreading

100

kQ range

command

address

of talker

instruction

1000 kO

1000

10,000

range

command

address

of listener

kQ

range

address

of talker

instructions

kQ range

r-10

Model 3490A

PERFOHMANCE

CHECKS

Section

V

addresses

Send

40.

LMRE
2 - Unlisten
V - 3490A

-

Address

HMRE

41.

42.

Accept
Check

Send

349D[reading

10,000

for

addresses

LMRE

-

Unlisten

2

-

3490[listen

6

-

Address

HMRE

43. Send

44. Check

45. Send

programming instructions

IT

:'

E

LMRE

V 3490A talk
(30a)

HMRE

Interrupt single with output

for

SRQ

address and command

-

Address of listener

-

Status

command

address

talk

listener

of

range

kQ

command

address

talker

of

LOW after 3490[completes a reading

address

Poll Enable command

52. Return

to local

HREN

General Test Procedure.

$47.

548. This
GPIB
remote
This

procedure

circuits to

programming,

procedure

may be

accept and

controller.

Test Procedure

$49.

Using

5-50. this test sequence

-hp

Model

9820A Calculator,

operating

547. Tllre

checks

9820A must
the Peripheral
the

Operating
ting instructions.
recorded on an
subsequent tests
presented
by
the

Initialize

in this

the

9820A.

9820A keyboard

the

calculator

the

as

Control

Manuals for these instruments for

The following

-hp

Calculator

in troubleshooting. The

and

procedure

The first statement

sequence

and 3490A by

checks the

ability of

process

and to output measurement

used

with any

Model

98204 Calculator.

is

written

specihcally

performs

and

general procedure

the

34904

addressing

data.

bus system

for the

the

same

in Paragraph

have the I I l44A Interface

II

ROM

Block

installed.

Refer

opera-

test

sequence may

Program Card

and

used in

program

in the form that it is

gives

an

printed

example

required.

prpssing

and

and

to

be

is

of

46. Accept
Check

47.

Send addresses
LMRE
?
6 3490A

-

HMRE

48.

programming

Send
M)
t

I

E

49.

Send address

I-I\,IRE

V

(30a)

HMRE

Accept

50.
Check if

5l .

Send address

(31e)

ASCII character from

if

LDIOT

Unlisten
Address

Single reading

ASCII

LDIOT

-

-

is LOW

command

listen

address

of

talker

instructions

and

command

3490A

talk
Address
Status

Poll

character

is

HIGH

and

command

Universal

Status

Poll

with outPut

address

of listener

Enable

from

untalk

Disable

3490A

command

34gOA

address

command

EXECUTE

(End

Output, EOP, is

LOW while STOP

key

is de-

pressed)

,."

Set

The

LREN

f-r r

ri.{"t'

T t't | |

above

to

LOW.

'','r!

.J

I d_ !

sequence

requires

llf.rT' {'-rl

r.r.rr:.

I I.:'r

that the

following

keys

be

pressed

@o@o@o

r-T\

STORE

EUJ[I

1r
Ir

+

1

to

tll-

l.

counter

Set

5-l I

Section

V

PERFORMANCE

CHECKS

Model 3490A

Address
address

3490A

Immediate

Address
listen address

3490A

is u. This

to

t:::

i',i i::l

::::ll"1[::"

calculator to listen, 34go^ to talk.

I

::::!

r::::f,.li:r

F;: ä il l.

Instruct calculator to
next reading,
taken

and

to listen,

Test No.

Internal

'

',:'r:i
l"-

is

5.

"

i:j ,.," H"'

::i

etc.,

printed,

puts

Accept

r f:l i".

then

4r
p':,:i

*

flir
._t n

:i

" [ "

i:i I

l"i

1 üj

i

._t

i:i;;'

f,l |;i i:

+.[rt-,'ht i t::::l''l]:t

,_ti1pt

ii

calculator

34904 in remote control.

l,

Single

Trigger.

i".l

" r "

i;i

i::

34904

ii F: i,l'.l"

print

reading, trigger

until a total of

go

to 6.

-['

i

t:::t

'l

to talk.

Reading

::';'1

[i:'

reading.

:+

ir

l0 readings have

F [t

l"

"',lri,i-l "

r

-*:l-

9820A

Program

with Output,

calculator

3490A,

print

talk

the

been

Address
function,

Address
reading

Instruct
(see

3490A

.l

j.

rjj

I

t"':

i'i i't

:r , { .i,ü.i

]

i

3490A'to

check

I

:i.

:1.

i:::l'll:l

I..i,:,i1,'T',,

; i

fj F:

l-

9820A

Paragraph34T).

:i;il

Fi: i.t fiil i.

,r

ii i

i':l:

F

i
i i,:. " i"-

to listen,

ke range.

"1

"

'-'

for

"

"

''':'r:l'

l"'i

r-'

talk,

Ko function'

"

'lr"'rr;

,

,,

!::: -ur-.:

.1 - '::!lii;::::1:-, ]

;i:i;;

,,

r.-i

l:.

i_.

to check

Check

"i',ii:i

:.i:l

ii

...,1

ii

l''l

9820A

I " i:::'

9820A

i Fi:l.'t[:il i:.iil

to talk.

*' i::i'

I i.;:

to listen. Accept

Program

l;.::i:i[

l;,i

last character of output format

for .l

kSl range.

t"..:;.

i. l-:'

F llr i*

['f:'"i'

i. llt

Ohms

3490A

Address
DC function,

Address
reading.

34gOA to listen,

:

t,

ii

i-.i.{
r-,

l l L.r :

"F.

3490A

Check for

i!

r:::i''ii:r

+

,:l ii [:i: .i.i[il ].

-:'',:::

:;il

:i.

-1"

li [:

Address

AC

Address
reading.

3490A

function.

!:,

'

i:

i'iii

3490A

Check

9820A to talk. Program

l0

V range.

j.

'r

r! rr

'-'

l::1 l-l

to

| |

I l-

talk,

r i-J t..i

I;;.t

g82OA

DC function.

'

"

'::'

:::'

""

i ü:l-rii::r :i

:jt i';,,::

i

ii I t- ii'::::1;,;r1
"

'

t-:

it

F.

to

listen,98204

'

'1ij

for

to

AC

i i " ,

talk,

9820A

function.

"

[:: .;i::[:

ji

t-.

,.1

1',:.

t.

to

listen.

:.li

hi

[;::it

i

to talk. Progam

"

l'"

to

listen.

3490A to

Accept

34904

Accept

r...

34g0A

to

3490A

Address

I

Address 3490A

3490A to

kO range.

q

I

I

i:":i'lll

I

I

.i

l"::i'l

Il

listen,

9820A to talk. Program

"

" r "

'i

i:,

l,-l

|:i:

to talk,9820A

:

"

d:' i','i

f;

ii

1.

{'i-:

l::;

i:: " i-

to listen.

i-'

ä'"1'JJ':li3'^,rl, lg;,lt'i::r;Y?ä

i:i, !

:i

i',, I,['

+.r,::-i

I i

i.ir

i F.

,,

r.i

i

Address 349olto

l0 kO range.

l:il I

i

j..r

r.":

ii

"i,.,1'

:;;t

1.
li

i.-:

..:1.....

dl

i:li::::

"

1'1,

p:

l;

1

r".:

::;.

..1 l{ Fi lil i-

i

l;

i;::,i;:,.i..

listen,9g20A

"

"

!.-i

,,:i

r

Iii:

il:: " i."

to

:.i:t

i.

,,

:i.

talk.

prosram

3490A to

rast

,:""r;l"k

34904

to

5-l l

f

Ii

E:IrE:

i

'

i_ i:
*

_.;+l;ip

;;:'itr-

':.",,,,

i ' ;

l,

il;:.1)

[::t ].

,;r-:*;'

I i:;,::1.:r[:ir

ll::::i,ii
f

i li;r I

::;rl

Address 3490A

t::f,ll.l

to talk,

.t:iri,,rilx"I:l,,,r:-:i-.

9820A

to

listen.

Model

3490A

Accept

3490A

character

r:t

,:

Fi IlLt

i

I F

Hfi

Address
100

kO

3490A

range.

reading.

of output

tr

::l

:l

t-:

+'t-:..+

1

"i'..".;{

"

l-.

to

Instruct 98204

il
.-l

:::

l'l

4.

i

I [:r

F

[

l:r,ü,"1"

Check

t-.::i;

lir

1""

format.

't

I

ili

listen,9820A

for

l0 kSl range.

:l ;ll

"

].

talk.

to

PERFORMANCE

to check

Program 3490A to

last

CHECKS

Accept
character

Address 3490A
operating mode

3490A

of output

i':Ilhl

+.r".:1! t:':

I l.
.i: f ijl

g

tj;tti:ilili':'"

I'

:i,

.".,i

reading.

Instruct 98204

format. Check

li 1'

:;i'+

ii

tjil::r

;:t
.."t

|',] l-,,

I i i:r fi:

F

l'"

to listen,

9820A

to Interrupt

l"::

:;: I

i:l t"

"1'

Single

to

for

10,000 kO range.

::::l

,'

:i,

to

talk. Program

with

Output.

Section

check

3490A

V

last

r

d:.:

L:t,lIt

Address

t::f'l

"''i:'rl,Ll

3490A

It

"

Accept 3490A
character

Address

1000

Address

of output

cLt:

.Ll Ei I

l':.

!

{ r r-. r r-.r lrJFr i-rl

-r

t-.

! I

!

.-l

,::

TT

r.

L T

l:-l l:l

fr. f'

34904 to

range.

kO

!

C.|:t

r-,

l llr :'

3490A to talk,9820A

r-.

I't Ir :'

"

r

talk,982OA

to

"

r,,,r

{'

l;

li

reading.

format.

":'L

..:'

.-t

!

l'l r [.t T"

!+,:t _..::,

t I I-

! r F. I I

":r't_.

_-

listen,9820A

|:' r-r

I l.:. c. I: T

,,,

,-r

! I

"

[i:::xtH " l"

to listen.

"!

t::

l-

I

Instruct

Check

r.-

:i I

to

to listen.

"r

r.-.

r'

9820A

for 100

..:'

to check

kO range.

talk. Program

last

3490A to

.t

.._,

,

i-:

Check Service

..1' .*l r

[: It:::;

td

"

t,l l.t

Request line. If

I

Address 3490A to
Enable.

Check 3490A response to

r*,

l llr

..lrTtr,:r

"

IT U'.,rE..:1 rrF.I

t];:'

L it '[

" r "

dl

l...l

rl,

":,1:1

:;l

.-l

I

talk, 9820A

r,,

....r ..- rlll

::;

I

Address 3490A to listen,

operating

Address
E_nable.

mode to

.-ri r
ia

F.l.l1

r.-.

l'l Ir :'

!r

r-i r- | |

Single

r r'

(:,

t-t

3490A to talk,

Check 3490A response

"

[,i;'H

line is

|::i:,. .|.

1,1 t"'

to listen.

SPE

:r rr. Ir tj .i-

"

t-t lil

['"

9820A

Reading

! l'|..:' r I."

9820A

F

to

with

t..{,.-r f- I I

to listen.

to

SPE on data line

l-'

go

LOW,

to

Send Status Poll

on data line

talk. Program

Output.

Send

36.

LDI07.

3490A

Status

LDIO7.

Poll

Accept

3490A

character

r:' r

L:

["i IlEl

i

1

IF

ütJtJl'::"F

Address

IO,OOO

Address

kQ range.

t::i'1It

3490A

.j'

l.

r:

f,l Ir

reading. Instruct

of output

r"r*:+t::

:il

I

format.

.+

I

I

1 ;:

,.-tf,1F

i

Check

r::::i I ::i

rjtl".

r*'4r:r*!it'F:T

3490A

.

to listen,

"

';'t,

to

"

';'i"5

9820A to talk. Program

"

,'

l-i

I

t:

i h"

talk,9820A

"

.+

i

1

9820A

for

"I

,,

i"

to listen.

r::

i.-

to check last

I

kQ

000

range.

34904

to

ia.:

universal

Send

command.

Set LREN

i1 tJT'
l_..

.:

"Lfi

j-.

r'itH:rr,..'!rrr.'fir'i

l l Il

-r

!_..

t! .i. r-

i,;';'' I:l;

il ,. $r

t.{ l,i

line to

,t

n

{.1

-t"

i" T.{

r t.t I i

ri.i r

F: hi tl t,.,.

r..r

r,r

..-l i- ':'

r-.,

untalk

f1 r I

HIGH

.'.:r

.i

.i.

:r ,::.. !

I r:. .L.l I:' .:.

|:' ,:'

L

! t- F. I

HIr;1-1,,p

address

end

and

-r.

r

I i t..i

l.t.t

{

t.r. | .j.

.i

and

Status Poll

program.

ri

I

.:

r-

Disable

3

5-l

Section

$51.

5-52.
3490A
the
performed
Performance Tests
The adjustments
be
sample/hold
cannot be
Procedures
the
Hold adjustments
in Figure 5-l
guard
for at
the
removed
be

V

ADJUSTMENT PROCEOURES.

Complete

Multimeter,

following

performed in

standard

cover.

least 4 hours with the covers on

adjustment

to

made with

adjustment

including

paragraphs.

after

only

that

Paragaphs 5-53 through

in

the order

and ratio

correctly, refer to the

made

in

Section

instrument

in Figure 5-10,

l. All

adjustments are shown

Turn the

procedures.

gain

access

guard (inner)

the

procedures

options,

These

it has been determined

the 3490A is

given,

adjustments. If

VII. Location

is shown

3490A

on and

to the

The top

adjustments,

for the Model

are contained in

procedures

out of

and before the

any adjustment

Troubleshooting

of adjustments in

Figure

in
and Ratio

allow it to

before

cover must

cover

on.

ADJUSTMENT

should

adjustment.

5-60 must

5-9, Sample/

adjustments

on

performing

which should

the

from

ac, ohm,

the

top

warm up

be

be

PROCEDURES

wARiltr{G

The inner
caution

are connected

POWEB

5.53.

5-54.

A dc digital voltmeter with

an oscilloscope are

a. Connect digital
tween the
terminal.

c.

Set
ripple present
specified in Table 5-9 cannot be met, refer to
VII, Troubleshooting

cover

prevent

to

SUPPLY

+

V test

17

the sample rate on

with the oscilloscope.

qt

is

shock when high voltages

Input.

to the

ADJUSTMENT.

required

voltmeter and

point

Circuit

and

F429

Al

THERMALADJ.

potential.

Guard

4digit

for this

on AlAl and the input

adjustment.

HOLD

Diagrams.

f,:

Model

3490A

Use

resolution

oscilloscope

Low

and measure

If the

voltages

Section

and

be-

the

w

46R28

lOV

1OOK ADJ

ADJ

LF

fi=i"l;

A7R16

i
J

i

i !!

Figure

5-9. Location

of

Adjustments,

Standard

3490A.

Model3490A

AOJUSTMENT

PROCEDURES

Section

V

power

other

Check

d.

oscilloscope

digital
Table

voltmeter

5-9. If any

and

voltage

vu.

Power SUPPIY

5-9.

Table

A1A1

Point

Test

+

+

17\l

+

5V

+30V

-

17V

-

5V

-

30v

*All

HOLD.

5.55.

5-56. A dc standard
to

resolve

a. Connect

input

and

b. S€t

clockwise to

c. Adjust AlAlR2l0

ing

of 0

d.

PLE

RATE

e.

standard

f. Adjust

mum

C.

(Tumover)
reversing
positive

h.
AlAlR225 (Zero
+

00.0010.

measurements are with the

ripple

ZERO ADJUSTMENTS.

DC

l0

Low

3490A

HOLD

r 150 gV.

FUNCTION

Set

to

Connect

output

reading

Reverse

for

input

and negative

Apply

$57. REFERENCE
5-58.

A

dc standard

adjustments.

16.99

+

4.995 to + 5.075 V

+

30.10

-

16.9

-

5.00

-

30.10

(-hp-

pV

required for

are

voltmeter

dc

terminal.

SAMPLE

position.

Disconnect

to

FAST.

dc standard

+

to

0.00100 V.

AlAlR225 (Zero
on

3490A

polarity

polarity

+

of

reading

readings

0.00100
Detect

ADJUSTMENTS.

(hp-

voltages by

supply

to test

correct,

is not

Voltages.

Voltage

to + 17.01 V
to + 30.90

to - 17.1

-

to

5.85 V

to- 30.90V

7a0B)

and a dc voltmeter

these

between

RATE control

(lntZero)

voltmeter.

DC.

RANGE to

to

3490A input

DetecI

display. Note

input

and adjust AlAlR228

noted

and

V input

adjusting

are equal.

kvel)

7a0B)

in step

for

is

connecting

points

listed in

refer to Section

Ripple*

<

<

(

V
V

< 50 mV

(60mVpp

(25mVp{

Sample

adjustments.

AlAl

fully

for voltmeter

kvel) for maxi-

reading.

f.

AlAlR228 until

to

3490A.

3490A

p-p

mV

50

p-p

mV

60

p-p

mV

25

p-p

Rate

on

able

point

test

counter-

read-

l0

V. SAM-

and adjust

Continue

Adjust

display of

required for these

b.

Connect

standard

output to

c. Adjust

-

10.0000.
d.

Set

Adjust

AlA1R3l7
display
must

readings

be

between

a through

5.59. DC

560.

A

dc standard

3490A

d. Dsconnect
AMPLIFIER

standard

dc

-

10.0000

AlAlR3ll

FUNCTION

(-

REF)

are equal

2 and

(hp-

to

3490A

input

v.

(+Ref)

(0.9999x).

9
dc

for

to

TEST,

that

so

positive

within I

standard.

3490A

RANGE

count.

If

not,

ADJUSTMENTS.

7a0B) is

required

and

adjust

display

to

of

3.

and negative

Last

digit

repeat

steps

for

these

adjustments.

a.
Short input
copper

A

b. Adjust

panel,

c.

d. Remove

dc standard. Adjust

e. Adjust

-

1.00000.
f.

standard

g.

-

100.000.
h.

Short input terminals

oTfset

i.

A2Rl6 (0.1
(algebraically

$6I. AC

5-62. Adjustment
through
procedure.
tion
Guard

349OA

Set

FUNCTION

terminals

wire.

AlR429,

for

3490A display

3490A

Set

RANGE to

short from

standard

A2Rl5

Set 3490A

RANGE to 100

output to - 100.000

Adjust

Reduce

3490A

Set

(100

A2R3

dc

FUNCTION

reading.

Remove short

V

Adj) for

and

subtracting)

CONVERTER

of the

5-60, must

An

factor chart

covers must

be completed

ac calibrator

is required

be in

to

DC, RANGE

with

copper

a

accessible

of 0 r

bar or

through

.000002.

I V.

input terminals

-

output

(l

V

Adj) for 3490A

to

1.000000

V,

and

V.

V

Adj) for 3490A

standard

and note

apply - 10.0000

output

and disconnect.

to TEST,

amount

V input.

RANGE

and

display of - 1000.00,

the

offset noted in

ADJUSTMENTS.

dc circuits, Paragraphs

before

beginning

(-hp-

745A) with

for these

place

for this

procedure.

to .l V.

heavy

solid

hole in

and

rear

connect

V.

display

adjust

display

polarity

to

of

dc

of

6.

of

Adjust

minus

step

h.

5-53

this

a correc-

adjustments.

Guqrd Terminal
or damage

a.

Set 3490A

should

to

the

instrument

FUNCTION

be

connected

may result.

to

DC.

to Low

RANGE to t0 V.

5-63. I

V Range Adjustments.

a.

Set

3490A

b. Connect

tor

output to

factor

chart

FTINCTION

ac calibrator

I

.000000 V

as necessary).

to

AC. RANGE to

to 3490A input.

kHz

(using

at

100

I V.
calibra-

Set

correction

s-l 5

Section

adjust

correct.

5-64.

10.0000.

adjust A6C27

maximum limit
remove
limit of
probably

correct.

5-65.

V

c. Adjust A6R32

1.00000.

d. Change

(1

e.

A6R27

Repeat

10 V Range

a. Set

b.

c. Adjust A6R28

d.

e.

34904 RANGE to 10

calibrator

Set ac

Change

Repeat steps

100

ac calibrator

(10

jumper

adjustment is

has been

V Range Adjustments.

a. Set 3490A

b. Set

,o;.o$|j"rt

ac calibrator

A6R3

(l

V HF Adj) for 3490A

ac calibrator

V LF Adj)

steps c and

Ajdustments.

output to 10.00000
(10

V

V HF Adj)

of adjustment

wire in series

greater

removed

and should

c

and d until

RANGE to

output

(100

V

frequency

for

display of

d until

both

V.

LF Adj) for

frequency

for

with A6C28.If

than

100

to 100.0000

LF

to

display of

is less

10.0000,
be

both readings

V.

Adj)

for

ADJUSTMENT

display of

to

100 Hz

1.00000.

readings

V

at 100 Hz.

display

100 kHz

10.0000. If

than

jumper

replaced.

V

display

and

10.0000,

minimum

wire

are

at 100 Hz.

and

are

of

of

PROCEDUBES

a.

Set

terminals.

Sigral
t

100.0

l2l1A00656

b.

Set

c.

Connect

terminals.

Signal
and decade Guard

d.

Set decade

(l

k

Adj) for

error).

e.

Set

f.

Set

(100

k Adj)

error).

Set

C.

h.

Set

(10,000
resistance

568.

If
adjustment
resistors

100

kf,}

within

a

values

and the

proper

The
3490A

Perfcirm

tL

ments

in Table

FUNCTION
(Instruments

may not

3490A

resistance

display

349OA
decade

for display

3490A

decade

k Adj)

error).

an accurate

of the

within

or l0

MO, whose

close tolerance"Table

tolerances

adjustment

display

step

reads the

of Paragraph

a

5-10.

to

TEST,

Adjust

FUNCTION to O,

Connect 3490A

terminal

resistance to

RANGE to

resistance

RANGE

resistance
for

l0

A7R5

with

have this

decade to

to

of 1.00000

to

of

100.000

to

to

display

resistance

ohms converter

of Ihe

%

required

should

known

RANGE

for display

serial

adjustment.)

RANGE

3490A

Guard

terminal.

Low

I kfl

and

(r

decade

100 k.

100

kQ

and adiust

(t

decade

10,000

k.

10 M{-2

and adiust

of 10000.0

decade is

may

full-range

resistances

5-10

shows

for valid

made

be

value

5-67 before

Model

to

7.

of

numbers

to

Input

to

Input

adjust

resisrance

resistance

(t

not

available,
be made
value

of I

are

known

the

resistance

adjustment.

so

that the

of the

making

34904

Q

Short

-

9700.0
below

I k.

O

and

Low,

A7Rl4

A7Rl6

A7Rl8

decade

using

ke,

to

resistor.

a_djust-

d. Change

adjust

A6C6

maximum
remove
limit

of

probably

e.

Repeat

correct.

$66. O HMMETER

567.

Adjustment
through
procedure.

(GR

chart

If

dure.
to Paragraph

chart

factor
ins the
the
adiusted

_i-16

ohms

decade

ac calibrator

(100

V HP

limit

jumper
adjustment is

has

of adjustment

wire in series

been removed

steps c

ADJUSTMENTS.

of the

5{0,

must
A resistance
1433-Z)

a suitable

is

to

1.00000

is

resistance

548.

The

should

be

converter.

high

at I

plus

be completed

frequency

Adj) for

with A6C4. If

greater

than

and should

and

d until

circuits, Paragraphs

dc

decade with a correction

required for the

decade

enor

indicated

taken

into

For

example,

kQ, the

the

resistance

3490A

to

100 kHz

display of 100.000.

is

less than

100.000,

before

is

account when

jumper

be

replaced.

both readings

beginning

following proce-

not available.

the

by

if the

resistanöe of
display
decade enor.

and

If

100.000,

minimum

wire

are

5-53

this

factor

refer

correction

adiust-

should

be

5.69. SAMPLE/HO LD ADJUSTMENTS.

5-70. Adjustment of the
through
Sample/Hold
must be
the location

shown on the top

also

5-71. 0ffset

5-72. A dc digital

l0pV is
gain

the

of

3490A

Range

1ko

100 ko

0,000 ks,

must

560,

performed in the

of

be

adjustments. The following

the

Sample/Hold adjustments. They are

Gain Adjustment.

voltmeter

required

Offset

Table 5-10.

for this procedure,

Amplifier.

Value

900 o to
90kato110ka

gMA

1.1 ko

to

guard

Ohmmeter

Resistance

11 MO

circuits, Paragraphs

dc

completed

order

before beginning

given.

cover.

having

Adjustment.

Tolerance

L

O.OO2'yo

t

O.OO25o/o

!

O.O1oÄ

Figure 5-10

a resolution

which

5-53

the

adjustments

shows

of

adjusts the

3490A

Adlustment

A7R14
A7R16

A7R18

Model3490A

toP

Remove

a.

b. Locate
display
Blank" in

Point

L and

display

providing
following adjustments

c.

Set

SAMPLE/HOLD

HOLD.

d.

Connect

ground

test

the

the white/black

connector.

cable

Figure

connect

full

to five

greater

3490A

input

Short

digital

point on AlAl.

5-10.

digits

resolution

FTINCTION

to TRACK/HOLD, SAMPLE RATE to

Higfr

ADJUSTMENT

guard cover.

just

wire

wire

This

Disconnect

to Test

more accurately.

Point M. This

for

Sample/Hold

in

to

to

Low.

voltmeter between A27TP3

Record

to the rear

is labeled

this

order

DC, RANGE

voltage reading.

"5th

wire from

restores the

measurements,

to

make the

to IO

of the

Digit

Test

V.

and

PROCEDURES

5-73. 0ffset

5-74.

This

that

there is

negative

HOLD,
SAMPLE

t

input terminals.
Note 3490A

inputs.

a. With 3490A

and input

RATE

b. Adjust

0.0001

v.

c.

Dsconnect input

Adjustment.

procedure

no turnover

A27Rl3,

reading.

adjusts

A dc standard

set

shorted

fully clockwise.

Offset, for

short

Set standard

the

error

between positive

(-hp

to IOVDC

previous

as in

3490A

and connect

output to

Section

Offset Amplifier

7a0B) is required.

RANGE,

TRACK/

adjustment,

display

of zero

dc standard

+

10.0000

V

so

and

set

to

V.

e. Connect

A28

and

f. Set
TRACK/HOLD.

g.

Adjust

reading

wire between

screws.

the same as that

h. Dsconnect digital voltmeter

i.

Replace top

sth

BLANK

A27TP3

jumper

ground.

SAMPLE/HOLD

A27Rl4,

LTST and

DtGtT

wire between

switch

Gain Adjust,

noted in step d I

ground.

guard

cover

Test

to

OFF.

for digital

and remove

and secure

Point

LTST

then

back to

voltmeter

0.0005 V.
jumper

with only two

on

d. Reverse

note

reading­A27Rl3
step

c

and step

e.

Continue
A27Rl3
readings

$75. Dielectric
5:76.

A

procedure,
pensation.

polarity

Disregarding

to split

until

with

the

d.

reversing

there

positive

Absorption

standard (hp-

dc

which adjusts

of input

difference

input

is no

numerical

and

negative

Adjustment.

7a0B) is

the

(to

polarity

between the

polarity

difference

inputs.

dielectric

-

10.0000
display, adjust

V) and

readings in

i'

I

and adjusting

between

required for

absorption

this

com-

A27R14

A27R13

Figure

5-10.

Location

of

Sample/Hold

Adlustments.

5-17

Section V

AOJUSTMENT

PROCEDURES

Model 3490A

a. With 3490A
HOLD,
connected
standard output

+

S77.

5-78. This
3310A), a
oscilloscope
output
output
of 2

3490A has BCDiRemote Expand
connect Stretched
Encode

HOLD as

HOLD.

negative slope

.1 ms/div., Delayed sweep to I

SAMPLE

to input

Adjust

b.

10.0000

a. Connect

b.

c.

V.

Response

procedure

having a delayed

(-hp

must be a

to

V and a width of at least

200

(J7

pin

With 3490A set to l0

in previous

oscilloscope

Set

set to l0 VDC

RATE fully

as

+

10.0000 V.

to

A27R6, DA

(Display

Adjustment.

requires

silicon

l80C/DllOSlAllS2lA).

drode,

negative-going pulse

equipment

Pulse

28).

adjustment, set

and

Main

clockwise,

in previous

Gain, for display of

noisy.)

will be

a function generator

a l0kQ

sweep

shown in

as

Output

controls for External Trigger,

(J7

VDC RANGE

sweep.

ps/div.

RANGE, TRACK/

and

standard

dc

adjustment,

resistor and an

and

a delayed

The

with

nanoseconds.

30

Figure 5-7.

Option

pin l0) to External

SAMPLE

Main sweep to

Set

set

(-hp-

gate

delayed

an

and TRACK/

gate

amplitude

If the

020, also

RATE to

dc

Or;rra

öEEEEilEE

X9**t

g,lqe

I I

TTfn0000000000

i**++QoL

|

-Rr8-

t

-l

H I

) lcÄeiel

/t11 |

L:t-Jg

.E

ot3

[i----l

u5

I

tr

|

7l

At3

hp Porl

Figure

5-1

a.

Set

between

b. Connect
adjust standard
indicates
standard output.

3490A FUNCTION

Set

RATIO switch to EXT REF lV.

EXT REF Hig[ and Low

Overload, reverse

No.03490-66513

1.

Location of Ratio Adjustments.

to

TEST, RANGE to

Connect short

terminals.

dc standard to INPUT terminals

output

to + 10.0000 V. If

polarity

the

the display

of the

4.

and

dc

d. Set
to I kHz,
signal

e.

fied
going
which should

f. Adjust
approximately
wave.

C.
step

h. Remove
Blank"

i.

function
and adjust output level

as displayed on oscilloscope.

Adjust

trace

begins approximately 450

transition of square

Adjust

e.

wire

from Test Point

Replace

5.79. RATIO

5{0. Adjustment

through

Ratio Reference

74OB), a I
stable
a mercun'
these
Ratio
zuard

5{0.

M t

voltage

battery (Mallory

adjustments.

adjustments.

cover.

generator

oscilloscope

near

be

delay

ps

120

A27R3, Response,

top guard

secure

and

REFERENCE

of the

must

Adjustments.

l0%

source

Figure

to square

delay control

wave. Note 3490A readin$,

zero.

so

after negative-going

intensified

that

cover

M to Test Point

guard

top

wave, frequency

for

20

gs

for display noted in

and move

cover.

ADJUSTMENTS.

circuits, Paragraphs

dc

completed

be

resistor

between

5-1 I

They

are

before beginning

A dc standard

(hp-

0698-1051) and a

9.5 V and

TRl77),

shows the location

also shown

are required for

peak-to-peak

V

so that

intensi-

negativg-

after

trace

begins

edge of square

"5th

Dgit

L.

5-53

the

(-hp-

10.5

V, such as

the

of

on the top

NOTE

c and d adjust

Steps
Extemal Reference Amplifier and

Amplifier.

back

'

the integrator

4,

'

Reference

to the

adjustments

output
same
load.

c. Adjust Al3Rl7

display

output

for zero
positive
reads zero I 0.0001 V for either polarity

A13R8
inputs

t
both I V

REF

goes to

and

and

d.

Set

(Offset

for display

e. Repeat steps c

0.0001

f. Remove

V for both positive

and

terminals.

Amplifier

!

10.0000 V input.
are

the

and

polaity,

Overload, reverse polarity

slowly adjust Al3Rl7

display.

RATIO switch to

Continue

negative 10.0000

1)

with

of zero t

10 V EXT

short

the zero setting of

llith the

set so that the amplifier

3490A

the

(Offset

positive

and d until

REF

and

34904

charges to

output

input

dßplay

0.0001

ranges.

connect I Mf2

the

and dischmges

If the

voltage are

indicates Over-

3) for zero

in opposite

adjusting

inputs

V

EXT

REF I V.

negative

and

V.

negative

and

the

the Feed-

set to Test

Extemal

zero

the

display. If the

of

dc standard

direction

A13Rl7

until

input.

display is zero

resistor to EXT

with

display

Adjust

10.0000V

inputs

on

}l5

Model34904

s. Set

efgni

10.0000
h.

colTect.

i.

nals.
DC,

RATIO

(Bias. Atlj.)

inputs

V

Repeat

Disconnect

RATIO

Set

RANGE

ttr

i. Connect

other

or

V.

10.5
INPUT

reading.

Connect

in

l. Set

to

output

steP

RATIO

1 mV/hr,

3490A

k.
set standard
reading

display.

m. Reverse

INPUT

and

the
repeating steps
equal to the
both

readings.)

n.
selected
With

mercury

to

LOW, note

o.
INPUT

reading in step

Reduce

in step

Reverse

and the
repeating steps
equal to
both

the

reading

readings.)

EXT

to
both

with

display

a

of

through

resistor

INT

to

battery

voltage

terminals,

to

positive

to

zero
g

from

-

to

EXT
voltage

for

steps

lMft

switch

V.

10

mercury

a

floating

standard

dc

switch

j.

to EXT

switch

the polarity

EXT REF

REF

of the

terminals.

k through m until the

(Polarity

m.

EXT

REF voltage to

k.

S€t RATIO switch
battery
3940A

connected to

display.

the polarity

EXT

REF terminals.

n

and o until

in step

of the

the

n.

@olarity

I V'

REF

positive and

t 0'0005

all readings

until

REF

EXT

FUNCTION

REF,

between

source

Higfr,

REF

l0 V-

voltage

9'5

stable

+

to

Low'

terminals and

to negative

equal

Note 3490A

at both the

Adjust

readingin step

should

l/10

the voltage

to

EXT REF I

INPUT, - to

voltage

at both the

Adjust

reading in

should

ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES

Adjust

negative

V'

termi

V and

within

Note

Al3Rl7,

be - for

HIGH,

Al3R8,

step o is

be - for

are

to

I is

V.

+

s.

Set

Al3Rl4

(10

t. Reduce EXT

selected

REF I

-

in step

V. Adjust Al3Rl2

10.0000.
u. Set RATIO switch to INT

TEST,
negative

RANGE to 3.

readings.
and between
AlAlR3lT
both

readings

v. Set RATIO

-

10.0000

alternate

V

+

reading.

w. Adjust A13Rl9

equal

to

(positive

Adjust

x.

positive

t I count, and
count, respectively.
procedure

reading

y.

Positive and

Perform DC Amplifier

z.

s-59.

RATIO

switch to EXT REF lOV.

V Adj) for display

REF

(positive).

k

This test alternates

Ifthe

readings are not equal t

!

0.99992 and ! 0.99999,
to

Refl

C

(after

obtain this condition.

adjustment).

switch to EXT REF l0V.

to

EXT REF terminals.

and

-

as

previous

in

(Offset

reading,

(steps

step

u)

AlAlR3lT for

step u.

in

negative displays

to readings

equal

If not,

through x).

a

of - 10.0000.

voltage

RATIO

Set

(lV

REF, FUNCTION

step.

301)

+

(positive

L

positive

recorded

repeat

Adjustment,

Section

to

l/10 the

switch to

Adj) for

positive

Readings

Record

positive

for

reading,

display

now

should

in

this adjustment

V

Adjust

voltage

EXT

display

and

I count

adjust

Record

Apply

will

positive

display"

step

v)

equal

equal

be

step n + I

Paragraph

of

to

to

p.

Repeat

correct.

q.

Connect

+

HIGH,

r. Connect

set

standard

reading in

to

step

LOW.

output

j

steps

mercury

through

battery

dc standard

to positive

j.

o

until

to

IMUT terminals,

to

EXT

REF terminals

voltage

all readings

equal to

negative

are

-

to

and

In

order

to

operate

Ratio

Assembly
Jumper
it
Adiustmen

Assembly

will be necessary

t s, Paragraph

NOTE

the

3490A with

A

I 3

removed and the Ratio

A26 inserted

perform

to

the

5-5 7.

place,

in

its

Reference

the

5-19

',

t',.

Hewlett,-PaQkard

.

.

Number

Serial

PARAGRAPH

':;:..'',

.:

,..:

.::i::..r:..,::.

,r,,,,,.,.

Model 349oA

$9

:,-:..,:-

PERFOBMANCE

DESCRIPTION

DC Voltmeter

.1

V

.

tV

10V

Accuracy

10.0100ov
r0.05000v

ro.100OOV

11.0oooov

110.O0OOV

TEST

RECORD

READTNG

resrs

performed

by

_

TEST

.009995
.049990

0.09997

oo.gggz
0{1.9990

LIMITS

Max.

.010005
.050010
.100015

0.10003
o.50006

1.00010

01.oo03

10.0010

stt

'':;;

='t;!,'

:'t:1

r

10o.00O

1OOOV

AC Voltmeter

Range

1V

10v

.

'

,';,:

10OV

lmo

v

1V

10v

Ohmmeter

Range

Accuracy

nput

I

tOO

1000
1000

Accuracy

1V
1V
1V

1V
5V

10v

lOV

V

v
v

1V

3V

iloo.ooov

i

50O.00O

+

IOOO.OO

50 kHz

25O
25O

Input

Freq.

2O Hz

1O kHz

1fl) kHz
10O

kHz

2OkHz

2O Hz

lOOHz

10 kHz
1O0

Hz

kHz

kHz

r.,

V
V

V

099.990

0099.97
0999"86

0.99600

0.99875

0.99875
oo.9965

(X.9925
G).9600

o09.965
o99,875

0998.65

0998.75

0.99190
02'9715

Min.

o10.o03

100.010

0100.03

0500.08

1000.14

1.00400

1.00125

't.00125

01.oo35

05.0075

10.0400

010.035

1@.125
1001

.35

1001

.25

1.OO810

03.0285

Max.

t.rtj:..::..::

:,:i;.,:,'

';'t:',:'.,,',t.

..

,',.,,'

DC

Common-Mode

AC Common-Mode

Normal-Mode

AC

DC Voltmeter

1O

V Range

1O0

AC Voltmeter

Without

25 Hz
25O kHz

With

25 Hz

250

V

Rear

kHz

Rangre

Rear

Terminal

Input

Input lmpedance

Terminal

Rejection

Rejection

Rejection

Resistance

.@9983
o99988
0{,.9s88

099.988

tr s9.86

09996.3

000.908

0.65975

0.49211
o.65804

o.41321

.1000t7

1.00012

10.0012

100.012
100o.14
100G'.7

0.00005
o0.0001

oo.0316

oo.0010
oo0.910

PERFORMANCE

TEST

BECORD

(CONT'D}

PARAGRAPH

5-32

DESCRIPTION

Sample/Hold DC Accuracy

Track/Hold

Range

1V
1V
1V

10v
10v

10v

100
100
100

1000
1000
1000

v
v
v

v
v
v

I nput

*

0.10000

r

0.50000

r

1.0oooo

r

1.00000

r

5.00000

I

10.oo00

r

10.0000

r

50.oo00

i

100.000

!

100.000

r

500.000

1

1000.00

Acquire/Hold

1V
1V
1V

10v
10v
10v

r

o.10000

1

0.50000

r

1.00000

r

l.ff)Ooo

I

5.00000

!

10.oo(n

READING

Pos.

Neg.

v
v
v

v

v

v
v

v
v

v
v
v

v
v
v

V
v
v

TEST

Min.

t

0.0998

r

0.4998

!

0.9997

r

00.998

r

04.998

r

09.997

r

009.98

r

049.98

r

099.97

r

0099.8

*

0499.8

r

0999.7

!

0.0998

0.4998

+
r

0.9997

I

00.998

r

04.998

r

09.997

LIMITS

Max.

0.1002

0.5002

1.0003

01

.o02

05.002

10.o03

010.02
o50.o2

100.03

oloo.2

0500.2

1000.3

o.1002

0.5002

1.0003

ol

.o02

05.oo2

10.oo3

5-34

5-38

Ext

Ref

Range

1V +
1V
1V
1

V
1V
1V
1V +

10V

lO.V
lOV
10v

Ext

Ref

Range

lov

1V

100 v
100

v

100

v

1000
1000
1000

Sample/Hold Response

10Vrange,l

1 V range,2OO

DC/DC

Ext

Voltage

r
1
1

r

v

I

v

r

v

Ratio Accurary

Ref

10.oo00

50.ooo0 v

100.ooo
loo_ooo

50o.ooo v
10fi).00

kHz

Preferred

0.10000v

+

0.50000v

+

1.O0000v

+

100000v

-

1.ü)O00v

-

1.00000v
120000v

+

1.0000OV

+

5.0OO0O
+1O.O000
+12.OOO0

V
V
V

Alternate

v

v

v
v

Hz

Input

Range

10v

10v
100
100

Method

Method

1V

1V

1V
1V
1V
1V
1V

v
v

''a?.-:_

I

Voltage

+

0.10000

+

0.50000 v

+

1.00000

-

1.OO000

-

1.0qn0

+

1.OO000

+

1.00000

+

1.00000

+

5.00000

+

100.000

+

100.000

Pos.

nput

v
v

v
v
V
v
v
v
v
v

Neg.

Reading

r

oo998

r

049.98

t

09937

r

OO99"8

!

0499-8

!

0999.7

Min.
+099955
+

0.99979

+

0.99982

-

0.99982

+

0.99982

-0.s9982

+

0.83316

+

099955

+

09.9979

+

099979

+083.31

09.9982

09.9982

r

0.001

r

0.oo1

3

010.02
o50.o2

'too.03

0100.2

0500.2

1000.3

v
v

Max.

+

1.OO045

+

1.OO021

+

1.00018

-

1.OOO18

+

1.00018

-

1.00018

+

0.83350

+

10.0045

+

10.0021

+

100.021

+083.353

10.o018

10.0018

PERFORMANCE

TEST

RECORO

(CONT'D}

'^.:;^*

AC/DC

Ret

.:. Ext

F"ngu

11;,',

lV

,

'

lv

:

lV

1gv 1.00000 v

-

10v

10.ü)oo v

12.0000

External Reference

Resistance

DESCRIPTION

Accuracy

Ratio

Ext Ref

Voltage

0.50000

v
t.ooooo v
120000

5.00000 v

v

v

Test

Input

lnput

Range

1V
IV
1V

t0v
10v
10v
10v

nput

I

Voltage

0.50000

1.00000

1.00000

1.00000

5.00000

10.o@o

10.0000

v
v
v

v
v
v
v

READING

Max.

099865
099865

0.83218
099865

09.9865

09.9865

08.3218

10O counts

TEST

LlMITS

Min.

1

.O0135

1.00135

0a344{l

10.0135

10.0135

10.o135

08.3448

change

Model

34904

Section

VI

INTBODUCTION.

6-1.

6-2. This

pafts.

ment
reference
part

number

notes and

a.

Total

The

total

section

provides

quantity

contains

Table

designators

each

of

quantity used in

number appears.

Description

b.

below.)

c.

Typical

(See

Appendix A

d.

Manufacturers

manufacturer

for

63. Miscellaneous

6-l

the

of a

of

list

part

parts

lists

information

for

parts in alphameric order

indicates the description,

and

part,

together with

following:

instrument (Qty

the

given

part

is

part.

the

of

the

of

manufacturers.)

(See

the

part

first

list

in a

number.

are listed at

the

end

sEcTt0N

REPLACEABLE

ordering

replace-

of

their

-hp-

any applicable

vl

PARTS

6.4.

ORDERING INFORMATION.

6-5.

To obtain

your

to
B for
Hewlett-Packard

and

local

list

serial

6.6. NON.LISTED

column).

time

of

abbreviations

five-digit

of

Table

the

part

code.

6-1.

6-7 .

To obtain a part

a.

Instrument
b. Instrument
c.

Description
d.

Function

PROPRIETARY

6.8.

6-9. Items
designator
of

Hewlett-Packard

replacement

Hewlett-Packard

of

office

part

numbers.

PARTS.

model number.

serial number.

of the

and

location

marked

column

are

instrumenrs.

parts,

locations.)

numbers.

that

not

is

part.

ofthe

PARTS.

by

a dagger

available

address order

Field

Office.

Identify parts

Include

listed,

include:

part.

(f)

only for

or inquiry

(See

Appendix

by their

instrument

in the

repair

reference

and service

model

@J..
c@f .

@dp

dep.­DPOT
OPST

el4t
acap

FET
txd

8.

c.
CR
OL
6

Hz.
tD.

rmpg

L........,

lin,.............

lo9.

..,

,. ...

mA

.. . ..

MHz

..............megahenz=

Mll...............megohmlsl -

retllm

.....

.faradld

trilsistor

. . moto1

daode

line

lu$

mtr.......

ms
mt9

yr

NC
Ne..
NO

Pr.lix

Eta
gr9

rpga

kilo
h&to
deka
deci

rL

HR

J.
K.
L.

MP
P.

..

...... fieldeflet

. . -

.........rixed

.........asmblv

.

, .

. . .

. . .

..........battery

........€pertor

.....

-

.....

........&tay

.

.

......,Emp

mis

eletronic part

............

hertz

. . .

. . . logorithmic

., . .. milliampere{s}

.........retatjilm

nanoampere{s)

. .

.

... .. . normally

Symbols

T

M

or Meg

Kork

h

da

d

ABBREVIATIOilS

per

{cyclelsl

.,...mmuf*'tiiä

sond)

inside diamet6

. . impregnated
..incande$ont
. in$larion{edl

....inductq

..linedtapü

tapd

=

1O3 amera

10+6here

10+6ohms

=

1O-9

a-oer*

closd So

.neon

normally

open

DECIMAL

M0ltipli6

to12
to9
ro6

rd

t02
lo
1o-1

DESIGNATORS

. .filter O. .

.........hearer

integratedcircuit

...

....

iack

. .. .

. ..relay

......anductor

.....

... meter

parl

rechani@l

plug

NPO

.

.

. .,
*ct
Si

.....,

MULTIPLIERS

Pr.fix

centi
milli
micro
nano
pico
femto
afio

.

OCR .........

8..,.........

RT
S
T.,
TB.
TC.
TP .

..........n€g6tiw

temrrature

lz4o

-.. nan@cond{s}

...... notsp4acly

.......*ction(sl

Symbok

c

m
lI

n

p
t
a

.....,ransi$q

-

üansi$ordiode

........resisor

.....thermistor

.........sitch

.... trans{ormet

.

. teiminal
...therrccouple
..-...tdpornt

tDsitive

6ef f icient)

=

lO-9

econds

repleable

...,

.elenium

......silicon

Multiplie

10-2
tO-3
to€
l0-9

10-12
tO-15
19-18

tE*d

zero

Ta.......

TC

. .... ..

,.. . ...

@rage

...

... ..

.,optimum

value *tom

no

dildatd

value

eletcd

{pm may

type numbc?

$lectgd

Dupont

@

atfcbry.

be mined}

6i9ned

d

+ecial

de Nemorc

sTD-A-2734

type

6-l